《The Biker Brothers and the Golden Baby》


 1 The Biker Brothers

    It wa a warm October afternoon and Jamie was excited to go home already. After his teacher bade goodbye, he immediately stood up, got his bag, and ran out of the classroom. Hurriedly, he took his bike and pedaled his way through the crowd.


    Jamie was eleven and like any boy of his age, he liked to spend time with his friends, shoot the baskets, or simply chat all day. Upon leaving the school''s gate, he heard his friends'' voice.


    Find authorized novels in Webnovel£¬faster updates, better experience£¬Please click www.novelhall.com for visiting.


    "Jamie!" Bogart called him out. "We are here!"


    Bogart''s fluffy body swayed with each word he said. He was already panting with what he did. Nonetheless, he continued to take a bite of his massive sandwich.


    "What took you so long?" Tonton demanded. "We have been waiting for like hours already."


    Anthony was the group''s genius. His eyes frowned beneath his thick reading glasses.


    "I''m sorry, guys." Jamie answered. "Ms. Boltron won''t let us out until somebody gets the correct answer to her questions."


    "It should not be that way!" Kiko hollered. "Once the bell rings, she should let the students out. She can''t detain you all just because nobody can answer her questions. It is against the constitution."


    Kiko was full of pride with his words. He acted like he knew all the laws, and he spoke with pride and dignity each time he conveyed certain knowledge.


    " Leave it, guys, " Jamie reasoned." What''s important is that we can all go home now. "


    Bogart gobbled the last piece of his sandwich. He gulped orange juice from his metal tumbler and effortfully mounted on his bike. Kiko smirked seeing him while Tonton gently hang his bag on his back. At Jamie''s cue, the four boys began riding their bikes.


    For the boys, life in Subangdaku (which means "large river") was easy and fun. Located between a large pristine river and virgin mountains, Subangdaku wa a peaceful community of simple farmers and fishermen. People relied mostly on agriculture and fishery for their everyday needs. There were no surrounding large industries and so the small village enjoyed clean air and water. Life was simple, and this simplicity brought a quiet fun to the villagers.


    Jamie breathed long and hard. They had been pedalling a good distance already and he felt his legs already tiring up. He looked at Bogart. His friend was more fatigued, his tongue almost hanging out from his mouth. In fact, they were all tired but nobody was relenting. They must continue biking.


    Jamie smiled. He felt pride in his heart. He could not be prouder of his friends, or better, brothers. He saw them as brothers from different mothers. They were very close that he would do anything just to keep their friendship and closeness intact.


    Tonton was Jamie''s best buddy among the three. They had been friends since they could remember. Because Tonton''''s house was right beside Jamie'' s, they had been playmates since babies. When they became mature enough to count numbers and spell words, they became allies and conspirants. They sneaked into each other''s house for cookies or juice. When Tonton accidentally broke his mother''s favorite rose plant, they trampled the entire garden and blamed the dogs about it. When Jamie got into a scuffle with a boy from another block, his friend was quick to lend a hand and helped him beat the boy. Just enough for the victim to go home and report to his parents that he had been chased a bunch of vicious dogs.


    It was in a similar situation that they encountered Bogart. They were in second grade by then and the tandem was used to roam the grassland near their school to look for fighting spiders after classes. It was quiet in the sea of grasses, except for the occasional songs of crickets and the eerie waves of leaves, when Jamie and Tonton heard voices shouting and a meek one which seemed to be crying. They looked where the voices came from and soon find themselves right in the middle of the grasses.


    Four (according to Tonton) or five (like Jamie was so fond of repeating) boys encircled a scared, chubby boy. It was Bogart and he was crying. There was small cut in his left lips, possibly due to a punch he received earlier.


    "Stay away from this, kiddos," the tallest of them barked. "We just want something from Piggy here." The other boys laughed.


    "I told you," Bogart pleaded, "I have already given you all my money."


    "But it is not enough!" the assailant yelled.


    Tonton clinched both his fists and anger was painted in his face. Jamie looked at him. ''Sure, you look nerdy'' , his mind said, ''but you are not a coward. You fight when you know you have to.''


    Tonton suddenly shouted at the top of his voice. Instinctively, the duo rushed and attacked the gang. Encouraged, Bogart stopped his crying and joined the fight. That afternoon, four or five thugs were seen crying in the grasses while a big chubby kid from another section became friends with the brave buddies.


    Kiko only came into the picture years later. They were in fourth grade and Kiko''s a writer in the school publication. They wanted their poems to be placed in the paper but the student editor only laughed upon reading their works.


    "These are trash!" Kiko unsympathetically told them.


    Annoyed, Tonton pinched him in the nose. Kiko fought and an instant brawl ensued. After they were called into the guidance counselor, they miraculously became friends.


    Fast forward and they were now in fifth grade. They were not classmates as they belonged to different sections. Yet, their friendship did not die down. Instead, they became more attached to one another. To keep their closeness, they agreed to meet after class in the afternoon and ride home together in their rickety bikes.


    Jamie had a sweeping recollection of such things and a smile formed in his lips. He smelled the cold afternoon breeze. They smelled like fresh flowers after a rain. The sun was already sinking in the horizon, its hue spreading like wildfire on the clear blue water of the river.


    Jamie had an instant panic. They could not afford to be outside their village after dark. In a rural district like Subangdaku, the darkness can be very dangerous, especially for small boys like the Biker Brothers.....

 2 The Haunted House

    The sun was already falling on the horizon, its orange and pink rays splashed on the greyish sky. Below, lovely water lilies were resting quietly on the serene river.


    "The sunset is incredibly beautiful today," Tonton voiced out.


    "Yeah," Bogart agreed while arduously maneuvering his bike. "And the sky is clear, too. There will be no rain tonight."


    "Hope you are right," Kiko echoed. "And hope we can get much faster. I don''t want to get caught by darkness in the road."


    Instantaneously, a chilly breeze blew past them. Reflexively, the boys looked at each other. For a while, no one of them talked; they focused on pedalling their bikes. After the village where their school was located, there were would only be few houses along the way to their homes. There were only grasses and silent dirtroad in their path.


    It was October and being in a tropical country, the days were shorter in that time of the year. Hence, the watercolors of the skies gradually vanished as dusk began to take over.


    "We have to hurry up!" Bogart barked, and the boys vigorously turned the wheels of their bikes.


    No sooner, the white roof of a dilapidated house loomed from a distance. Despite the twilight coldness, the boys sweated profusely, possibly because not only of their relentless biking but also due to the fear they felt inside. Tonton swallowed a lump in his throat while Kiko wiped a sweat on his nose.


    Jamie slowed down his bike and the other boys followed. We have to be careful, he thought. They were nearing the old house.


    Find authorized novels in Webnovel£¬faster updates, better experience£¬Please click www.novelhall.com for visiting.


    It was a big house, big enough to carry two floors with endless rooms. Its once varnished wooden frames and walls faded in time, leaving a termite-infested facade. Yet, the house must have been made with good lumber as it firmly withstood the fury of rain and sun. It remained standing in proud yet eerie magnificence. It must have been a beauty before. Parties must have been held inisde or around the house. Petite ladies in flashy gowns must have gracefully danced through it polished floors white young boys on the benches gaped their mouths as beauties glided past them. Jazz or romantic music must have filled the air. In the kitchen, maids were busy preparing viands, cakes, bread, and other delicacies while others washed the silver plates and shining utensils. The house must have once been bustling with life and love.


    For now, it was a thing of fear to the people of Subangdaku. Gone were possible sweet tales of romance. Instead, countless horror stories about the house had been told and passed on from generation to generation. According to the villagers, creepy voices could be heard inside the house. These voices were varied. Several claimed to have heard weeping and shouting inside the house. They said that a faith healer once lived in the house who could drive out evil spirits from the possessed. She could even talk to the dead and cast out curses. Then one day, she disappeared mysteriously. The lord of the underworld supposedly took her and the spirits she had communicated with were released to the human world and dwelt on the lonely rooms and nooks of the old house.


    Others also claimed that a white lady would torment passersby. During midnight, the lady would appear to anyone who gets near the house. The recent road accident in Subangdaku was even attributed to the lady. Rumors said that the victim, a young man drunk after a night of partying, unfortunately passed through the road at three in the morning. He was all alone, and just few moments after passing the house, a lady clod in white suddenly appeared at the backseat of his car. He was caught in an instant panic, and losing control of the steering wheel, his car bumped into an old acacia tree. It was already morning when people saw the crumpled vehicle. The young man was drenched in blood. Everyone assumed he died already but when he was rushed to the hospital, he gained consciousness. Yet, he lost his sanity and incessantly cried and shouted. He was asking for the lady to leave him alone. Later, the man was permanently confined in a mental institution.


    The villager kids also had their fair share of horror stories about the house. For Jamie and his friends, the most terrifying was about the monster babies and the demonic centaur who was guarding them. It was told that a group of children, belonging to the same block in school, dared to visit the house one evening. They were working on their homework of collecting nocturnal animals and wanting to discover peculiar species, they ventured into the house. Once inside, the more or less twenty classmates began searching for weird insects until one of them heard a baby''s mild cry.


    The girl followed the voice and soon found herself inside one of the rooms in the upper level. The cry seemed to come from beneath the rickety bed. And when she stooped and peeped below the bed, alas, a baby was seen whispering. The girl crawled through the small space and while she was nearing the baby, the latter seemed to lower down its cry. Much to her surprise, as when she was finally face to face with the baby, its face gradually contorted and transformed into a vile creature. It showed sharps fangs and suddenly shrieked. Frightened, the girl also hollered and immediately ran. Like an orchestra, the other kids also shouted, chased by the baby monster. The house was suddenly filled with terrifying screams. The helpless children managed to gather in the sala. Just as they finally caught their breath, a horned centaur showed up from the upper level. The monster baby was clutching his body. With all this might, the centaur released a deafening neigh. The kids scrambled on their feet and vacated the house. Fortunately, they suffered only minor bruises and cuts.


    Presently, the boys were finally in front the house. They stopped their bikes and looked hard at the house. Jamie''s hairs stood up, the same way that the other boys experienced.


    "I''ll never set foot on that house," Kiko muttered.


    "Neither would I," Bogart seconded.


    "Let''s leave," Jamie suggested.


    Just as when they started to pedal, a loud thunder from the dark sky echoed. The boys stopped and after a split second of fear, they sped away....

 3 The Shooting Star

    "Hurry up!" Jamie shouted.


    The boys pedaled even more laboriously. The sky was now dark as coal and the sudden thunder brought more dread into the boys'' heart.


    "Did you just hear that?" Bogart asked. "It was frighteningly loud!"


    "It was the loudest I heard all my life," Tonton seconded.


    From out of nowhere, flashes of lightning appeared in the sky. They were random and their bright yellow and white streaks cut across the sky.


    The four stopped and stared at the wonder. They never had seen such thing in Subangdaku. Lightnings alternately flared in random patterns, and the once dark firmanent glowed in marvelous lights.


    "It''s beautiful!" Bogart bellowed.


    "And scary at the same time," Kiko objected. "This has never happened before."


    The boys continued watching and after a another loud thunder, the lightnings exploded into one final burst of radiance. The sky once again turned pitch black, covering Subangdaku with darkness again.


    "Wow, that one is the loudest ever!" Bogart exclaimed again.


    "How did that happen?" Tonton asked.


    "Is there a storm coming?" Kiko uttered. "It''s not in the news."


    "It''s actually weird," Jamie said. "Those thunders and lightnings are too close. They were like fireworks but grander and brighter."


    "But we can''t deny it, guys," Bogart spoke with smile in his lips. "That was magnificently beautiful!"


    The three looked at one another and the boys instantly laughed.


    "That was a crazy thing," Kiko said. "Hope someone has taken a photo of that"


    "Or photos," Tonton agreed. "Science books will kill to have those images."


    Once more, they all laughed in unison. They began their bicycle ride again and despite the sudden peals of thunder and lightning, the night was not as cold as they expected. Passing by the haunted house and seeing the atmospheric showdown did not bring enough chill; the boys were sweating hard.


    "The sky is clear again," Jamie finally broke the silence. "I thought it would rain after that, or at least some cold breeze."


    "Don''t you think it''s beautiful?" Tonton voiced out. "The stars are incredibly brighter and clearer."


    "Yes," Bogart agreed. "I can see the Big Dipper."


    "We can actually stop for a while and look at the stars," Kiko suggested.


    "It''s late already," Jamie said matter-of-factly. "But I kind of like that."


    Find authorized novels in Webnovel£¬faster updates, better experience£¬Please click www.novelhall.com for visiting.


    Jamie chuckled and stopped his bike. The three boys also did the same. Bogart immediately jumped into the lush grass and the others followed.


    "It''s lovely!" Jamie whispered.


    "It''s magnificent," Kiko agreed.


    "It''s the Little Bear!" Bogart pointed.


    "It''s the Polaris!" Tonton echoed.


    A moment of silence ensued as the boys absorbed the beauty of the sky above.


    "The grass smells fresh that it makes me feel sleepy," Bogart said.


    "Yes," Jamie agreed. "I''m also feeling tired and lazy that we should better get going."


    The two were about to rise when Kiko jolted and pointed at something. "Hey, guys, look! That could not be a star. It''s moving way too fast."


    The other three followed his finger. Indeed, there was something very bright moving in the sky. It was even brighter than Polaris.


    "It''s just a plane," Tonton said uninterestingly.


    "It can''t be," Bogart countered. "It is not blinking."


    "It is!" Tonton insisted.


    "But it does not blink the same way planes do," Jamie finally said. "It''s not red or yellow."


    "It seems very far," Kiko spoke up, "but it moves really fast."


    "It''s a meteor," Bogart voiced out. "Is there a meteor shower tonight? "


    "Nope," Kiko answered. "It''s not in the news and it''s not in the books."


    "It''s just a random meteor," Jamie said. "Come on, guys, let''s go home."


    The other boys rose up but Kiko remained seated on the grass, fixated on the sky.


    "C''mon, Kiko, let''s go. " Bogart said. "Why are you still staring at the sky?"


    "I think it''s getting bigger, guys," Kiko answered. "It seems like it''s moving toward us."


    The three looked up again and stared in silence. Indeed, the "shooting star" seemed to grow larger, from a mere little dot like the tip of a pencil to a bigger round like the tip of a board marker.


    "Whoa!" Bogart gasped. "I think you are not mistaken."


    The "meteor" was now obviously brighter than the surrounding stars; it was five times larger than the Polaris. Seconds passed by and it grew much even bigger.


    "Something''s not right about what we are seeing," Tonton finally shattered their reverie.


    "This is really very wrong," Kiko agreed.


    They continued to gaze in disbelief as the "thing" took on much larger size. It was now like the size of a baseball and it grew bigger at a much faster pace.


    "I''m beginning to get scared," Bogart mattered.


    In just few seconds more, it grew to a basketball with blinding brightness. Neighboring stars were swallowed by its radiance and the once eerily dark sky gradually shone.


    "It''s coming towards us!" Jamie shouted after realizing that the meteor would probably fall into the village.


    As if on cue, the boys quickly rode their bikes and begin pedalling. It was harder this time, sweating more than before even though the night breeze had already become colder. In panic, Kiko turned around and his eyes grew with what he saw.


    "Oh no!" Kiko shouted. "It will hit us."


    The three turned around and were almost thrown on the ground. The bright thing was now almost a meter wide. As it approached the village, loud thunders were heard.


    "Faster!" Jamie ordered.


    The boys moved faster while the light and thunders intensified with each passing moment. Bogart turned around again.


    "This can''t be!" And the boy tripped over.


    "Bogart!" Tonton yelled and immediately stopped and ran toward his friend to assist him. He was crying now. The other two also halted.


    Kiko looked at the sky again and the meteor was covering at least half of the sky. Its white light was glowingly profusely. "It can''t be happening."


    They shielded their eyes, afraid that the extreme brightness would blind them. The thunders grew more deafening as the light engulfed the entire sky. It was a moment of fear and chaos, and in the heart and mind of the four boys, the end had come.


    In the blink of an eye, the thunders blasted one last time as the sky exploded into blazing brightness. The Biker Brothers were all thrown away....

 4 Memories of Piggy

    "Piggy!" the boys shouted at his face.


    Bogart could not do anything but stare at the spilled contents of his lunchbox. They were his favorite - two hotdogs, two fried chicken legs, baked mac, and several slices of apple. Unsatisfied, the biggest kid, probably the leader of the bunch, snatched his tumbler of orange juice and poured them on the ground, as if offering their tributes to some evil god. The five boys altogether laughed.


    "No more foodie for piggy," one teased and the boys once again laughed.


    Hurriedly, Bogart collected his box and tumbler and ran away while the bullies laughed even more. It was 1993 and Bogart Randolph Pescador was in second grade. Since kindergarten, Bogart had been bullied because of his incredible size. He was twice as large as any boys of his age. His belly was was too big that his shirts seemed to protest from his weight. Despite the countless mockery from the other kids, boys and girls alike, he could not restrain himsef from eating a lot. His lunchbox contained twice as much food as that from other kids. Amazingly, he would still buy slices of pie after devouring his lunch, just to satisfy his cravings for something really sweet.


    Bogart cried, feeling sad about the amount of food that had been wasted. He was on the way to the school canteen when he was ambushed by the bullies. Having no friends, he was alone when it happened and no one seemed to care eventhough they had seen him being harrassed.


    "But there is still more food in the canteen," Bogart said to himself and instantly made a cheerful smile. He straightened his back and walked with pride despite his aching heart.


    It was uneventful that afternoon and Bogart got through his boring classes. He was leaving the school when the same boys crossed his path again. They were wearing the same evil grin earlier that day.


    "What''s the hurry, Piggy?" the leader asked.


    "My name is not Piggy. I am Bogart!" he answered back.


    "Wrong, you are Piggy!"


    And the boys laughed together while making a pig''s sound.


    "Hey," the leader again spoke. "Do you have some coins there? We just need a few to buy some stuffs."


    "No more, I used all my money to buy lunch."


    "Don''t be greedy, Piggy!"


    He immediately jumped to Bogart and they were both thrown on the grass. They rolled and tussled as the gang leader tried to reach Bogart''s pockets. The bully managed to pin the latter on the ground and with a swift fist, he planted a strong punch on Bogart. He groaned in pain and tasted blood in pain.


    "I''ll give you more if you continue to refuse me."


    Bogart began to whimper and the intimidation he experienced at noon welled up in his spirit. Fueled by rage, he stood up and grabbing his opponent''s right arm, he threw him away strongly. Caught off-balance, the latter lost his footing and was easily propelled into a nearby thorny bush. He screamed hard.


    Realizing what he had done, fear took over Bogart and he quickly stood up and ran. The boys chased him and one of them sooner caught him. Bogart was undeniably much larger than them but he was slower. He was thrown again on the ground and the bullies encircled him. It was at that moment when Jamie and Tonton heard his cry and they saved him. It marked the start of their friendship.


    It was a triumphant experience for Bogart, one that he would cherish for life. The two friends were famous in school - both were good-looking and smart. Their popularity protected them from the harmful kids and being friends with them worked to Bogart''s advantage.


    Years rolled by and they continued to be friends despite belonging to different sections. Jamie and Tonton were always classmates in Section One while Bogart was either in Section Two or Three. Subangdaku was not a big community so the public primary school had at most three sections per grade level.


    Yet, being friends with popular kids had a bit of disadvantages, too. Being the odd man, he had always been compared to them. He could hear other children talking behind their backs, saying he did not belong to their circle or that it was only pity that urged them to take him in. Later, Jamie confronted them and they slowly stopped their murmurs.


    Several times, Bogart also felt the need to look pleasing as well. The girls adored both Jamie and Tonton and sometimes, he wished he could also be like them - someone the girls had crush on or that the other boys looked up to. Plus, they were tall and lean. They know plenty of sports and oftentimes, they taught Bogart how to play them. Eventually, Bogart learned how to shoot baskets and bat a ball. He might not be good at it but he also played soccer. Yet, Bogart was still larger (or fatter) than most boys his age. Thanks to burgers, noodles and all the food in Subangdaku.


    Bogarts smiled to these memories. Three years had already passed since the duo saved him but they remained friends. The smile on his face widened. Gently, Bogart opened his eyes. He saw nothing but the pitch dark sky with twinkling dots. His mind was in haze.


    Find authorized novels in Webnovel£¬faster updates, better experience£¬Please click www.novelhall.com for visiting.


    "Where am I?"


    Realization kicked in and he immediately jumped to his feet. He lost his balance and he fell kneeling on the grass. It was moist, he felt dampness on his knees.


    "What did just happen?"


    He squinted his eyes until they adjusted to the darkness. He saw no movements but there were silhouttes of people. Their bikes were also thrown nearby. A chilly breeze blew and he shuddered to the coldness.


    "Am I thinking right?" he asked himself again. "It could not be a dream. Everything we saw was all clear. I thought we will all die. Or am I the only one who survived? "


    Unsure of what to do, he continued staring at his friends'' silhouettes. He was on the verge of crying when one of them finally moved. His heart leaped high. Instinctively, Bogart approached his friend.

 6 Memories of the Best Friends

    They were neighbors and as far as Jamie could remember, he and Tonton were friends ever since they started walking. His house was just next to Tonton''s and both their mothers were also friends way back high school. They were not really the best of friends but they belonged to the same squad. When they got married, they coincidentally became neighbors. Jamie''s family moved in first. When their daughter turned four, the new neighbor came in. They had no children as they were starting yet. A year later, both mothers gave birth to baby boys.


    James Michael de Jesus, or Jamie as fondly called by everyone, may be considered lucky as he was greatly provided and spoiled by his parents. Growing up was fun and easy for Jamie. All that he needed were easily within reach - food, clothes, toys, health cares, and all that a child needs and asks for. No wonder, he grew up to be a handsome boy. He was tall for most boys of his age. He had fair yet smooth skin. His eyes always widened in excitement. These were mostly genetics but his lifestyle was a big influence in his proper grooming. In school, he also performed well.


    Despite everything, Jamie was a humble and kind child. In fact, he was soft-hearted and caring. He could not bear when some other kids were being bullied or hurt. His best friend Tonton, or Mark Anthony Tagalogon, was not so much different. Maybe because they had been playmates since toddlers that they had also developed the same attitudes and interests. Like Jamie, Tonton was also a good-looking boy, though his glasses made him look more serious and brainy than his friend.


    Their mothers were pleased that their boys struck a strong friendship, more so that they had been good influences to each other. So when one boy asked for a sleepover from the other, the mothers did not make a fuss about it. They simply felt secure with their kids.


    Still, the boys can be naughty sometimes and they were just forgiving about it. They knew that they were the ones who wrecked the rose garden and not the dogs. They knew that sometimes, when they were too eager to ran out and play, they carelessly rocked the clothesline and dropped the newly-washed clothes. They knew that they had been into fights with other boys. They believed that these things were typical to children of their age. For as long as they were responsible for their actions, the two mothers would always trust them.


    Jamie was reliving several memories when he suddenly heard movements and muffled voices. Slowly, he rose and examined his surroundings. He forced himself to recollect the moment and soon realized that a powerful light impacted Subangdaku.


    He squinted his eyes and saw two shadows closing in on him. They were Bogart''s and Kiko''s. They were also moving slowly, as if feeling unsteady from what had happened.


    "Where''s Tonton?" he asked himself. "Why don''t I see him?"


    "Jamie!" Bogart shouted his name while waving his chubby arms.


    "Hey, guys!" Jamie called back. Gently, he propped his hands on his knees and stood up. He was shaking.


    "Can you believe what just happened?" Bogart was all energy again. "It is nothing I have read in the books."


    "We must be dead if it had been a meteor," Kiko finally spoke up.


    "Did you guys see Tonton?" Jamie asked.


    The two shook their heads. There were only three bicycles nearby and so Tonton must have been thrown far.


    "We must find him," Jamie said calmly.


    The stars seemed less brighter than before and so the surrounding seemed less illuminated. Jamie felt uneasy but he did not let it show. He could not let his friends see him tense or worried, but in his heart, he was terribly anxious.


    They were six years old when Jamie and Tonton experienced something unforgettable in the old haunted house. It was twilight and along with other boys, they played in the grasses near the feared structure. They were in the middle of their hide-and-seek game when the pair ventured into the old house. They had been warned never to get inside it as its rickety floor and post might easily give in.


    Once inside, the boys instantly got crept out by the shadows casted by the setting sun on the gaps of the walls. They tiptoed their way into the middle of the house when a black object suddenly jumped from out of nowhere. They screamed, and panicky, they ran their separate paths. Tonton ran upstairs while Jamie found the door out of the house. He was about to go outside when a loud cry reverberated from the upper floor. It was so loud that the other boys in the grasses heard the scream. They all rushed inside and tagged along Jamie when they ran upstairs. Tonton was screaming like he was in so much terror.


    When Jamie opened the room at one end of the second storey, they saw Tonton hanging on the floorboard. The floor had collapsed and several planks had gone down. Tonton''s right hand was tightly clutching a board while the other was reaching out to them. Immediately, they dashed towards him and successfully pulled him up.


    Tonton continued crying while his whole body quivered. He claimed that an unknown force dragged him into the room and into the floor. It was only after a while that Tonton stopped his whimpering and relaxed. Since that day, Jamie vowed never to return into the house. He felt that if something worse had happened to his best friend, he could never forgive himself.


    Find authorized novels in Webnovel£¬faster updates, better experience£¬Please click www.novelhall.com for visiting.


    The fear that Jamie felt that day was the same way he was feeling now. He could not let his friend get into an accident again. The mere thought terrified him. They called out his name but no answer came.


    They walked and from a distance, they saw a bicycle resting atop a large bush. It was upside down, one of its wheel was spinning. Just a feet or two from the bike was an arm sticking out from the bushes. It was not moving.

 7 Memories of Love

    For Tonton, his dreams were quite different for he was an observer. It was as if he was a ghost or an angel lingering by and seeing things but not being seen. His visions were also very random - back when he was a baby up to the moments minutes ago.


    "So I was really cute back then."


    Tonton, or Mark Anthony Tagalogon, chuckled. He had seen his baby pictures but it was different when it was live. At first, he doubted that the baby was him. He thought that it was a vision of a future event - that his mother would give birth to another son.


    "Don''t be greedy with your milk, Tonton."


    When the young mother said those words, Tonton leapt in joy. Finally, he was sure that the handsome baby was him. He constantly came up to the baby and tickled him but there was no response. Indeed, he was invisible.


    Flashbacks came and went. After the baby moments, he was taken to another event, back when he celebrated his fifth birthday. It was in a resort in the nearby town and present were his family and friends. Everyone was happily eating and drinking, while the kids and their mothers were swimming in the pool near a high falls. Of course, his best friend Jamie was with him, immersed in the cold water along with the other boys. Tonton was trying to come out of the pool when he suddenly slipped on a boulder and fell on the stones. His face lightly bumped onto a rock and his hands were grazed. Blood oozed from his nose. Jamie and the boys started screaming and immediately, the adults rushed in.


    Tonton had no recollection of the event. Not a hint of that day was familiar to him. He wondered why he was having such memories when he could not remember them. He was sure he was only dreaming, but he also knew that these things were influenced by his memories.


    More memories came and Tonton was randomly transported to them. Each event flashed for few seconds before going to the next. In all of them, Tonton was just a spirit observing everything.


    Finally, he was brought to the latest events. The four of them were once again standing on the grasses, watching the bright light going towards them. In the blink of an eye, the light exploded and Tonton was thrown away.


    Quickly, Tonton got up and found himself standing in what looked like a girl''s, or lady''s room. It was a modern and techy room but it was not familiar to him. He was standing on a corner and on the bed was indeed a woman, possibly in her early twenties, lying on her side. She was whimpering and her shoulder quivered everytime she let out a louder cry.


    "Why did you do this to me? How could you lie?" she was talking to herself.


    She screamed hard. Suddenly, she stood up and swept all the contents on her bedside table. She seemed in pain as she was crying while throwing things in sight. She turned around and Tonton felt she was staring at him.


    Tonton squinted his eyes, trying to make out how the woman looked. Unlike everything around her, her face was a blur. Her neck-high blonde hair was sitting on a featureless face, much like that of a manequin.


    Slowly, she walked towards him. Tonton felt a little panic. She was steadily approaching him, and from the way she moved her head from side to side out of curiosity, she seemed to have seen him.


    "Help me," she whispered.


    Tonton leapt, both suprised and frightened. Reflexively, he fled from the room. He lost sense of the place, he just kept running away until he came to a market-like place. People aroud him were busy, as if on errands of buying various stuffs. Like the woman before, their faces were empty. Tall buildings were around the marketplace. Above them, winged vehicles, much like spaceships, were hovering.


    "Where am I?" he asked himself. "This could not be part of my memories."


    Tonton chuckled. Surely, all the things he had seen so far were not memories. They could be visions of some distant future. Tonton marvelled at eveything in sight.


    "Catch him!" roared a voice from behind him.


    Tonton turned around. To his terror, a group of nine or ten faceless men were staring at him. They advanced towards him and in fear, Tonton fled again.


    He kept running and running until he came to a dark place. He looked around. It was not simply dark; it was night. There were two moons gleaming up in the blue-black skies.


    "I know this is wrong."


    Find authorized novels in Webnovel£¬faster updates, better experience£¬Please click www.novelhall.com for visiting.


    He heard a man''s voice saying. Immediately, Tonton hid behind a large bush.


    "So we stop now?" a woman asked.


    "No, we can''t," the man replied. "I love you enough to leave everything behind. I will fight for you."


    Tonton was now totally bewildered. Why was he seeing, or hearing, these things? He felt like an invader or voyeur of some people''s lives.


    Slowly, the man advanced to the woman. Their faces moved closer and in an instant, under the light of two bright moons, he kissed her hard. While their lips intertwined, their hands were groping the other''s body.


    "Gross," Tonton uttered and beckoned to turn away. He accidentally stepped on a twig and the sound reverberated throught the night.


    "Who is there?" the man hollered.


    Tonton turned around and the lovers seemed to be staring at him. Reflexively, Tonton ran. He ran and ran until he came to a forest.


    It was chaotic. Gunfires were everywhere. But they were not actually gunfires but light or laser blasts. Each blast was strong enough to brighten the entire forest. And whatever the blast hit, it smoldered and melted.


    Tonton ran again until some large roots caught his left leg. He tripped and fell on a woody ground. He struggled hard, and with each kick he did, the roots seemed to entangle him even more. The blasts continued around him while trees were burned or melted. To his horror, the tree behind him got hit. In a second, its trunk was cut in half while its foliage ablazed. Slowly, the upper half of the tree fell. He must be a minute late; Tonton screamed as the large timber fell on him.

 8 Overwhelming Fears

    The boys were terrified upon seeing their friend''s foot jutting from the large bush. Instinctively, they rushed and pulled him out of the thicket. Tonton remained unconscious, making them even more worried.


    "Tonton, wake up!" Jamie kept shaking him but to no avail.


    Suddenly, Tonton shuddered and vehemently kicked his legs and threw his arms. He was yelling incomprehensible words. They tried to restrain him but he overpowered them. After swinging an arm, Bogart gave him a powerful slap.


    Jamie and Kiko froze upon seeing Bogart''s reckless action. Immediately, Tonton woke up from his dreams. He was panting and choking with his saliva.


    "Holy cow, why did you do that?" Jamie asked, furious at what had been done to his bestfriend.


    "He just needs a strong force to wake him up," Bogart reasoned out. "See? It worked."


    Kiko laughed out loud. The two boys joined while Tonton was still catching his breath, shocked and scared.


    "What happened to you?"


    "I don''t know," Tonton replied. "I can''t explain either. It''s just that after the mysterious light exploded and we got thrown away, I dreamed of random scary things."


    "Me, as well," Bogart interrupted. "My dream was really weird. It is more like memories."


    "It''s as if all our lives were flashed in a short film." Kiko said excitedly.


    "Back when we were babies up to the explosion." Jamie was all smiles after saying those words.


    "And possibly including the future," Tonton finally said after a moment of silence passed.


    The three looked at him with puzzlement. They tried remembering their dreams but they were just histories, nothing futuristic. They kept their silence.


    "Come on," Jamie broke the silence. "We should get going. No one is hurt, right?"


    The other boys shook their heads. Slowly, they took their own bikes and began riding home. They were still a long distance from the residential area and all the way, they remained quiet as they were individually absorbed in their own thoughts. While the explosion was unbelievable, their dreams were partly scary and partly nostalgic.


    By and by, the lighs from the houses glowed from a distance. The boys pedalled harder, the urgency to return home got stronger as the lights became brighter. It was nearly half an hour since the spectacle happened but people were still out of their houses, their shadows hopping from one house to another as they chatted for updates.


    Bogart was the first to arrive home. He was still a long distance when both his parents saw him. Like him, they were also round and chunky. Immediately, they ran up to them, their bodies bouncing with each step. Bogart jumped out of his bike and ran towards them. When they met, they gave each other hugs and kisses.


    "I thought I was gonna die worrying about you," his mother commented.


    "I thought it was the end for all of us," Bogart answered, and without intending to, he wept, his parents chorusing with him.


    The sight saddened the other boys that tears began to well at the corners of their eyes. Indeed, they should be thankful that no greater harm had ever happened to them.


    "Bye Mr. and Mrs. Pescador," Jamie finally declared while suppressing the tremors in his voice. The three boys waved goodbye to their friend. Silently, they continued their ride home.


    "The end of the world is finally here," a plump woman was announcing to her circle of neighbors. "This is just the beginning."


    "Heavens forbid that!" another exclaimed.


    "Our place is cursed!" an old man spoke with authority. "We should change our hearts and lives."


    "It''s a shooting star but it''s not."


    "We should say our prayers tonight."


    The people in the streets were saying different things. But no matter what they believed in, the boys could hear a crack of fear in their voices.


    Soon, they reached Kiko''s house. His mother ran towards him and hugged him tight. Without saying anything, Kiko burst into tears.


    "Don''t worry," his mother comforted him. "We are all safe here."


    Jamie and Tonton also cried. No matter how strong they acted, fear and uneasiness got the better of them. Kiko waved them off and the duo departed.


    "I''m sorry," Jamie finally said. "I could not protect you from the explosion."


    "It''s fine," Tonton answered. "You are not responsible for anything."


    "I vowed to protect you. I should not let you get in harm''s way again."


    "But I''m perfectly okay. Don''t be upset."


    Jamie looked at his friend who he saw as a brother. He said he was fine but he looked troubled. He smiled, trying to reassure himself that Tonton was indeed fine.


    They finally entered their street. They saw their mothers waiting for them at the gate. Like their friends, their hearts weakened as they quickened maneuvering their bikes. It was a night of whats and what ifs, and dread hang in the air.


    Their mothers instantly grabbed them the moment they were within reach. Tears rolled as embraces tightened. They stayed that way for a long time.


    Later, they went inside their houses and ate dinner. Like Bogart''s and Kiko''s families, they shared stories and speculations about what happened that night. The boys told them about how they were thrown away and momentarily lost consciousness. Except for Tonton, they shared details about their dreams. Tonton only talked about the memories in his dream. He intentionally kept the parts about the woman and the futuristic place. Just the thought of a large tree falling upon him gave him chills.


    Much later that night, everyone retired to their beds and slept restlessly. Other people in Subangdaku chose to stay awake and guard their homes. It was an unusual night and something not ordinary might just come up again.


    Find authorized novels in Webnovel£¬faster updates, better experience£¬Please click www.novelhall.com for visiting.


    Truly, something peculiar and transformative would happen to the sleepy district soon. As the night opened its gate to the morning, the loud roar of screeching wheels were heard from a distance. Headlights were blinking as different scientists discussed the abnormal event. A tougher time was awaiting Subangdaku.

 9 Chaos in School

    The local people woke up to a new Subangdaku. The district, once peaceful and lonely, was now chaotic and busy. Media people were flocking on the streets, randomly interviewing anyone they caught on sight. Mostly were from the national and local outlets. Foreign media was expected to come soon.


    What happened the night before was a mystery for everyone. It looked light a huge meteor because of its blinding glow and a strong impact should have happened but there was none. The districts around Subangdaku had also witnessed the spectacle and so media men also arrived in there. But based on projections, the falling star should most likely hit Subangdaku.


    Local scientists had also arrived. They came from various fields, but mostly were astronomers and astrophysicists. With the magnitude of the supposed collision, fragments of the meteor should be found all over Subangdaku. They brought different probing equipment, sweeping private lots and the grasslands. So far, no mysterious stones of unfamiliar contents or origin had been found yet.


    All that was happening were reported in TV and radios. There were various exclusive news and updates. Jamie finally got sick of these news. Hurriedly, he finished his breakfast and prepared for school.


    "Are you sure you''re going to school?" his mother asked. "I mean, the streets may not that be safe."


    "It''s alright, Honey" his father answered for him. "The Mayor said we are safe so he did not declare today as a local holiday."


    Jamie flashed a large smile. "Don''t worry about me, Mom. I''ll go home right away if the principal tells us so."


    His mother answered with a sad and worried smile. "Ok, just be careful. Stay with Tonton always."


    Jamie left and called Tonton next door. They boarded their bikes and fetched Kiko and Bogart along the way. As portrayed in the news, the streets were really teeming with people. Media trucks were found everywhere and camping tents were put up on empty lots.


    It was already late so the boys hurriedly pedalled their bikes. The school was not any different from their village. Parents, mostly mothers, delivered their kids in lower grade levels. Teachers were also out in the hallways, discussing the event with their co-teachers and parents. Speculations were overflowing and so the talks were endless.


    Find authorized novels in Webnovel£¬faster updates, better experience£¬Please click www.novelhall.com for visiting.


    The boys stayed outside in their building lobby as their teachers were not yet ready to go inside their classrooms. They were sorting information they heard when the school gate was opened wide. In regular days, the school guard does permit vehicles, except for bicycles and motorcycles, to go inside the school premises since parking space was only limited to officials and special visitors. Children were only dropped at the gate while the teachers would have to park their cars outside the school''s fence.


    One huge white van entered through the gate and parked in front of the school principal''s office. Three people, a woman and two men, stepped out and went to the office. Minutes past and all the teachers were called to the office. Everyone started to fell panic, especially the parents who remained in the school.


    "Who are those people?" Bogart finally asked.


    "They could be from the government," Kiko replied.


    "They must be government scientists in particular," Tonton said. "They don''t look like regular politicians, more like geniuses."


    "Yeah, last night''s event was really a big news." Jamie seconded. "And what''s with the sudden meeting?"


    Nobody answered. By and by, all the teachers went out of the principal''s office and called all their students to come inside their classroom, including their parents. The boys parted, and Jamie and Tonton occupied their assigned seats near the back of the classroom.


    "Good morning, everyone," Ms. Sanchez said after releasing a short cough. "The principal had declared suspension of classes today. Just for today only. Some officials will be conducting a thorough search in the school ground."


    "Why, Ms. Sanchez? " a mother asked worriedly. "Is the school not safe?"


    "Oh no, it''s not that it is not safe. The government just want to be sure."


    "Sure of what? Ms. Sanchez, please tell us what is happening?"


    "Alright, the government so far has no clear explanation of what happened last night. Scientists believe that it is a meteor that had entered the Earth''s atmosphere. Based on observations, it was a large meteor. Supposedly, that meteor would struck Subangdaku. From the estimates of the scientists, it should specifically hit our school."


    A woman gasped upon hearing the information. Another one wailed when it finally sank in. Some of the kids also began crying.


    "Do not panic. Obviously, the meteor did not strike us because we are all still alive, and we should be thankful for that." The class began to relax.


    "However," Ms. Sanchez was not done yet, "that mysterious thing may be here in the school. It may have not exploded but it could be here. So the government requested to have a close check around the campus. The gate will be closed soon and the entire school will be quarantined as the officials will investigate. If the school is clear, classes will resume by tomorrow. "


    "Why does it have to be quarantined, Ms. Sanchez? " Tonton asked." Can''t they just look around while we are here. "


    " I''m afraid not, "Ms. Sanchez answered with slight tremor in her voice."You see, the meteor might be containing compounds, like gases, substances, or even life forms, that may not be good for Earth."


    "Or may endanger us," a father said threateningly.


    "That, I cannnot answer."


    The woman who first cried again wailed, this time louder and more fearfully. Instantly, she stood up and embraced her child. The others followed and cried in panic. In a minute, the classroom was sent into a chaos.


    "Calm down, everyone," Ms. Sanchez yelled, buy nobody was listening. "We need to go home right now....."


    Her voice disappeared in the chaos. Jamie and Tonton immediately left their seats as everyone rushed to get out of the classroom. Once outside, they looked for their friends. Like them, worry was also written all over their faces. Hurriedly, they got their bikes and left.


    "Wait," Kiko said. They were already outside, just few meters away from the school. Everyone had already vacated and only few people were left in sight.


    "What?" Bogart asked.


    "Just wait."


    Minutes rolled by and the school''s surrounding was enveloped in silence. From the corner of the school, gravel were heard crumbling as wheels whirred. Another three white vans appeared and entered the school. With a loud bang, the gate closed.

 11 Tonton Dreams Again

    Mang Tomas'' words sent shockwaves through the crowd''s ears.


    "Oh no!" a woman screamed.


    Immediately, the crowd scampered. While the women panicked about what to prepare if there would be another meteor collision, the men considered leaving Subangdaku for a while. The media men took interest with Mang Tomas and they turned their attention to him. The boys took this opportunity to leave and hurriedly, they got their bikes and proceeded to get home.


    "What happened to Mang Thomas?" Bogart asked his friends. "He is so much different now."


    "Like how much different is he now from before?" Kiko asked matter-of-factly.


    "He used to be shy; in fact, he is aloof. He seldom goes out of his house and talks with his neighbors. But why has he suddenly become a public speaker?"


    "He is more like a prophet," Jamie corrected him. "Where did he get all the things he had just said?"


    "And why does he take interest with Tonton?" Kiko said, frowning. He turned to Tonton and inquired, "Do you know him? Are you two friends?"


    Tonton immediately shook his head. "I don''t know him. I just met him today."


    "He is really a weirdo," Kiko concluded. "He could have just made up all those things."


    "I''m not sure," Bogart said. "He had changed overnight."


    The boys fell into silence as they continued biking.


    "Are you alright?" Jamie asked Tonton.


    Bogart and Kiko has already arrived at their respective houses earlier, leaving the two boys to continue their ride home. It was a bright day, and since it was noon, the sun was beginning to take his spot above everyone''s head. The sky was clear, save for sparrows which occasionally tainted its pale blueness. Through the brightness of the day, Jamie could see clearly that Tonton was pale.


    "I''m just fine. "


    "Are you sure?" Jamie persisted, sensing that that his friend was really tense and uncomfortable. Since that incident with Mang Tomas, Tonton was absorbed in total awkward silence.


    "Not really. It''s just that I got frightened with what Mang Tomas had spoken. Aren''t you?"


    "Yes, I am."


    ''But not as frightened as you,'' Jamie would have wanted to add but he restrained himself from saying it. He sensed that Tonton must be keeping something from them.


    By and by, they arrived at their houses. Tonton continued to be uneasy the rest of the day. That night, he prayed hard before sleeping. Unfortunately, the inexplicably dreadful dreams taunted him again.


    It was late at night inside his dream and the two moons were beautifully glowing in the sky. Tonton found himself in the middle of a crowd somewhere which looked like a park. People were faceless, from the young to the old ones. They were endlessly taking, and this made Tonton dizzy. He looked around for a seat and found a bench. He sat in the only space available, beside a man and a woman.


    "They know already," he heard the man said.


    "What happens now?" the woman replied.


    Tonton''s left ear widened, as if some magical force wanted him to hear everything the couple said.


    "I''m scared," the woman said. "Scared that they will part us."


    "That is exactly they will do," the man answered. "Our laws do not allow this kind of relationship."


    "What do we do now?"


    "Nothing. I don''t want anyone of us to go away."


    "Neither do I. But will not the authorities do something?"


    "Yes, they surely will. I will talk to my father about this."


    "Arthur, I''m really scared."


    Find authorized novels in Webnovel£¬faster updates, better experience£¬Please click www.novelhall.com for visiting.


    "Don''t worry. I won''t let anything bad happen to you. And I can''t let anyone take you away from me."


    Gently, the woman sobbed while the man comforted her silently. Tonton was also saddened with what he heard. He did not really understand their story but he felt the sadness and fear in them.


    "Help us," he heard a voice whispered.


    Tonton sat up, feeling a little panicky.


    "Please, help us."


    His heart beat faster. Suddenly, a cold hand touched his arm and gently gripped his wrist.


    "You need to help us."


    Confused and alarmed, Tonton quickly stood up and ran. He ran and ran while trying to shake away the voices in his head. He stopped after reaching a good distance from the previous crowd. He hyperventilated, letting more oxygen into the system, though the air seemed to be deficient with it.


    When he recovered his breath, he looked around and found himself in a garden. Lush bushes were everywhere, thronged with bright yellow and red flowers.


    "Search everywhere!" a man with loud low voice barked an order.


    "Yes, Sir!" a large group of men roared in response.


    Tonton hid among the bushes. He could not let himself get caught for a reason he did not understand. He did nothing wrong, so why hide?


    When the voices and steps seemed to fade away, he crawled out of his hiding place. He tiptoed around the garden, careful not to step on anything that might create sound. From the corner of his eyes, he saw some silhouettes moving. He froze in oder to suppress the panic building in his heart again. His sweat began pouring.


    "Hold there!" a voice shouted.


    Slowly, Tonton turned his head to his right and a group of burly faceless men were apparently looking at him. He could not see their features but he sensed they were fiercely looking at him, making his entire body tremble. He could not take their gazes, and mustering all his guts, he sprinted to his left. Only then he noticed the pair of shadows in that direction who also ran along ahead of him.


    "Take them!" the voice ordered which the men instantly obeyed.


    Tonton ran with all his might but the two figures in front of him ran faster, the taller one seemed to be dragging the other. Tonton changed direction and led himself away from the commotion. He kept running until he came to a familiar place.


    Roses were everywhere. There was a flood of red in a sea of green. It was beatiful. There was also one stray dog who kept digging a hole in the ground. It was excited.


    Tonton turned around and there was the back part of a house. He gaped in disbelief. Finally, it dawned on him.


    "Home."

 12 A Separation

    Tonton felt sad. He did not know why but he was certainly sad, almost in the brink of crying.


    "There you are!" Jamie boomed from his side.


    Tonton looked at his friend. He looked young, like four or five years old.


    "Why don''t you want to see?" Jamie asked.


    "I don''t understand," he replied.


    "Please, try to. I will only be gone for a short time. It''s just two months. After that, I will be back here."


    He kept staring at Jamie. He thought, ''What is happening here?''


    Find authorized novels in Webnovel£¬faster updates, better experience£¬Please click www.novelhall.com for visiting.


    Slowly, Jamie walked towards him. He spread his arms and hugged his friend tightly.


    "Don''t worry," he whispered. "I will be back very soon."


    To his wonder, Tonton started crying. He could not help it.


    "Don''t forget me," he implored. He did not expect those words to come out of his month.


    "Silly, but I won''t."


    With a wave of his arms, Jamie said goodbye and left Tonton alone. Gradually, Tonton seemed to remember the event. They were young then and Jamie left for two months to spend his summer with some cousins.


    Tonton went back inside his house. He was very lonely, enough that he opted to sleep off his sadness. He laid on his bed and covered himself with blanket.


    "This is all just a dream," he reminded himself. "I will just sleep, and once I wake up, I''ll be back to reality."


    Succesfully, Tonton slept. No sooner, he rouse. Again, he was transported to a new place so it was not reality yet. It was his school and it was night time.


    From the corner of the sky, a blazing light appeared. It moved fast and seemed to strike the school.


    "It''s the falling star!" he exclaimed.


    Reflexively, Tonton ran, trying to get himself away from the scene. He opened the school''s gate wide and ran again. He did not look back, fearing the things he might see. However, he was certain that the falling star was near as the light behind him grew stronger, trying to engulf his shadow and all of himself. In a split second, the bright radiance overtook the school. Tonton screamed hard.


    He curled on the ground and covered his ears. He screamed again but the light explosion had already ended. Instead, there were gunfires around him. Laser blasts splashed everywhere and the supposedly dark night glowed with blasts and madness.


    "Where am I?" Tonton asked himself. "Am I back in the war?"


    Tonton crawled on the ground. Indeed, he was back in the war he had been into during his previous dream. He was also in the forest, tree stumps and sticking roots made his struggle even more difficult. He was wiser now and he kept his composure as he looked for a safe haven.


    Finally, he found a large tree away from the war zone. He hid behind it and rested himself. This dream was more exhausting than the last. He was too tired that he slept fast behind the tree.


    Somebody shook him and Tonton jumped out of his seat.


    "Hey, Tonton," Bogart said, "you have been sleeping soundly for one hour already."


    ''I am still in the dream?'' Tonton asked himself. He looked around and they were in the school canteen. It must have been afternoon because their table was empty, except for wrappers of Bogart''s sandwich and a bottle of orange juice.


    "You look really tired," Kiko said.


    Tonton was about to say something when a loud explosion happened outside, followed by loud screaming from the students. Immediately, they ran outside and struggled along the way because the ground shook, as if some big feet were stomping the school.


    They gasped at what they saw. A gigantic jellyfish-like creature was hovering over the school. The monster was red-black in color and its creepy tentacles were randomly picking up the children which it ultimately fed into its heavily-teethed mouth.


    "Let''s get away from here!" Jamie shouted.


    Quickly, the boys dashed, trying to get away from the school. However, a tentacle reached them and picked Bogart by the foot. Kiko and Jamie grabbed him, attempting to release him but the monster was too strong. With one sweep, its tentacles lifted the boys in the air and instantly gobbled the boys.


    Tonton cried in shock. He knew it was only a dream but it felt too real. He crouched on the pavement and cried louder while the screaming around him continued.


    Gradually, the noise subsided and an eerie silence enveloped Tonton. He sat up straight and found himself at the back of a stone building. It was like the marketplace from his previous dream. Faceless people were busy around him.


    He strolled and after a while, he encountered the familiar couple. They entered what seemed to be a tent. Curiously, Tonton walked and hid behind the tent cover but he could clearly hear their conversation.


    "We need to do this," the man begged. "This is the only way."


    "I''m afraid," she said. "Let''s leave together."


    "You know I can''t. I must hold off the guards first."


    "We can''t get separated."


    "This is only temporary. I will follow you and be with you as soon as possible."


    "I''m not sure I can do this."


    "You can, Elena. You are the bravest woman I know."


    The woman collapsed into his arms and sobbed. Tonton closed his eyes and analyzed the meaning of his dreams. Things seemed to be random but somehow connected. As to how, he did not know. It was like a big jigsaw puzzle; all the pieces were there but he could not simply put them together.


    When he opened his eyes, Tonton was back in Subangdaku. He was standing in front of the old haunted house. He dreaded the house since the accident few years back.


    It was night and it was silent, save for the crickets and the crawlies. The sky was dark except for a few stars. It was new moon and the skies must have blocked most of the stars.


    Fear crept into Tonton. The haunted house was ghostly but something else made his hairs stood. A big star suddenly appeared from the sky. It grew bigger with each second. Tonto''s heart leapt for it was not just a star. It was a falling star.


    "Coming," a voice whispered into Tonton''s ears.

 13 Mr. Luceros Class

    Before the meteor could hit, Tonton woke up from his sleep. His alarm clock was whining loudly. He was panting and sweating. He could not even control his trembling hands. He stayed on his bed until he recovered his nerves. Once he had relaxed, Tonton immediately prepared for school.


    School was not suspended for the day. It was reported the day before that the team of scientists were almost done investigating the school and that nothing peculiar had been observed or found yet. Only few classrooms had to be checked yet and so classes could resume with some sections to be combined into one.


    The school was noisy when the four friends arrived. Almost every student was present, and only a few parents continued to accompany their children. The school seemed to be back to its usual atmosphere - alive, kicking with excitement, and busy like during the first hour in the morning and the final hour at night.


    In fact, Subangdaku was back to its usual self. Businesses which had closed the previous day were now open. People had gone back to their day jobs. Some media men had left, leaving the streets and vacant lots empty of tents. It was sunshiny in the district, as if the villagers had not been terrorized by the mysterious falling star.


    In the school, the three sections of the fifth grade level were combined into a single class. They occupied the larger function hall in the campus. Theirs and the six graders'' classrooms were still under inspection by the team of scientists. The boys were excited about it and they sat together in the first row of the class.


    "We are finally classmates!" Bogart beamed with happiness as they waited for their first class.


    "It sure looks unreal to be with you guys in the same classroom," Kiko said.


    "We should be classmates next year," Jamie concluded. "It is more fun this way. Besides, we will not be anymore waiting for each other after class."


    While the three boys chuckled, Tonton remained quiet.


    "Tonton," Jamie finally confronted him, "you have been unusually silent since this morning. Is there any problem?"


    The other two boys looked at Tonton. They had also observed his strange behavior but were hesitant to ask him about it.


    "Yes," Kiko seconded, "you can tell us about what is bothering you."


    Tonton stared at his friends'' faces and he knew they were sincerely worried about him. He had been meaning to tell them about his dreams but he was afraid that they might not believe him, or worse, laugh at him. Yet, he also believed that they were real friends and they would not take his dreams lightly.


    "I think I must be totally honest with you," he began. "I have not been feeling right since the explosion two nights ago -"


    "Are you sick?" Bogart interrupted.


    "No, it is not that," Tonton clarified. "It is more like -"


    Tonton was not able to finish his sentence again as their classmates began racing to take their seats. Since the class had not yet started, the students were just all over the room. So when the teacher''s footsteps were heard coming, they scampered, took their seats, and acted like behaved children.


    "Good morning, class!" Alexander Lucero greeted his students as soon as he entered the room. "As you all know, all grade five students will be combined in one class today. Just today only so the team can finish their investigations."


    Mr. Lucero, or Sir Alex as fondly called by everyone in the school, was a science teacher for grade four and five students. He was still young, somewhere in his late twenties, a bachelor, and undeniably handsome. Both parents and his co-teachers adored him while some girl students, particularly from grade five and six, had a crush on him.


    "For our class today, we will be talking about astronomy."


    Everyone''s ear picked as they got interested with their lesson. The topic was really relevant to the mysterious explosion in the district. Mr. Lucero began with definitions of some important heavenly bodies. As they progressed, they discussed deeper topics which further held the students'' attention.


    "Sir!" Kiko called his teacher. "Can human live in Mars?"


    They were talking about the planets. When Mr. Lucero discussed the similarities between Earth and Mars, Kiko became intrigued with the possibility of life in the red planet.


    "Presently, it is not," Mr. Lucero began his explanation. "According to textbooks, the surface of the planet contain minerals toxic not only to humans but to all life forms. It has also plenty of ionizing radiation that is harmful and lethal."


    The class was silent as they analyzed his answer. Bogart then also shot his inquiry.


    "Sir, has any kind of life existed in Mars?"


    "There are currently no concrete evidence or proof that life has existed in the planet. Missions sent to Mars had confirmed that there had been ancient water which makes the planet possibly habitable. However, just because its previous condition was habitable, it does not necessarily mean that there had been life in the planet."


    Find authorized novels in Webnovel£¬faster updates, better experience£¬Please click www.novelhall.com for visiting.


    "Can other kind of life live in Mars?" It was Jamie''s turn to ask.


    "Like I said earlier, the current condition in Mars will not likely support life."


    "That is life from Earth. What if there is another life? The kind that can endure such condition, even worse. A life we never encountered and unfamiliar to us."


    Mr. Lucero became muted as his mind raced to search for answers. The class was also quiet as they waited for him.


    "I can''t answer that since the kind of life you are asking is something we know nothing about. However, NASA and other space agencies are still working on it, even on the possibility of an alien life, " The class gasped upon hearing the word ''alien''.


    "Teacher," a girl called Mr. Lucero''s attention. "Everyone had witnessed that a meteor had fallen to Subangdaku two nights ago. Are meteors dangerous?"


    "It depends on the size of the meteor. It matters how large or small it is."


    "I did not mean the size. I mean a life force. Can meteors carry some kind of life? "


    Mr. Lucero smirked at such witty question.

 14 Tonton Confesses

    "That''s a wild idea," Mr. Lucero said. "Theoretically, it may not be possible since a meteor can be so hot that it burns anything on its path, including its own content."


    Find authorized novels in Webnovel£¬faster updates, better experience£¬Please click www.novelhall.com for visiting.


    "An Earth life will be burned for sure," Jamie offered his opinion. "But we do not know for an alien life. It might survive the heat."


    "Or might not as well," Mr. Lucero objected. "Besides, we do not if there are really aliens or some life outside our world."


    "Some superheroes are not from Earth!" somebody shouted.


    Immediately, the class laughed at the idea. Mr. Lucero was amused that these kids would be so interested with meteors and aliens. At the same time, he could not really fuel their curiosity. He did not want them to be bothered by the recent event in Subangdaku.


    "Are there anymore questions?" he asked.


    Just then, the school bell rang. It was time for the next class. Mr. Lucero packed up his things and the next teacher occupied his seat. The rest of the day was both fun and exciting for the students. Despite being too crowded in the room, they enjoyed being sitted together with new faces or ex-classmates. Almost everyone participated in the class discussions.


    "Today was really cool," Kiko concluded. It was already five in the afternoon and they were about to go home.


    "I could not agree more," Bogart concurred. "Will we still be classmates tomorrow?"


    "I don''t think so," Jamie answered. "All classrooms had been checked already and the scientists had found nothing."


    "So we will be back to our old schedules."


    The boys sighed. Slowly, they boarded their bikes and began their ride home.


    "You are still quiet, Tonton," Kiko observed. "I don''t think you are okay."


    "You were about to say something earlier today when Mr. Lucero suddenly showed up and started class," Bogart said.


    "And we forgot about it later," Jamie added. "What was it about?"


    Tonton stopped pedalling his bike, and so did the other boys. They were already a good distance from the school, and just almost nearing the haunted house. It was another cold afternoon but their sweats were evident. They looked at Tonton and waited for him to say something.


    "I am not actually feeling alright since the explosion two nights ago," Tonton began. "I am not sick but something really awful is bothering me."


    Tonton momentarily fell quiet. The silence was broken by the flapping of wings by a passing flock of sparrows. The silhouette of the dark brown birds against the dusky sky was like a classical canvass painting. The three boys looked up and their gaze followed the direction where the birds were heading, leaving Tonton with his contemplation, head bowed and hands shaking.


    "Can you still remember what happened to each one of us right after the supposed collision?" he finally continued.


    His friends nodded their head. Bogart elaborated, "We lost consciousness. It felt like we were sleeping."


    "And then we dreamt," Jamie continued. "They were not really dreams, but more of memories."


    "Yes, ours were like memories," Kiko said. "But you said yours was about the future."


    "Did Tonton really said that?" Bogart asked.


    "Not really like that, but it was something like the future. I heard him say future."


    "Yes, I remembered as well," Jamie supported Kiko, then turned to Tonton. "I heard you but we were really scared that time that we lost track of everything."


    "Yes, you are all right," Tonton answered. "I also had memories in my dream but something else appears. It was like somebody else''s memories came into my dream."


    "That''s unbelievable!" Bogart exclaimed. "How can you have someone''s memories?"


    "I don''t know. I kept seeing the same people unfamiliar to me so I think those memories were owned by another person."


    "So where is the future?" Kiko interrupted. "They were still memories, although those were not yours."


    "That''s the puzzling part," Tonton said. "Apart from those memories, I saw something that may happen in the future. I saw a war but people were blasting lasers that can cut down trees."


    "I also dream of laser beams sometimes," Bogart chuckled. "It''s just normal for kids like us to have that kind of dream. We like fighting games."


    "But Bogart, this is different. It felt so real, it was like some kind of warning. I can sense they must have meanings. They were not just some random memories or dreams. And they keep coming back. Last night -"


    "What?" Jamie cut him. "You dreamt about those things again?"


    "Yes."


    "I haven''t. I only had my dreams two nights ago. And they did not come back."


    The other two boys also consented with Jamie.


    "But mine has come back. It came to torment me again last night."


    Tonton began to sobbed. Immediately, his friends walked towards him and encircled him with an embrace.


    "Tell us about your dreams," Jamie said.


    Slowly, Tonton described to them everything he had dreamt for the last two nights. He did not leave out anything; instead, he provided as much details as he could remember. He narrated the events and conversations of the couple who kept appearing in the dreams, as well as the laser wars, the falling star, and the gigantic jellyfish-like monster.


    They must have talked for a long time because when they had finished, it was already dark. The sky was now enveloped with darkness. Only the faint glow of few cute stars illuminated it. Random sounds from crickets and crawlies were heard everywhere.


    The boys thought about the dreams Tonton shared to them. The significance of some events were too vague and difficult to understand, while others were scary, just like the meteor and the monster.


    Once again, the sparrows sprang into the night air, filling it with echoes and sounds of their restless wings. The boys could not entirely see them in the darkness but they knew they were just near them.


    "These birds are acting weird," Kiko commented.


    When the birds were gone, they looked at Tonton. They could sense their friend''s uneasiness and so they tried to comfort him.


    While they were in a gloomy mood, a small bright light was seen steadily moving from the top corner of the sky. It was moving towards Subangdaku....

 15 The Second Shooting Star

    "What could the voice possibly mean?" Jamie asked. "The one that said ''coming''."


    Tonton shook his head. Though he could recall most of the happenings in his dreams, he could not really make sense of them. He was not certain whether the whisper refers to the previous falling star, or some future event like the laser war or another meteor striking the Earth.


    "I hope it was just my memory of the meteor," Tonton said positively.


    "Yes, I hope you are right," said Kiko. "We might be dead if there is another event."


    Tonton flashed a sad smile. He felt relieved after relaying the story to his friends.


    "Thanks, guys," he said. "It''s really cool to have friends who will listen and understand you. I am so happy to have you all."


    The boys created a circle and executed a group hug. They were laughing and feeling great after all the drama.


    "I feel fine now." Tonton was beaming as he said those words.


    "I hope those dreams never come again," said Kiko.


    "You should hung a dreamcatcher in your room," Bogart suggested which made everyone laughed.


    The night was warm, as if the chill air was out somewhere, chasing children playing in the open grounds. The nightcrawlers were loudly humming under the almost void dark sky, except for the few stars.


    " We should head home now," Jamie proposed.


    "I agree," said Kiko. "We have plenty of assignments to do."


    "I hate doing math," Bogart said under his breath.


    ''Coming'', Tonton heard a voice inside his head. He stood frozen, suprise and worry was written all over his face. His friends all notice it.


    "What happened?" Jamie asked worriedly. "Something''s wrong?"


    "Something just whispered in my head. Or maybe I am just hallucinating. We had been talking about my dreams that they may have gone into my head."


    "You sure?"


    Tonton nodded and smiled. Slowly, they went up to bikes and Tonton was about to board his when the whisper came back again. This time, it was louder that Tonton fell to the ground and covered his ears. Reflexively, his friends rushed and reached out to him.


    "Did you hear it again?" Kiko inquired.


    Tonton nodded. Meanwhile, Bogart incidentally happened to look up the sky and noticed a much brighter star. It was coming from the right and was moving steadily. It had a yellow glow which was obviously different from the rest of the heavenly objects in the sky.


    "Guys," he called out his friends. "Will you look up? There is something in the sky."


    They all obeyed including Tonton who was still covering his ears. For a moment, they were transfixed.


    "I don''t feel right about this, " Kiko commented.


    Details of the previous event came back to them. They stayed in their position and did not move a thing while observing the spectacle right before them. Doubt, worry, and fear were in their hearts.


    Similarly, the bright glow started small and kept growing bigger as it traversed the night sky. It seemed to suck out all the light and energy from anything on its path. Minutes rolled and the star-like object was now the size of a coin.


    Their hearts beat louder. It was eerily silent except for their labored breathing and heartbeat.


    "It''s not happening again, right?" Bogart asked in disbelief.


    "I think it is," Kiko answered inaudibly.


    "We better leave now," Jamie ordered.


    The boys took some steps back when Tonton suddenly screamed.


    "The voice in my head," he said in agony. "It keeps saying that it is coming."


    They looked up to the sky again and indeed, the bright thing had become larger, now almost the size of a lemon. It loomed as though it was heading towards Subangdaku.


    "Let''s go!" Jamie barked.


    Quickly, they scampered and went to their bikes. Tonton, now in tears, was still trembling that they had to help him board his bike.


    "Be strong, Tonton," Kiko reassured him. "We are always here with you. Nothing can harm anyone of us."


    Shakily, they began to pedal their bikes. The horror was all too real that the path they had always passed through seemed arduous and difficult. They struggled that Kiko tripped over a rock and he was thrown over. He rolled through the grasses. Immediately, the other boys stopped and helped him up.


    "Oh no!" Bogart hollered upon gazing at the object. It was now as large as an apple and shone brilliantly.


    ''Coming, comin, coming'' .... The whispers echoed again in Tonton''s head that he fell on his knees and cried, shocking his friends.


    "Come on, Tonton," Jamie urged. "Don''t let it defeat you."


    "The voices, they are scaring me."


    "Fight them."


    Hastily, Jamie helped Tonton get up. The night was slowly vanishing as the meteor got much larger and brighter. It was almost near the district, almost within an arm''s reach.


    They boarded their bikes again and pedalled. Kiko was struggling due to a graze in his left knee, while Tonton was still sobbing. Jamie led the pack as Bogart lagged behind them due to his sheer weight and short legs.


    The night was getting brighter as the object got nearer. Their shadows got longer as the grasses became more visible. Jamie looked behind him and got frightened by what he saw. The meteor was now the size of a watermelon and a blinding light was radiating around it. It was indeed going to hit Subangdaku.


    "Hurry!" he yelled at the top of his voice.


    "I can''t get any faster," Kiko responded in a husky voice. "My knee hurts a lot."


    "It will catch us up," said Tonton, his voice quivering from crying.


    Subangdaku was now well illuminated by the looming object. The boys could see their paths very clearly.


    "Help me!" Bogart screamed.


    Immediately, the three looked back and saw Bogart raising his arm for help. But bright light had already enveloped everything that they automatically squinted their eyes. Slowly, Bogart fell and his silhouette vanished through the light.


    Find authorized novels in Webnovel£¬faster updates, better experience£¬Please click www.novelhall.com for visiting.


    "Aahhh!" Kiko also screamed but like his friend, he tripped and disappeared. Simultaneously, the light swallowed Tonton.


    "No!" Jamie howled but he, too, was thrown away.


    Finally, the light touched the ground of Subangdaku.

 16 Shaken

    Upon impact, a strong earthquake was felt all over Subangdaku and the neighboring districts. The ground shook violently. It was strong enough to cause cracks in some old buildings, but not strong enough to topple any structure. Thankfully, Subangdaku was a small old district and not much high structures could be found.


    Like the boys, the villagers had seen the spectacle and they felt the same fear from the last time, though it was now much greater and bothersome. They believed they would all die from the impact, especially that an earthquake ensued. The bright light felt like coming from heaven, ready to take them all already. However, it was not and they survived the collision.


    The boys were thrown at different directions and were unconscious for a few minutes. Unlike before, they had no dreams. The fright and the will to live urged them to rouse quickly.


    "Guys, where are you?" Jamie called out as he was the first to get up.


    It was again pitch dark that he kept squinting his eyes to adjust to the darkness. His pace was unsteady because he was still dizzy from the light and quake. Yet, he pushed himself to look for his friends.


    "Here!" Kiko yelled.


    He struggled to stand up because the wound on his knee still hurt. Hurriedly, Jamie ran up to him and helped him up.


    "How are you?" Bogart was saying while running towards them.


    The two chuckled upon seeing his shadow wobbling in the night. Through everything, his gestures would bring smile to them. Bogart immediately hugged his friends upon reaching them.


    "Has anyone seen Tonton?" asked Jamie.


    "Coming!" Tonton''s whisper echoed in the silence.


    They ran up to him, with Kiko painstakingly limping behind the two. They hugged each other, thankful that they yet survived another impact from a meteor or some heavenly object.


    "It happened again," Kiko finally said.


    "I really thought we would all die," Bogart tearfully commented.


    "I am happy nobody got hurt, maybe except for that scratch on your knee, Kiko," Jamie said with a smile, happy to see that his frienxz were all in one piece.


    "That must be what my dreams and the whispers mean," Tonton said thoughtfully. "That anothet meteor will hit us."


    "You were given a vision," Jamie surmised. "Did you dream again just after the impact?"


    Tonton shook his head. He looked at Kiko and Bogart and they also shook their heads.


    "Neither did I," Jamie answered the unspoken question. For a while, they stood in silence.


    "What could have happened to the village?" Bogart asked worriedly.


    "We''d better go home now," Jamie suggested.


    His friends nodded and they instantly looked for their bikes. After which, they hurriedly went home.


    Upon entering the village, they saw that everyone had gone out of their houses. The entire community was flooded with lights as people opted to stay outside, just in case another impact or earthquake would happen. They quickened their pace, eager to reach home fast.


    Find authorized novels in Webnovel£¬faster updates, better experience£¬Please click www.novelhall.com for visiting.


    Bogart was the first to arrive who was instantly swept by both his parents. They were hugging and crying when the three left. Kiko reached his house next who was met by his brother Jackson.


    "Where''s father and mother?" he asked.


    "They looked for our little sister," Jackson answered. "She was not home yet when the meteor fell."


    "We''ll keep going," Jamie called out, and after waving goodbye, he left with Tonton.


    The sight along the way was heart-breaking. Young kids were hushed by their parents. Dogs and cats were restless as owners tried to pacify them. Some house items were put outside, like huge refrigerators, television sets, sofa, emergency bags, and many others.


    In the corner of their street, a more depressing thing happened. A large branch from an old acacia tree had fallen, smashing the roof of a retail store. It was their favorite store and they used to hang out in the place when having their afternoon snacks. Fortunately, nobody was hurt and the owners were busily fixing the damage.


    "This is more scary than the first," Jamie remarked.


    "Yes," Tonton agreed. "So much had been damaged. Hope the store opens soon. I love the place."


    "You did not see any of these things in your dreams?"


    "No, I just saw the meteor falling. How I wish I did, I could have warned everyone."


    "I doubt they will believe you. I mean, we are just a bunch of regular kids."


    Tonton pondered on those words and said, "I guess you are right. We are not scientists and people will not just easily believe anybody''s horrible dreams."


    Jamie chuckled and stopped himself after realizing something. "How about the monster jellyfish? Could that be true as well?"


    "I''m not sure," Tonton answered inaudibly. "I hope not. Monsters are not true. They are just in the books."


    "But what if this time, it is true?"


    At that moment, they were only a few houses from theirs. From a distance, they could see their parents anxiously waiting for them on the gate. They called for their names, breaking their conversation.


    The sight of them stirred emotions in their hearts that the boys started crying. Upon nearing a distance, they abandoned their bikes and ran up to them. For a long time, they cuddled one another.


    "I think we can breathe now," Tonton''s mother remarked after wiping off her tears.


    Jamie''s mother let out a sad laugh and said, "These kids are really making us worry sometime."


    "I could not agree more."


    After a few chitchats, the women bade farewell. They were about to enter their gates when a loud boom echoed in the night. It was like a thunder but louder and creepier. They were startled and instantly gazed at the direction of the sound.


    "Mother, what was that?" Jamie inquired.


    "I don''t know, son. You''d better go inside now."


    "Jamie!" Tonton called. "Did you hear that?"


    "Of course, he did," his mother answered for Jamie. She flashed a reassuring smile to her neighbors.


    "Is that a fire?" Jamie suddenly asked, therefore getting their attention. With his point finger, he then indicated the bright orange glow in the sky from a distance.


    To their disbelief, both mothers was stunned by the site of a burning cloud.

 17 State of Calamity

    Almost immediately, the sound of fire engines were heard from almost all direction. An explosion had occurred, causing fire and turning the night sky into orange. Some people were suddenly running on the street, spreading the new of the latest tragedy.


    "Where''s the fire coming from?" Jamie''s mother asked a passerby.


    "They say it is from the Wang''s Enterprises!"


    "Oh no! There''s too much paint and flammable materials in the hardware store, " Tonton''s mother joined in the talk.


    "It would be very dangerous if another explosion happens."


    After the sentence was finished, another loud explosion reverberated through the busy night. It was too deafening that some people dropped to the ground.


    Find authorized novels in Webnovel£¬faster updates, better experience£¬Please click www.novelhall.com for visiting.


    "Oh goodness, the fire will get bigger!"


    "Will the fire reach our place?" Tonton inquired worriedly.


    "I hope not, son," his mother replied. "The store is still far from here."


    While the sirens of fire engine got louder, more people ran to the streets. Some even advised everyone they saw to pack their things and head to safer place like the evacuation center.


    "Let''s get inside now," Jamie''s mother said.


    Immediately, Jamie went inside their house with his mother and watched the evening news while waiting for his older sister and father. They had not been home yet.


    Three trucks instantly came to Wang''s Enterprises to kill the fire. Thankfully, the store was far from the residential neighborhood and so everybody in the surrounding area was safe. Except for the store, no other buildings were destroyed by the fire.


    Jamie''s mother sighed a relief after hearing the news, more so when his husband and daughter arrived.


    "What has happened?" she asked. "What took you so long?"


    "The traffic was really bad. People were crowding the streets."


    "It was fortunate that I saw father on the way," the daughter interjected. "It''s scarry to be going home alone this time."


    "Yes, it is," Mrs. de Jesus said. "A lot of bad things had happened tonight."


    The family gathered around the televesion set and watched the news. The same thing was also happening in Tonton''s house. They were about to eat their dinner when the national news was interrupted by the local channel.


    " Hey, mom, "Tonton called out his mother as she was finishing setting the table." I think there''s an important news from the mayor''s office. "


    She hurried into the living room and settled next to her husband in the sofa while Tonton sprawled on the floor.


    The mayor''s speech was short and direct. After giving a greeting, he enumerated the events of the night like the fallen meteor, the earthquake, and fire. There was still no concrete explanations of why the meteor sudddenly showed up and fell on Subangdaku. Scientists had yet to visit to the crash site. He advised everyone not to go near the possible site for safety reasons.


    As to damages, there were still no estimates. Though there were no casualties, the earthquake and the consequent fire had caused destruction of several infrastructure that had to be accounted yet. In the end, he urged everyone to stay in their homes and be vigilant of any post-tragedy events.


    In order to recover from the trauma and to repair whatever needed to be rehabilitated, he ordered that the following day be declared as a local holiday in the town. Classes were suspended, as well as all works in the government, except for some offices like his. Telephones were open to receive calls from the citizens.


    After his speech, regular programming in the TV resumed. Tonton sighed a relief. The next day was Friday which meant that it will be a long weekend. He secretly smiled, happy that he would have around three days to spend with his friends.


    "It''s a good thing that Mayor declared a state of calamity for our town," Mr. Tagalogon commented. "Help should really come in fast."


    "Don''t you think we should get more supplies once we do our groceries this weekend?" his wife asked.


    "I think that''s a good idea."


    Tonton simply listened to their conversation. He was tempted to bat in and share to them his dreams. However, he could not see the point of doing that so he just finished his food.


    Meanwhile, Kiko was finally done washing their dishes when the mayor ended his speech. He was curious about some points in his speech and so he asked his older brother about them.


    "Will a bigger team of scientists come arround this time?" he asked Jackson was drying the plates with a towel.


    "I think so," his brother replied. "This is a much stronger impact. The meteor looks big based on the intensity of its light. Supposedly, there should be a stronger earthquake and more properties damaged. Mysteriously, the meteor was reduced into very small pieces before reaching the ground. "


    " Is that odd? "


    " Yes, it is. Tiny pieces of meteors could not produce that much light, including the earthquake. If they had been reduced to dust, they would be negligible. If they had been the size of an apple, and moves with a great speed, the impact would be very, very disastrous."


    Kiko and Jackson continued their discussion of the unexplainable science behind the collision. They were in that state when the first of the vehicles of the team of scientists arrived in Subangdaku. Bogart was one of the first few people who noticed their arrival. He was in their frontyard when he was distracted. The team brought three vans and the loud screeching of wheels seemed to announce their arrival.


    "Mother!" Bogart called. "Look, some vehicles are coming."


    "Who could they be?" Mrs. Pescador asked. "Are they the media? We should dressed up just in case they will include us in their footage."


    "Mother, they''re probably not media men. They must be the scientists the mayor said were coming."


    Before she could answer, the vehicles turned around. Instead of going to the village, the vehicles moved to the direction going to the grassland. They were moving farther instead of nearer.


    The mother and child continued watching until the dark grasslands swallowed the cars. Bogart might look jolly, but in his heart, he was afraid of some undesirable things that could happen in the district.

 18 A Dangerous Field Trip

    It was another chaotic morning for Subangdaku. The mediamen came back, along with their tents and gears. Locales were ambushed on the streets for interviews. While most preferred to stay at home and watched news, others cautiously went out and shopped in panic, before supplies got fewer and prices went up.


    Jamie was restless upon waking up and the endless news about the event bothered him more. After eating a hefty breakfast, he immediately went out to his friends.


    "Mother, I''m going to my friends!" he called out upon leaving.


    "Be careful, honey," his mother answered back. "It''s not yet really safe out there."


    "Yes, Mom."


    He fetched Tonton first against the will of his mother. Mrs. Tagalogon was not too happy of his son being out of the house.


    "Mom, please," Tonton pleaded. "We will just hang out at Kiko''s or Bogart''s. It''s not dangerous in their place."


    "Ok, but go home right away just in case another bad event happens," she warned. "I''ll die worrying about you."


    Jamie smiled. Unlike his mother, Mrs. Tagalogon was a total worrier. If not for Tonton, they would have been always out for adventures at night.


    "I''ll take care of Tonton, Mrs. Tagalogon," he teased and pinched his friend on the ear.


    They all laughed and the atmosphere got lighter. They immediately took their bikes and headed to Kiko who was all smiles upon seeing them.


    "Glad to see you, guys," he beamed. "It''s very boring to just stay home and wait for news updates."


    "Come on," Jamie said. "We can play some games at Bogart''s house."


    Bogart had plenty of toys in his room. There are board games, action figures, and tons of Lego blocks. If they want to go outdoor, their yard was spacious enough to chase around, shoot some rings, and bat a ball.


    "Let''s hurry," Tonton said. "I can''t stay out until evening."


    Kiko asked permission from his parents and quickly left with his friends. Mrs. Pescador was ecstatic to see them. She was pleased to have them as her son''s friends. They were good company and influence to him. That was why she always pampered them when they were around.


    "I''m so glad to see you, though I was not expecting you could visit today."


    She called her child and Bogart went out bouncing of his room. After some chitchat, they went back to Bogart''s room and played Tetris and other computer games. For lunch, Mrs. Pescador treat them to some roasted chicken, vegetables stew, and overflowing orange juice.


    They got bored with their games after a while and so they started talking about the meteor landing.


    "I really thought we would all die last night," Kiko opened up. "That was a strong earthquake after the impact."


    "At least the meteor did not explode upon impact," Jamie said hopefully.


    "Was it really a big meteor?" Tonton asked. "The news were not clear as to what really hit us last night."


    "The Mayor said that scientists were coming," Jamie answered. "But I did not hear any news update from them."


    "I saw them last night!" Bogart said excitedly. "I''m not really 100% sure it was them but I think it''s them. There were three big white trucks coming here, but instead of entering our village, they suddenly turned around and went to the direction of the grassland."


    "The grassland?" Kiko was skeptical. "Why the grassland?"


    "That''s where the meteor might have fallen," answered Bogart matter-of-factly.


    The three friends looked at each other in curiosity.


    "That''s too near," Tonton said, his nerdy instincts kicking in. "We should have all died with the impact."


    "And we were really near last night," Jamie added. "We have just passed the haunted house when it happened."


    "This crept me out so bad," said Kiko.


    There was a moment of silence as they pondered on the situation.


    "Want to check out the area?" Bogart proposed absent-mindedly. "I mean we can just see the place."


    The three looked at one another again with mischief in their eyes.


    "Won''t it be dangerous?" Tonton asked.


    "Then we stay away from the dangerous things!" Kiko answered to which they all chuckled.


    They hurriedly stood up and left gently the room, hoping not to be caught by Bogart''s mother. It was mid-afternoon and they were hoping she was sleeping so they could sneak easily. They just had to be back before nightfall.


    "Where are you guys going?" Mrs. Pescador asked upon seeing them. She was doing some cross-stitch project in the living room. The boys were instantly startled that no one answered.


    "Can we go outside?" Jamie asked nervously.


    "Where is outside? It''s still hot out there."


    "Just outside, Mom," Bogart answered for everyone. "Maybe in the grasses. We just need some fresh air."


    "You mean in the grassland?" She stopped sewing and stared at the boys.


    "Yes, Mrs. Pescador," Kiko replied. "But we will not be gone for long."


    "We will be careful," Tonton added. "We know the place too well so we will be alright."


    "Please, Mom," Bogart pleaded.


    His mother thought long and hard. Finally, she said, "Ok, just be very careful. We do not know yet what really happened last night."


    The boys cheered in unison. After kissing her in the cheek, they happily left the house.


    They biked hurriedly since it was mid-afternoon and the sun was still blazing wildly. Later, they passed by the river and took a break. The wide river of Subangdaku was another place they loved to hang around. The river was clean and the water in the banks were shallow. It was not muddy, in fact rocky, that they spent most of their weekend afternoons in the banks. But for now, they just stopped over and caught their breathes.


    After gaining strength, they resumed biking and no sooner, the roof of the haunted house was seen. They looked at each other and smiled. The house was only scary for them at nights, but when the sun was still up, it was just another dilapidated old house, like many other abandoned houses in the district, except that it was huge and roomy.


    Find authorized novels in Webnovel£¬faster updates, better experience£¬Please click www.novelhall.com for visiting.


    They stopped near the back of the house and propped their bikes on some trees. The grassland was already on sight. But unlike on ordinary days, some trucks were parked in a big circle. In the middle, a silvery plastic material was put up as fence, shielding whatever was inside it.


    "Is the meteor inside?" Bogart asked inaudibly.


    Nobody answered as they kept staring at the menacing setup in the middle of the grasses. Why is there a camp in the middle of the grassland?

 19 News Duo

    For Estella Bermudez and Sonny Casimiro, life was always on action and they had to be always where the news were. Riding in an old black car, they always raced to outsmart other mediamen to get exclusive news update. So immediately after the meteor hit Subangdaku, Sonny fetched Estella and combed through the district in search for any news.


    While Sonny was a seasoned camera man who knew too well the perfect angles, Estella was a neophyte in news reporting. She was young, only twenty-five, and beautifully looked on cam. Her face was angelic and attractive, with her silky white skin and distinctive black mole near her left eye. Despite her young looks, there was command and authority in her voice, as if demanding attention to everyone who hears her. No wonder, she was a rising star in the news department of the local TV station. There were countless product endorsement offers for her but she mostly turned them down, except if she believed in their advocacy, so that she could better focus on preparing her news reports. With that, her colleague respected her and audience adored her.


    Meanwhile, Sonny had been working in the television station for almost half of his life. He started as merely utility and errands man in the company. Through hard work and perseverance, he learned the meticulous craft of handling lenses and he was soon promoted as a field cameraman. He was a devoted employee that he could appear in a scene as fast as lightning. Though sometimes, his dedication to his job crossed the line that he sacrificed quality time with his wife Tina and their two daughters.


    It was usually Sonny who the television network assigned to get paired with rookie reporters. At the start, Sonny was quite unhappy with the arrangement since he was not really open to the idea of always adjusting to another personality. Time came and his partner would be assigned as studio reporter or be transferred to another cameraman or to the newspaper section of the company. That saddened Sonny, as well as partnering with another individual.


    It was quite a different story with Estella. Three years back, Sonny was grumbling with the thought of a new partner when Estella, in her faded worn jeans and matching white shirt and denim jacket, walked into the conference room and startled everyone. It was not a usual sight as neophyte reporters always came in business coat and slacks on their first day. It seemed that the young cheeky lady knew exactly what she would be doing.


    Find authorized novels in Webnovel£¬faster updates, better experience£¬Please click www.novelhall.com for visiting.


    After reading the feature article and getting briefed by the segment writers, Sonny and Estella travelled to a distant community in the province. They went through muddy dirt roads and woody grasslands before reaching the small village. Along the way, Estella was vibrant as she shared some stories with Sonny. The man was initially nonchalant but was soon enjoying her company. In his heart, he knew they had hit off a good start.


    Estella was also not fussy and had excellent way of dealing with people. They shot the feature fast. When the magazine show aired, it was their segment that was raved by viewers. People were instantly crazy about the new face and they constantly talked about her. The duo received more assignments until they became staple field reporters in the primetime news. Three years had passed and they still maintained a great working relationship and Sonny was not yet partnered with a new reporter.


    It was still early in the night when the mysterious object hit Subangdaku. Sonny was living in the nearby town, just a few minutes ride from the district, and he saw before his eyes how the bright light landed and violently shook the ground. He saw everything and his heart pumped with worry and excitement. Just seconds after the spectacle, his pager immediately beeped with a message from the news head to cover the event.


    Sonny quickly prepared his gears and went out, against the will of Tina and his kids. When he dropped by Estella''s apartment, she was already in her denim outfits, ready for some action. Out of fear and anxiety, they were mostly silent. They talked only when some ideas popped into their heads.


    Subangdaku was in panic when they came. They also came when the first meteor fell but the chaos this time was so much different. People were on the streets hugging their loved ones. There was an earthquake which damaged several infrastructures, even causing fire to a big hardware store. It was heart-breaking for Estella that she shed a tear or two before going out of their car. She interviewed fathers, mothers, and children after offering her sincere sympathy. It was a long night and both of them was exhausted at the end.


    It was other news team who grabbed the live telecast of the town mayor''s speech. Estella and Sonny heard it in their car radio. They sighed after hearing the speech. They knew that their work had just started and they could be staying a little longer in Subangdaku.


    It was near midnight when they decided to take a rest and parked in the outskirts of the district. They had interviewed plenty of individuals and covered a fire. They were terribly exhausted and were about to sleep in the car when they spotted three white vans coming to Subangdaku.


    "Are those familiar to you?" Estella asked sleepily and pointed at the vehicles. "What channel could they come from?"


    "No idea," Sonny answered after taking a long time studying the vehicles. "I could not see any logo. There must be one but it is too dark to see."


    "Oh wait, where are they going to?" Estella asked in wonder when the vehicles turned around.


    Sonny also looked in puzzlement. He finally said, "They could also be the team of scientist the mayor said would be coming to investigate."


    They watched as the vans moved farther aways.


    "Should we follow them?" Estella inquired.


    Sonny pondered on the question. If indeed they were the scientists, they must be investigating the landing site. If not and they were simply town people and they would be wasting some time on them.


    "I think we should wait a while," he finally spoke. "Our people will inform us if the scientists have arrived and where they will be heading."


    Estella nodded. She watched how Sonny leaned back his seat and lie down to sleep. She was restless, as if her intuition was telling her something was off with the vehicles. But she was too tired anyway that she also leaned back her seat and slept.

 20 Sneak Time

    "Let''s go and check what''s inside," Jamie suggested.


    "Won''t it be dangerous?" Tonton asked anxiously.


    "We won''t know unless we try," Bogart answered confidently.


    The boys had no definite plan on how to extinguish their curiosity. They simply wanted to know what was inside the camp. It was out of the ordinary and they were certain that the meteor was inside it and that the scientists were studying it already.


    "It would be my first time to see a meteor," Kiko said excitedly. "I only see them in textbooks, but now, it is reality."


    "Me, as well," Bogart uttered. "I wonder how big it is."


    "Guys, wait," Tonton tried to tame their excitement. "We can''t barge in and demand to see what''s inside the camp."


    The three laughed. Tonton was right, they could not just walk in and take a look. There presence must be kept a secret.


    "We can run around the left side," Jamie suggested. "I don''t see many people and activities in that area."


    "Plus we can hide in the trucks," Kiko added. "We can use them to cover us as we sneak inside the camp."


    "But we have to be very careful," Tonton reminded them. "We don''t know who they are and what they can do."


    "They are the scientists!" Bogart spoke assuringly. "They are the ones the mayor talked about."


    "Hey, guys," Kiko interrupted them. "Let''s keep our voices low. They might hear us and catch us."


    "Come on, let''s get going," Jamie declared, "and don''t forget to stay low. We can''t be seen."


    Squatting and walking slowly like a crab, Jamie led the way. The grasses were tall and the afternoon breeze was slightly strong which worked for the boys'' favor. They were easily hidden as they moved towards the trucks.


    "Wait," Jamie ordered in whispers. "I''ll check the plastic sheets."


    Find authorized novels in Webnovel£¬faster updates, better experience£¬Please click www.novelhall.com for visiting.


    They had already reached the trucks near the silver wall. Stealthily, Jamie moved a little further and touched the sheets.


    "It''s thick," he announced after going back to his friends. "I could not see anything behind it. But it is silent. That part of the fence must be vacant."


    "How can we get inside then?" Bogart asked.


    "We can go under," Kiko suggested. "The sheets do not really touch the ground. See?"


    The boys followed Kiko''s point finger, and indeed, there was a space between the earth and hem of the fence. It was wide enough to fit their little bodies.


    They moved forward and stooped low. They could easily fit, except for Bogart. Tonton went in first and observed his surrounding. There were more vehicles inside the fence. He was behind a small truck that looked like an ambulance. Nevertheless, it was silent so he reached down the fence and gave an okay signal. His friends saw it and Kiko immediately slid under.


    When it was Bogart''s turn, he struggled hard because he was too big for the space. He let his legs go inside first and wiggled his way through. He was making the plastic fence sway, thereby making disturbing sounds. Suddenly, they heard footsteps coming towards them. Jamie quickly pulled back Bogart by his shoulders and dragged him behind a car while Kiko and Tonton stayed frozen on the other side.


    "I think the noises came from here," a man''s voice said.


    "I agree," another one spoke. "Let''s search around."


    Bogart''s and Jamie''s eyes widened. Hurriedly, they crawled away from the men and after several minutes, the voices faded away. They sighed a relief.


    "Let''s go in here," Bogart suggested after noticing that the gap in that part of the fence was much wider.


    Jamie nodded and carefully, they slid through. It was an open space but several vehicles were parked everywhere. There were some people walking around but they did not notice them. Jamie tapped Bogart and together, they hid behind a very huge truck.


    Meanwhile, Tonton and Kiko heard the commotion and getting caught off-guard, they suddenly became motionless. After recovering their senses, they hid under the ambulance truck.


    "What now?" Tonton inquired.


    "We can take a look inside this truck and find our friends later."


    Tonton nodded his agreement. Carefully, they crawled outside and reached for the truck door. Surprisingly, it was not locked and they easily went inside.


    They were no people inside except for someone who was lying atop a metal table. It was not moving and since there was no light inside, they could not figure out if the person was sleeping or simply resting on the table. Thankfully, there was still diffused rays of sunlight outside so that the inside of the truck was not too dark.


    They slowly approached the table, and to their surprise, the figure was not exactly a human. Its lower body was covered in a white sheet, revealing only its chest and head. Its face was similar to human''s but it looked weirdly different, especially because of its ashen skin color. Its black eyes were open but was staring into the unknown. Its nose but too pointed while its partly open lips were thin. Its upper head was bald and too large against its shrunken jawline. With his broad shoulders, he was more like a man.


    "Who could this be?" Kiko asked himself. "Is it even a human being?"


    "I don''t know," Tonton replied. "But I feel I have seen something like this before."


    Kiko moved closer and with one sweep of his hand, he pulled out the blanket, exposing a naked being with its hips and lower extremities looked burnt or decayed.


    "Oh my!" Kiko gasped.


    The being had a very slender body. Its grayish arms and legs were long ang thin. Its waist was very narrow against its bloated ribs. Its hips and legs seemed damaged, looking like a rotten tree log that had been smashed or partly burned.


    "Is this an alien?" Kiko uttered in disbelief. "Have we just been visited by an alien?"


    Kiko kept shaking his head as he alternatively looked at Tonton and the being. Slowly, Tonton realized that the being looked like those in his dreams - the featureless couple and the nation who was in the brink of a war. He approached the table and was about to touch it when the being suddenly shivered. It moved its arm and grabbed Tonton by his wrist. The boys screamed....

 21 The Spaceship

    Jamie and Bogart stayed in their hiding spot and remained silent for a while. They occasionally heard footsteps but they were distant and unalarming.


    "What do we do now?" Bogart finally shattered the silence. "Where could Tonton and Kiko be?"


    "We can find them later," Jamie replied. "We can investigate this big truck first. It''s what we came here for."


    Bogart nodded. The truck was an open-back type which was covered with silver plastic sheet so they had no clue what was inside it. There was already a ramp propped against the back so they used it to climb and get inside the truck.


    It was dark inside but they could see something like cute vehicle in the center. It looked like a small car but shaped like an oval or bullet. They could see nothing inside it for its few mirrors had a black tint. It was mesmerizing to watch because its silvery surface shone in the darkness.


    Gently, they approached the vehicle. They gasped as it was more astonishing when up-close. However, its rear was crumpled, as if it was damaged by some impact or collision.


    "What is this thing?" Bogart whispered.


    "I don''t know," Jamie answered. "It''s some kind of a vehicle."


    Bogart fumbled on its side and touched something like a button. He pressed it and to his surprise, a side door opened from the side. Its hinge was located on top and so the door opened upwards. However, the space on that side was narrow and so the door did not fully open. Instead, the strained whirring sound from the vehicle engine continued as it struggled to open the door which was stuck against the wall of the truck. In one snap, the door gave way and broke.


    Bang!


    The boys jumped in fear. They waited in silence but they heard no other sound but their labored breathing. Thankfully, the incident did not create a loud noise because only segmentx of the hinge was broken, leaving the door awkwardly hanging on it.


    "That was close!" Jamie exhaled. "Hey, what are you doing again?"


    To his surprise, Bogart climbed up the vehicle, his bulky arms and belly struggling on the limited space. He squeezed through the only seat in the vehicle.


    "Wow, this is cool," Bogart said excitedly, ignoring his friend. "This is nothing like an ordinary car!"


    "Is this a spaceship?" Jamie asked curiously.


    Bogart was taken aback. He did not thought of that until his friend said so. He examined the dashboard of the vehicle. Indeed, it was something different. He saw countless buttons and levers. There were characters or images written on them but they were not familiar to him. His heart leapt because they stumbled into something intriguing.


    "Jamie, I guess you are right. Things in here are quite weird. I don''t think this is some kind of a scientist''s gear."


    "So a spaceship landed on us, and not a meteor?"


    "I think so."


    "And it did not simply landed. It crash landed. The back side is wrecked."


    "This is exciting. I''m enjoying this discovery."


    They both gave out a low chuckle. It was not everyday that regular kids could come across some alien objects.


    "Hey, this is not really our discovery," Jamie said. "The scientists came in here first."


    "Huh, I think you''re right. But why did they keep this a secret? They were here last night but there was no news the entire day about some spaceship."


    "This is fishy." Jamie thought long and hard, then said, "Well, there could be more trouble if the people know about this. People will get into panic."


    Bogart nodded. "Could there be other spaceships here?"


    "I think none. This is the only huge truck in the camp and located in the center. The other trucks are encircling it, as though forming a barrier around it to protect it."


    Find authorized novels in Webnovel£¬faster updates, better experience£¬Please click www.novelhall.com for visiting.


    "Besides, there was only one falling star last night, which happens to be a spaceship and not a meteor."


    "Unless the first falling star was also a spaceship."


    They instantly became quiet. Fear crept in as more realizations dawned on them.


    "If there are spaceships," Jamie finally uttered, "then there would be aliens. This spaceship could not be here on its own."


    "This is getting creepy. No wonder the scientists did not inform us about this. Could the mayor have known about this all along?"


    "I don''t think so. He gave his speech before the scientists arrived."


    "Then the government is behind this."


    Jamie nodded. He looked around him, and the way the camp was set up and how the truck was covered seemed to confirm their theory.


    "Where could the alien be?" Bogart asked curiously.


    "They must have taken him to be studied. They always did that in the movies."


    "We should tell Kiko and Tonton about this."


    "Come on, but we need to find them first."


    Bogart was about to leave his seat when he accidentally brush his left arm on a hot surface.


    "Ouch!"


    "Bogart, are you alright?"


    Bogart howled in silence, careful not to let anyone hear them and got themselves caught. The pain was searing that he almost cried. He pointed at something like a black box in his left side.


    "This thing here is hot. I did not notice until my arm touched it."


    Jamie climbed on the door side and squeezed himself in. He took out his friend''s arm and below his elbow, he found a large burn. It was at least two inches wide and brightly red.


    "We need to patch this first," Jamie said and took his handkerchief. "We can put some ice on it once we got home."


    "There must be gasoline in this box," Bogart conjectured while his friend was busy bandaging his burn. "That''s why it was hot."


    "Silly, there''s no way this spaceship is carrying some gasoline. There''s no gasoline in space."


    They both laughed. Jamie was soon finished with his job. Because it was still painful, Bogart found it hard to move his arms.


    "We''d better keep moving now."


    Bogart was about to answer his friend when a loud shriek echoed. It was a scream made by some scared boys. The two sat up, realizing that the voices were from their friends....

 22 Escaping the Camp 1

    Tonton and Kiko was terrified by what just happened. Tonton struggled to break himself from the grip while Kiko kept punching the lifeless thing. All of a sudden, hurried footsteps were heard outside. The two got more panicked.


    With all his strength, Kiko grabbed the gripping hand and forced open the fingers one by one. Succesfully, he liberated Tonton with no resistance from the body. Indeed, the alien could have been dead already. By then, the footsteps were directly outside the truck. Impulsively, the boys crawled forward and squeezed through the gap in the front seats. Kiko got in first and crammed himself beneath the passenger''s seat. Tonton struggled because of his glasses but succesfully got through the passenger''s side also and positioned himself on top, crouching lowly on the seat. At that moment, the back door of the truck opened wide.


    "Are there people here?" a man in low voice asked.


    "Could it be the alien?" a younger man in high-pitch nervous voice retorted.


    "Nonsense," another young voice said. "The alien is dead already. The team said so."


    The boys heard everything but they remained in their location, quiet and barely breathing. Meanwhile, Jamie and Bogart heard their friends'' scream clearly. It was loud against the quiet camp in the middle of the grassland.


    "It must be them," Bogart spoke. "They must have been caught."


    "We got to help them," Jamie agreed.


    Jamie jumped out of his position. Bogart was about to do the same when he realized his left foot got stuck. Something like ropes or wires had tangled his foot all the while.


    "Oh, come on," Bogart sighed in exasperation. "Jamie, I''m stuck. Help me please."


    "Not again," Jamie nagged as he climbed back to his previous position.


    As the spaceship was small and the space inside the truck was narrow, Jamie got into an awkward position just to help his friend, plus Bogart had an injury so he could not easily move. Jamie extended his arm and reached what held his friend''s foot. He worked fast to unfasten the tangles until Bogart was freed. In delight, Bogart leapt in joy but somehow lost his balance and fell forward. He held out his hands to stabilize and cushion himself but he was unsuccessful. Instead, his hands fell on the dashboard of the vehicle and accidentally pressed random buttons. Instantly, a deafening siren blasted.


    Tonton and Kiko heard the alarm and got even more panicky. They covered their mouths to prevent themselves from screaming.


    Find authorized novels in Webnovel£¬faster updates, better experience£¬Please click www.novelhall.com for visiting.


    "What''s that now?" one of the unknown voices spoke.


    "There must be an emergency."


    "Come on, let''s go!"


    The men vacated the truck and the boys took the opportunity to escape. When the sound of the footsteps faded, Tonton reached for the door handle and gently pulled it. He slowly opened the door while surreptitiously glancing outside. Finally, the door swang open wide and Tonton quietly leapt out. He signaled Kiko who then quickly left his position and joined him. Hurriedly, they tiptoed their way to the nearby vehicle.


    Meanwhile, the defeaning sound jarred Jamie and Bogart. They both tripped over and fell on the dashboard so that more buttons were pressed. Instantly, the dashboard lit up in different bright colors.


    "We have just created more trouble!" Jamie exclaimed.


    He rose up swiftly and offered his hand to help Bogart stand. To support his weight, Bogart leaned his left hand on the dashboard and once again touched more buttons. Instantly, a woman''s voice began to speak incoherent words. As she was speaking, the monitor in the dashboard flashed images.


    "What could she be saying?" Bogart asked.


    "I don''t know," Jamie answered. "But I do not feel right about it."


    Jamie pointed at the monitor. There was a red "X" blinking on the screen. The voice just kept talking, as if giving some immediate warning.


    At that moment, they heard footsteps coming to their truck. In one jump, they abandoned the spaceship and searched for their hiding place. Except for the spaceship, there were no other items inside the truck. Jamie pulled Bogart and they hid in a corner, away from bright light around the spaceship.


    Almost at the same time, guards went up the back of the truck. The moment they landed, they became hypnotized by the bright light coming from the spaceship.


    "What''s this thing?" one of them asked when the last person finally arrived.


    "We must protect this -"


    The leader of the pack was not able to finish his statement because the spaceship suddenly moved on its own. It shook violently and emitted various lights. The men of five quickly moved over to the spaceship to hold it.


    The boys took the chance and swiftly moved out of their hiding place. They ran and jumped out of the truck. The men were rattled by their unexpected presence.


    "Get them!" the leader bellowed.


    It was already dusk and the darkness was beginning to defeat the light. However, it became advantage for them as the men were not able to see their faces. They were safe.


    As Jamie and Kiko scampered outside, the movements of the spaceship became more violent. Unable to hold the alien vehicle anymore, the men released their grasp. Unfortunately, the spaceship became more unruly that it grazed one of the men''s arm. To everyone''s surprise, it stopped moving. A quick silence ensued but was immediately followed by an incessant beeping. As the spaceship flashed more brightly-colored lights, the beeping sound became louder and faster.


    "Everyone, jump out!" the men''s leader shouted upon realizing what was about to happen.


    The men swiftly ran and jumped out of the truck. The spaceship let out one last horn and self-destructed. It was a huge explosion that flames and smoke quickly rose up. The back of the truck was also on fire.


    More men rushed into the scene to help their limping comrades. They took them away from the explosion. The fire was relentless as it immediately devoured the entire back of the truck. The men in the camp moved in panic as they packed up things. The truck on fire was the biggest in the camp. Its tank was full and a bigger explosion could happen soon.....

 23 Escaping the Camp 2

    Jamie and Bogart did not waste their chance and ran as fast as they could. They did not dare look back as the men might just be right behind them. They heard the commotion but they did not care. They needed to be as far away as possible. Even Bogart surprised himself. He was alongside Jamie despite his burn and his fats. Just then, the explosion occurred. The boys were thrown forward.


    "Not again," Bogart complained. "How many times must we face an explosion and gets thrown?"


    Jamie laughed. He could not believe that in such an unholy moment, his friend could crack a wise joke. Bogart joined him laughed and rolled in the ground until tears filled their eyes.


    "That was witty," Jamie admitted.


    He suddenly sat up and looked around him. Nobody noticed them, although several men were running on sight. He pointed to a nearby truck and crawled towards the vehicle. Bogart understood what he meant and followed behind him.


    "How shall we find the two?" Bogart asked while catching his breath at the same time.


    "I have no plan, yet," Jamie answered, "but we really need to find them immediately."


    "I can''t think of any plan but retracing our path."


    "We can''t go back there. There was just an explosion. And there may be too many people there right now."


    Jamie stood up and peeped through the side of the truck where they were hiding. Indeed, there was a crowd in there. Those who rushed to the scene were helping the wounded and limping.


    "Come and see, "Jamie invited Bogart." The truck is on fire. "


    "Huh, " Bogart could not believe what he just heard.


    Quickly, he jumped to Jamie''s side and watched the chaos. The men were frantically running. While some assisted the injured, most were packing up and dumping their stuff at the back of other trucks.


    "Are they leaving now?" Bogart inquired.


    "I think so. They are leaving and moving fast. This place looks more dangerous with each passing minute."


    "Hey!" Bogart suddenly said excitedly. "I think I saw them."


    From a distance just few vehicles from them, two small beings were hiding behind a truck. From time to time, they peeped through the side, as if waiting or watching for something. Bogart pointed which truck and Jamie smiled in disbelief.


    "I think it''s really them," Jamie. "Thank goodness they are safe."


    Unknown to them, Kiko had also seen their shadows glancing by the truck. Their hiding spots were almost across from each other so when Bogart''s head popped up, he was certain it was them.


    "Did you see them?" Kiko asked Tonton.


    Tonton nodded and said, "We have to join them."


    "But how? There are too many men out there. They could easily catch us."


    "Let''s think of a way."


    They were busy talking that they did not notice that two men were approaching their truck. Jamie and Bogart saw the men and got instantly worried. They were now within touch of the truck but their friends were oblivious to them.


    "We have to do something," Jamie said in panic.


    To his surprise, Bogart stood up and walked towards the men. He looked calm and relaxed, but inside, he was sweating in fear.


    "Hey!" Bogart shouted at them while waving his hands up.


    "Hey, kid, what are you doing here?" one of them asked.


    "I''m lost."


    "This place is off limits to kids," the other said. "You just don''t get lost here."


    "We are playing hide-and-seek," Jamie spoke up as he was getting out of his hiding place.


    He sensed Bogart had really no definite plan as he was unable to clearly answer the men. Slowly, he walked towards him.


    "What are you doing?" Jamie whispered.


    "Saving them," he whispered back.


    ''Hey, hey, hey!'' the second one asked in exasperation. "You can''t be talking by yourselves."


    "You must be the kids who saw the body and screamed," the other one chimed in.


    The boys gave a puzzled look in response. Meanwhile, Kiko and Tonton were taken aback by their friends'' action. They were not expecting that. They were busy conversing that they became unaware of the men.


    "So they knew we saw the body," Kiko said in a low voice after analyzing the man''s statement.


    "They knew about us," Tonton answered, "and now they are after them."


    "Hold your hands up," the more suspicious man ordered Jamie and Bogart. "We will take you to our commander."


    Upon hearing those words, the kids realized something. The men they dealt with were not scientists but more like army men based on their clothings.


    "No you can''t!" Jamie yelled in panic as the men suddenly seized them.


    The boys struggled in their grasp since the men were too much stronger. Fueled by rage, Tonton and Kiko leapt out from hiding and rushed at them. Tonton jumped on the man that held Jamie, knocking him down. He grunted from the sudden attack. On the other hand, Kiko bit the fingers of the man that grabbed Bogart. The person screamed and slapped Kiko, sending him on the ground. At the same time, he threw Bogart forcefully. The other two boys saw what he did and attacked him. Jamie pulled his arm and when he was almost out of balance, Tonton kicked him in the butt, sending him over to his colleague lying on the ground. Both men groaned, both from pain and shock. The boys hugged each other, joyed knowing that they were all safe.


    "You little rascals!" one of the men yelled.


    The two men attempted to stand but were immediately pushed by the boys. However, one of them grabbed Kiko by the hand and both of them fell. The three boys quickly went up to them and punched the man, freeing Kiko.


    They were in this state of commotion when the burning truck sent out a huge flame. A siren wailed and the trucks in the camp started their engine.


    Find authorized novels in Webnovel£¬faster updates, better experience£¬Please click www.novelhall.com for visiting.


    The boys stepped back and grouped together. They were staring at the flame while the trucks began moving.


    "Requesting all personnel to leave the area," the megaphone from one of the trucks announced.


    The two men swiftly got up and went to their truck, unmindful of the boys.


    "You boys better leave here now or get grilled in the explosion," one of them shouted. They gasped at what they heard.


    "Run!" Jamie ordered and the boys immediately dashed to the end of the camp....

 24 Reporting Live from the Explosion

    The day was filled with endless interviews from the citizens of Subangdaku. They kept saying the same fears and worries. By noontime, Estella and Sonny were getting tired of how their news stories went.


    "We need to find new angles," Estella commented. "We can''t report the same things over and over."


    "Any updates from the Mayor''s office?" Sonny asked.


    "I''m afraid there''s none. The other team has not yet reported any progress."


    "That''s strange. Several hours had already passed since his speech but it seemed nothing had happened."


    "It''s really weird. I was hoping the Mayor can tell us about what had been found out in the investigations of the scientists."


    "How about we check out the elementary school?" Sonny proposed. "It was the first impact site."


    "Good idea," Estella agreed and after realizing that it was already late in the afternoon, she added, "we''d better hurry up before it gets totally dark."


    Sonny maneuvered their little black car through the streets of Subangdaku. Compared to last night and earlier that day, the people had already began to relax. It was a tough moment for everyone and no wonder, several had needed medical attention. Many of those hospitalized had experienced hypertension, mostly the aged ones. It was even tougher for the duo as they had to deal with them when delivering their news.


    By and by, their car passed the last house of the village. Ahead of them were just woods and grasslands. Estella enjoyed the scenery as the countryside vibe of the surroundings helped ease up the tension in her.


    "Do you remember the three white vans we saw last night?" she broke the silence.


    "Uhmm? " Sonny tried to remember.


    "We were about to sleep when they appeared but instead of coming to the village, they turned around."


    "Oh, yes. What about them?"


    "I supposed they were the scientists. They could be in the school right now."


    Find authorized novels in Webnovel£¬faster updates, better experience£¬Please click www.novelhall.com for visiting.


    "Maybe, and maybe not," Sonny said casually. "If they are, then I hope they let us cover their investigation. It would be a great scoop."


    Sonny turned to Estella and flashed a hearty smile. Estella could not help but laughed in return. Suddenly, an explosion occurred from a distance which stopped them in their tracks. A tall stream of fire danced in the twilight sky.


    "Oh, my goodness," Estella uttered in disbelief. "Where is it coming from?"


    "I think it is from the grassland," Sonny answered uncertainly.


    Through the window of their car, the flame was clear against the dark musky sky. Unlike the usual fire, the flame had some white-blue streaks in it.


    "Wow, what kind of fire could that be?" Sonny asked while wiping his eyes, not believing what he had seen.


    "I feel something off about this. It is not just an ordinary flare. It could be coming from the meteor debris."


    Sonny looked at her hard, admiring her quick analysis and wise guess. Without saying anymore words, he gunned the engine and started moving the car again, into the grassland behind the old haunted house.


    Meanwhile, the boys ran as fast as they could. It was the fastest they could do as they were running for their lives. Any minute late and they could also be engulfed in the menacing explosion.


    Behind them, the trucks in the camp had also started running. Engines were in fury as drivers and passengers alike were anxious to leave the camp. In the excitement, nobody had thought of bringing plenty of fire extinguishers. Some men attempted using the few they had but the fire was unwavering. Calling the fire department was also not permitted by their commander. Whatever had happened and had been done in the camp could not be known to the public. Anybody who leaked information would put themselves in danger. Hence, the fire continued consuming the truck and was now full and ready to release a gigantic blast.


    The boys finally reached the plastic fence and went under. The gap between the ground and fence was wide enough that Tonton and Kiko went together. Jamie and Bogart followed but the later found it hard to wriggle in the space. He successfully did and after standing up, he tried to run after his friends but some grass knotted around his foot. Alas, Bogart fell on the ground.


    "Ouch!" he groaned as his burn hurt upon impact.


    Jamie immediately went down to him and untied him but the knot was too tangled. The trucks were now loud inside the camp as they slowly departed. The burning truck sent out another spew of bluish flame.


    "Oh no!" Kiko exclaimed and quickly helped Jamie.


    Finally, the tangle was removed. They stood up and resumed running as the trucks begin moving out of the camp. The grasses were taller than them but they effortlessly pushed them down or tossed aside. Just then, the burning truck exploded one last time. A huge flare of yellow-blue flames lit up the night sky.


    From a distance, the news duo saw what happened. It was a scary vision for them. Within a minute, they reached the haunted house. Sonny pushed the car all through the grassland and after finding a safe space and somewhat nearer to the fire, he parked it. Upon stepping out of the car, Sonny rolled the camera while Estella prepared herself. On his cue, Estella reported the incident live.


    The blast was strong that the boys stumbled and fell on the ground. They looked back and saw the weird flame swaying in the breeze. Some segments of the plastic fence were also burned and damaged, revealing what''s inside the camp.


    "Oh my," Bogart sighed. "That was really close."


    Upon noticing his bandage, Kiko asked, "What''s with the bandage? Were you hurt inside?"


    "Yeah, something like that. We discovered a spaceship and I got into an accident, burning my left arm."


    Tonton and Kiko looked at him. They could not believe what they just heard.


    "We also encountered something inside the camp," Kiko said.


    "There is an alien, presumably dead because it was motionless, " Tonton added, and after several seconds of silence, he said gravely, "And the alien looks like the ones in my dreams."


    "It''s a lie after all," Bogart sighed, "I mean the meteor."


    "Did we put ourselves in danger?," Jamie asked dreadfully.


    The boys looked at him intently. It was a question they could not really answer, but based on their experience moments ago, it was. In their wandering, they discovered something truly eerie and omenous....

 25 Hiding the Truth

    The truck ablazed one last time, sending another spew of bluish flare into the sky. It was beautiful like no ordinary fire, but it was ghastly and sinister, as if telling them to be wiser with their actions.


    "Let''s go," Jamie whispered. "We should not be staying here any longer."


    Hurriedly, they found their way through the grasses and saw the two media men in their path. Similarly, the two were also suprised to see them. They were in the middle of their live telecast but the woman did not falter upon seeing them. The boys froze, uncertain of what to do.


    "For the first time, we have seen people here," they heard the woman said. "These kids could possibly be the first ones who had witnessed the fire."


    To the boys'' shock, Estella walked towards them while Sonny slowly pointed the camera at them. They remained in standstill, as if huge blocks of stone were tied on their feet. Sensing what they were about to do, Jamie summoned his will and stepped back. The others followed him, while the duo were inching closer to them. Only few feet of grasses separated them.


    "We will now be interviewing one of them," Estella declared.


    At that announcement, Jamie hopped and so did his friends, and together, they ran away from them. Estella was caught off-guard for she was not expecting their reaction. Kids their age would love to be in TV. They would do anything to attract the media''s attention.


    On their first movement, she sprang and attempted to catch up with them. Sonny also leapt, trying to cover the chase on cam while he balanced himself and his gear. But the boys outsmarted them and went their separate ways fleeing from them. Confused, they gave up.


    "Well," Estella continued her telecast and gave her viewers a contagious sweet girl smile, "I guess the kids refused our interview and deserted us."


    Her smiled turned to soft chuckle, the sound of which was like the crunch of almond nuts. Even Sonny was melted with her gesture. Surely, the chase was an exciting angle and though they failed in having the interview, the viewers would surely forgive her. She was an angel in TV.


    Meanwhile, the boys separated in their way. They did not mean to but when the media was about to ambush them in an interview, they knew they had to run away quick. They could not be seen in TV, especially by the men in camp. They should not let anyone know that they had witnessed the fire, right from the start. They could put themselves in danger if they expose themselves. They were already caught on cam. They could only pray that the resolution was too low so that they could not be identified or that the darkness was strong enough that they could not be seen.


    However, the darkness was also their enemy at that moment. Except for the huge fire, there was nothing to light their path. If they ventured too far, they might get lost in the grasses. Besides, snakes, spiders and other deadly animals could be lurking in the darkness. It was this dilemma that the boys had to face.


    Meanwhile, Estella was still smiling on cam when the sound of revving engine was heard on the background. Because of the crackling of fire and the chase after the boys, the news duo did not hear the screeching of tires. Only when they noticed the exit of vehicles through the silver plastic fence that they started to panic and run after some potentially more substantial news content.


    "There are now some vehicles going out of the mysterious camp," Estella delivered spontaneous news while galloping on the grasses. "These trucks suddenly showed up and they could be involved in the fire."


    Sonny firmly gripped the camera as he hopped through unknown ground. Unlike Estella, he could not look down to survey his pathway. He could only rely on his feet to find his way. On camera, Estella continued to blabber, ever hopeful to finally get an intriguing angle of the exclusive news. They ran until they came to what seemed to be the entrance of the camp.


    "We are now here closer to the vehicles," continued her news update. "We could only hope for an interview this time."


    The news coverage was watched by almost all people in Subangdaku and in the nearby towns. After the incident the previous night, people were keen in catching up the latest updates. Although the team reported only the fire, the extraordinary glow caught on cam was intriguing and interesting. Viewers were quick to link the "meteor" impact with the mysteriously flare. However, the news team had not pointed the connection and they were still chasing answers to the questions in their minds. Estella''s innocence also added drama to their report, urging people to be glued on their seats.


    "Now we see men in clamouflage shirts at the back of trucks," Estella said. "Why is the military involved in the incedent?"


    Sonny smiled as she said the last lines. He could imagine people gasped with the image of military men departing from a scene with unexplainable fire. Estella was waving and calling out one of the men when another one shooed them away.


    "Officer, we just want a statement about that fire incedent," Estella explained, her left hand pointing the fire. "There seems to be an explosion a while ago."


    Find authorized novels in Webnovel£¬faster updates, better experience£¬Please click www.novelhall.com for visiting.


    Despite her petite stature, Estella was reaching to the men on the truck as far as she could. That truck had already stopped the moment they saw the two running towards them. By then, others followed while three continued moving away from the scene.


    "Officer, three trucks had left," Estella persisted. "Why are they in a hurry?"


    Sonny shifted the camera and zoomed in on the trucks. It was dark but the lights from the trucks illuminated the place.


    "This is a government operation," one of the men said. "We advise you to wait for further statements."


    "So what has the government to do with this?"


    "I really could answer that Ma''am. Our commander will be issuing a statement soon."


    Just then, the sound of firetrucks boomed from a distance. Sonny cursed under his breath. It was ill-timed and the presence of other unwanted guests was not welcome. A big scoop was in their hands already. They should not spoil it....

 26 Safe At Las

    It was a moment of total panic and fear for the boys as they got separated while escaping from the media. Kiko stumbled and fell on some stones. He gave out a low growl as the graze in his left knee got worse. He suppressed the urge to cry, in fear that he would be heard by the media men, though the pain was really excruciating. His wound might have opened up again.


    "Hey!" he heard a whisper near him. "Is somebody there?"


    "Jamie?" he whispered back. "I can hear you. I think we are close by."


    They waded through the grasses and their struggle was made more difficult by the starless night. There was the fire, but its bluish-white flame was not so much help. Jamie finally heard Kiko''s voice in the grasses in front of him and his friend''s silhouette became more visible. Quickly, he ran up to him.


    "Oh, thank you," Jamie poured out his happiness.


    "I thought we would all get lost. These grasses are difficult at night."


    "Are you okay?" Jamie asked after seeing his friend limping.


    "I think I''m fine," Kiko replied gloomily. "I tripped and my graze last night just worsened."


    "Oh no, I hope it is not so bad," Jamie said while shaking his head.


    "I can manage. I think we should find the others."


    They were about to begin their search when they heard the sirens of firetrucks coming from a distance. They looked at each other and realized that they must take advantage of the moment. While the media and army would be busy with the fire, they would have to find their friends. So when the firetrucks were close by, they instanly called out their buddies.


    "Bogart!"


    "Tonton!"


    They shouted their names, loud enough for their friends to hear them but low enough not to reach the camp. They sweated because they need to find each other and head home as early as possible.


    "Hey guys!" Tonton suddenly appeared before them and hugged them.


    The boys leapt in happiness. Now, there was only Bogart.


    "Bogart!" they shouted his name while getting farther from the camp.


    "Where could he possibly be?" Jamie asked while catching his breath. They were exhausted already.


    "We better get back to our bikes," Kiko proposed. "That''s where we would all go."


    "I guess you are right," Tonton agreed. "I hope he found his way there all by himself."


    They dropped their shoulders and lazily head back to their bikes. To their suprise, Bogart was already in their destination. He was resting under the tree, the outline of his body stood up against the darkness.


    " Guys, you are late! " Bogart exclaimed demandingly. "What took you so long?"


    The boys laughed at how Bogart glared at them. They could not simply believed how things worked out.


    "Sorry we were slow," Kiko answered sarcastically. "We were looking for each other in the grasses."


    "We went looking for you," Tonton added. "Until we decided to head back, hoping to find you here."


    "Honestly, I could not believe our luck and see you here," Jamie said. "We could not be prouder of you."


    Bogart immediately hugged each of his friends tightly. He was overwhelmed.


    "I know you would look for you," Bogart said, tears beginning to fall from his eyes.


    "We will always look out for each other," Jamie declared.


    "And what are those tears for?" Kiko teased him which made the other two boys laughed.


    "Hey, I''m not being dramatic," Bogart said uncertainly while trying to find a good alibi.


    "Are you scared?" Tonton chimed in.


    "No, of course not!" Bogart answered defiantly. "It''s just that my elbow hurts a lot."


    Indeed, it was hurting and only in that moment that he felt the pain again. They had been running for the last half hour that he totally forgot about it.


    "Sorry about that," Jamie consoled him. "That makes you and Kiko our wounded brothers from this crazy adventure."


    "What happened to you?" Tonton asked.


    "My wound from last night opened up when I fell along the way."


    "You guys can still ride your bikes?" Jamie asked them. "We must leave while they are still busy."


    Jamie pointed at the camp. The fire was about to be extinguished already. Yet, several people had also arrived there, possibly other media men, some police, or just curious individuals. The fire was really dangerous, especially that it happened in the grassland. Though it was from the residential areas, it could destroy neighboring farms.


    Find authorized novels in Webnovel£¬faster updates, better experience£¬Please click www.novelhall.com for visiting.


    "We''ll get by," Kiko answered and then looked back at Bogart who smiled in return.


    Immediately, they boarded their bikes and began their ride home. The ride was slow, and aside from the fact that two of their comrades were hurt, they were absorbed in their own thoughts.


    "What have you found back there?" Jamie finally broke the silence.


    Tonton and Kiko remained quiet, they were uncertain of how to answer.


    "We saw what looked like to be a spaceship in the biggest truck in the camp," Jamie continued when nobody answered.


    "It is really a spaceship," Bogart disagreed.


    "Regardless, it was the cause of the fire. We accidentally push buttons in the spaceship, causing it to self-destruct and explode."


    The two contemplated on what their friends confessed. Despite the fire, it was a chilly evening.


    "What we saw was an alien body," Kiko finally confided. "I think it was already dead when we arrived."


    "It was the same kind of being that I saw in my dreams," Tonton added. "I guess my visions were not about Earth."


    "The alien must have been calling for help," Bogart said easily. "And it contacted you."


    "So all along, it was not a meteor," Jamie concluded.


    "That''s true for the meteor last night," Kiko expressed his worrisome idea. "How about the first one? "


    "Could it be another spaceship?" Tonton asked.


    "Which carries another alien," Bogart added.


    "If that is the case, where is that alien now?"


    Nobody answer Jamie. Everything was just speculation. Could they have endangered themselves by discovering little pieces of truth?


    They continued home in silence. The fire incedent was all over the news. Thankfully, they were not recognizable in the news footage. It was dark and the actions were quick, so they just looked like shadows in blur.


    They retired early in bed. For now, the friends were safe.

 27 Secrecies

    It was a lazy yet tense day for the entire Subangdaku. Different tragedies struck the district in the last two night. A meteor fell on Thursday night, causing a strong earthquake. Consequently, several old structures were damaged and a fire happened that consumed an entire hardware store. A state of calamity was declared so that the following day, classes and work were suspended in both public and private offices.


    Subangdaku was still recovering when yet another mysterious happening occurred on Friday night. Scientists, protected by the military, put up a camp in the grasslands not far from the residential area and the river. It was a sealed camp and nobody in the district, even the local government unit, knew about it. It was kept a secret until a fire broke out in the camp. Thankfully, the fire was put out before reaching the grasses and burning the surrounding areas.


    Estella delivered a blow-by-blow reporting on the incidents on that Saturday morning. The network postponed the regular show in the timeslot to give way to an explosive documentary about the events. The program contained exclusive and mouth-gaping coverages that could take anyone''s breath away.


    Find authorized novels in Webnovel£¬faster updates, better experience£¬Please click www.novelhall.com for visiting.


    Sonny and other guys in the network were able to record everything on camera - the landing of the meteor and the bright light, the earthquake, and the fire in the grassland. Last night''s footages added more excitement to the program, although some of the videos were dark and grainy. Still, they solicited intriguing opinions, especially their discovery of the camp.


    "They claim that the operation was kept secret in order not to cause panic to the public," Estella was saying on the live show. "Until now, there was still no clear explanation of why the camp existed."


    What happened last night was very clear in Sonny''s and Estella''s mind. The arrival of the firetrucks was unfortunate because the military was able to evade most of their inquiries. They promised an official statement but their commanding officer was nowhere in sight. Estella presumed that he was with one of the three trucks who instantly left the camp after the fire. That really picked Estella''s curiosity. Why should there be three trucks leaving? Why do the men left behind kept silent about it? Why should it be top-secret?


    Estella could only assume that the camp was related to the meteor landing. While she was bombarding the attending officers with questions, Sonny was all ears with his surroundings. They were in that cat-and-mouse state when he heard the men in the other truck spoke to each other in loud voices.


    "How are the scientists?"


    "Dr. Alvarado said everyone were in the trucks that left. They need to be as far away as possible."


    The next words were a blur as the sirens from the firetrucks got louder. Several media men also arrived and the camp became a cacophony of excited voices. After a while, Sonny tagged Estella and told her about what he heard. She jumped in excitement and insisted on following the trucks, but Sonny talked some sense into her and she waned. However, she contacted the management and pitched her exclusive scoops of the events. Overnight, they wrote their stories and mixed the recordings.


    While Estella was still speaking on the camera, some guy from the news division entered the studio and told Sonny that they would be patching a live feed from the mayor''s office. The head of the camp would be issuing a statement. Sonny signaled Estella and she immediately cut off her report.


    "We will pause for a while to give way to an official statement from the mayor''s office," Estella said and the program instantly shifted to the newscast.


    Instead of the mayor, another individual was focused on the camera. He was in the center of a table, with the mayor on his left and other officials on both their sides. His nameplate read "Dr. Silverio Alvarado". He was in his early fifties and he had an air of authority, intelligence, and arrogance. After the mayor introduced him to the small crowd in the conference room and to the viewers of the newscast, the man took the microphone and began his statement.


    "Good morning to the citizens of Subangdaku," Dr. Alvarado spoke. "The recent events in the district had been truly heart-breaking...."


    His preliminary words were exasperating to the many viewers. Instead of directly addressing the issue, he just beat around the bush and offered unsolicited sympathies.


    "As to last night''s event," he continued, "our team was able to recover something truly interesting. We found a meteor debris lying in the grassland. Indeed, what hit Subangdaku was a meteor. The remnant of the meteor was two meters big and may contain minerals not suitable or toxic to human. That was why we quarantined the area for public safety. We already took the object and transported it somewhere safe. As to where, that is classified information. "


    "Bull****," Sonny uttered under his breath. "You don''t set up a camp just to recover a meteor."


    "We already advised the mayor''s office to conduct certain operations to ensure public safety," he continued. "Rest assured that everyone''s welfare is our main concern..."


    His words were lost in Sonny''s and Estella''s heads. They could not believe him. Their actions were quite illogical. After the speech and Estella''s program, the duo gathered together to express their disbelief.


    "They are covering up something, "Estella said.


    " I believe so," Sonny agreed." They exerted too much effort to get a debris. Something is fishy here."


    " We need to find this out. Their public welfare thing is a crap."


    Sonny laughed, admiring the fire in Estella. He could not ask for a better partner. And despite realizing the possible dangerous consequences, he knew they needed to follow up on this matter. Their chase of the truth did not end there yet....


    At home, the boys gasped at what they heard in the news. They knew what they saw and that was the truth. Everything the scientist said was a lie. Before they separated last night, they promised to get together the following day. Their discovery was not a children''s game anymore....


    In another house, a woman secretly laid a child to sleep. She was smiling as she brushed the child''s hair. There was even a drop of tear in her eyes as she hummed a lullaby.


    "You are safe here," she whispered....

 28 Sealing the Brotherhood

    Jamie was disgusted about the news. He instantly disliked Dr. Alvarado for delivering lies in his speech. His sentiments were also shared by his friends, who like him, were also at home and watching the news. He wished to get out of the house sooner. Everything in the news was depressing and not entirely the truth.


    Last night, they had agreed to meet again the following day at the river. Their parents knew that it was their weekend habit to swim in the river. However, Bogart arrived home with a bandage in his left arm while Kiko was limping. They could only wish that they would not object to them going out again.


    So after lunch, Jamie immediately asked permission from his parents but was told to stay until mid-afternoon. It was not good to be swimming under the blazing sun. Having no choice, Jamie simply counted the hours until he was allowed to go out.


    His friends'' parents were also hesitant to let them wander while there were still some ''threats'' from the meteor impact. Yet, they knew their buddies and where they were going so in the end, after much haggling, the boys were freed from the boredom of their homes.


    "Thankfully, my knee does not hurt as much as yesterday so I can pretend to walk straight," Kiko said while vigorously moving the pedals of his bike.


    They were already heading to the river and the thought of unwinding urged them to propel harder forward. The streets were not as busy as people preferred to stay indoors.


    "Same with me," Bogart confessed. "Mom almost collapsed last night upon seeing the bandage on my arm. She thought I had fractures."


    The boys chuckled. It was really a struggle for them to regroup. If not for Jamie''s smooth talks, Tonton''s good boy charm, and Kiko''s witty persistence, they would not have been complete. So when they came to the river, they immediately abandoned their bikes, took off their clothes, and dipped on the cool waters.


    For a while, they forgot anything about the meteor and just spent the time teasing each other and playing around. It was near twilight when they rested by the banks and relished the fresh air, cool breeze, and picturesque sky.


    Find authorized novels in Webnovel£¬faster updates, better experience£¬Please click www.novelhall.com for visiting.


    "These last few nights had been a close call," Jamie finally spoke up about the event, while his eyes continued to savor the wide sky. "Never thought something dangerous could come from the heavens."


    "Are we really in danger?" Bogart asked to which he just heaved his shoulders.


    "Not yet so far," Kiko answered for him. "Will the military come looking for us? They saw us."


    "I hope not," Tonton said dejectedly. "They did not know what we saw in the camp."


    "I think they know," Jamie refuted. "Back in the camp, when Bogart and I suddenly confronted the officers, they said some kids saw the body and screamed."


    "That would be us!" Kiko exclaimed and laughed.


    "So they knew about it," Tonton whispered, then asked, "How about the spaceship?"


    "I guess they also knew about that," Bogart answered.


    "They saw us coming from the truck before it got ablazed," Jamie.


    "So we are really in big trouble," Kiko concluded.


    "Forbid that to happen," Tonton rebuked him. "Besides, they already got what they wanted."


    "Yeah, and it was not a meteor," Bogart said sarcastically which made everyone laughed.


    "We should not tell anyone about what we discovered," Jamie suggested. "This should stay between us."


    The three pondered on his proposal. The sun had already drowned in the horizon and the songs of the crawlies were heard. The wind had become colder but the thought of possible dangers that they could get into brought more shivers into their spine.


    "You have a point there," Tonton acknowledged his friend''s suggestion. "We would not only get ourselves in trouble but our family as well."


    "You are right," Kiko agreed. "Let''s keep our loved ones away from the danger."


    "So we stop here?" Bogart asked. "I mean Subangdaku could be in greater harm if we keep the truth."


    "No, we don''t tell anyone about what we saw," Jamie said strongly, "but that does not mean we stop searching for the truth."


    His friends'' ears straightened and they looked at him with a beaming smile. Their eyes sparkled with the idea of being detectives.


    "I did not see that coming," Kiko hissed. "But I kind of like that."


    "Count me in," Tonton said with little quiver in his voice.


    "Me as well!" Bogart interjected. "But where do we start?"


    "Maybe at the school," Jamie said. "The first meteor or alien hit the school, and I think the scientists would come back to investigate again."


    "Or they found something last time they inspected," Kiko said after a long thought. "And like last night, they chose to hide it from the people."


    "We must find that out," Jamie said.


    "Besides, Tonton also dreamt about the school," Bogart added. "There should be something in the school."


    "Oh yes!" Kiko agreed, his journalistic spirits kicking inside him. "So the school is our starting point then."


    Everyone smiled. Their little investigation would begin soon.


    "Do you still have those dreams?" Jamie asked Tonton, suddenly changing the topic.


    "None so far." Tonton replied. "Since the second impact, I never dreamt again."


    "We can even find clues in your dreams," Kiko said.


    "I hope the monster in your dream will not come true," Bogart said worriedly to Tonton. "The one that ate us all."


    The friends were shock for a while as they had forgotten about that part of Tonton''s dreams. Finding an alien in Subangdaku was frightening already. How much more would a jellyfish-like monster bring?


    "We must protect each other at all cost," Jamie said.


    "Last night was a tough thing for us," Bogart added, "but we made it through."


    "Because we are friends," Tonton pronounced. "And friends look out for each other."


    "I''m lucky to have you, guys," Kiko said with tears in his eyes. "I never thought I could have friends like you."


    By then, stars began appearing in the dusky sky. Colors had faded but through the looming darkness, their hearts brightened.


    "We should have a name for our group," Bogart suggested.


    "Like what?" Kiko asked. "Power Rangers? X-men?"


    "Crazy," Tonton uttered. "We are not superheroes."


    "We are friends," Jamie said. "But more like brothers. I feel like you are all my brothers."


    "Brotherhood of Subangdaku?" Kiko tried again but his friends only laughed in disgust.


    "River Brothers" was Tonton''s suggestion which everyone pouted.


    "Why not Biker Brothers?" Jamie said after a thought. "We love biking a lot though our gears are old and rickety already."


    They looked at their bikes. Indeed, they were old already but they remained strong. In their hearts, they also wished their friendship would endure and persevere through all adventures. That night, the friendship of the Biker Brothers was sealed.

 29 A Test of Faith

    The Biker Brothers woke up with a renewed heart on Sunday morning. The night before was overwhelming as they finally sealed their friendship. After coming up with the official name of the group, they made a promise of protecting each other, that they would not hesitate to help a friend in need, especially that there was potential threat from their discovery.


    They made some sort of blood compact. Since they could cut their wrists and sign some sort of contract with their blood, they performed a simpler and less painful version of it. Tonton got a needle from his box, which he always brought in his bike, and each one pricked his pinky finger with it. It was getting dark already in the river by that time and it made the struggle even more exciting and ''manlier''. After a drop of blood appeared in each one''s finger, they touched their fingers altogether and recited an oath of friendship.


    \"I, state your name,\" Jamie led the oath which everyone followed, \"from the sunshiny district of Subangdaku, do thereby solemnly swear to be loyal member of the brotherhood. As a devoted member, I will do everything for the best interest of one another and will not speak ill of anyone to other persons. I will give each one the same amount of respect, love, and trust. I will treat each one''s dreams, successes, and hardships as mine. In all situations and conditions, I will be a friend and brother unconditionally. Signed, state your name.\"


    \"This is fun, \" Kiko spoke up, \"though it''s kind of gross mixing our bloods.\"


    \"I feel that, too,\" Bogart said while laughing, \"but we are brothers now so we become one blood.\"


    \"Friends and brothers for life,\" Jamie added.


    \"For life!\" cheered Tonton.


    The thoughts of last night''s events indeed brought a sweeter smile to the boy''s morning. After eating their breakfast, they dressed up and went with their families to the local church. They met each other on the church and simply waved hello as they looked for their own seats.


    While waiting for the service to start, people were anxiously talking about what had just happened in Subangdaku.


    \"I told you, it''s a meteor,\" a woman said to her seatmate. \"We are lucky the impact was not strong.\"


    \"What is happening to our place? \" a man asked another. \"Has a curse fallen in Subangdaku?\"


    \"Are we safe now?\" another woman expressed her worry.


    \"Let''s keep praying so no more evil happens here.\"


    \"Don''t you think it''s better to leave this place now?\"


    \"They say that the meteor is bringing bad luck to the district.\"


    \"We should seek a fortuneteller.\"


    \"For now, we should be really thankful what we all get a chance to live.\"


    Different noise gathered in the small church. But when the bell rang and the congregation lined up to start the service, everyone became solemn and participated in the worship and rituals. The service was strained as people dared not talk about the incident again. Yet, when the priest delivered his sermon, he touched the subject and offered message of peace and hope to his listeners.


    \"In these last few days,\" the priest said, \"we have seen how Subangdaku was ravaged with calamities - the meteor impact, earthquake, and fires. We have seen the destruction, but through everything, we have remained strong and faithful. We have remained to be full of hopes of better tomorrow for our place.


    Whatever happens from this point on, let us all keep the peace, hope, and joy in our hearts. The government may have found the meteor but still there is no assurance that we are finally free and clear from any possible danger. Yes, there is no assurance but with God, we can find rest and safety....\"


    The priest choked on his words and began to cough softly. However, he was in front of the microphone so the sound still echoed inside the church. He cleared his throat and immediately continued with his preaching.


    \"Some of us fears the unknown. We do not know the future and this makes us afraid of what is ahead. We do not know what the meteor impact brings to our peaceful district. Still, let us remain calm and steadfast. Let us listen to authorities and not just rumors and hearsays. People might appear and suddenly claim of things to happen, as if they are gods who know the future. But we are mere humans and we do not hold the future. Yet, we have the holy writing and only through its words that we can find peace and hope.... \"


    The people listened intently to the priest''s words. They were touched and felt their faith was strengthened. After the service, each one left and proceeded with their day''s plans. Some went to eat lunch at some fastfood joints, others went home immediately to do their laundry and clean the house.


    The Biker Brothers once again met at the gate and while their parents exchanged brief talks, they discussed the priest''s sermon. They soon bade goodbye and when they were about to leave, Mang Tomas suddenly showed up. He seemed out of his mind and was whispering words to himself. People stayed away from him as he was not looking his way while walking. But when he was in front of Tonton, he stopped walking and whispering; instead, he looked at the boy long and hard.


    \"You saw it,\" he shouted at Tonton and pointed at him. \"You should have told everyone.\"


    Scared, the boy went up to his mother and embraced her. Mang Tomas was relentless and stood up on a concrete platform near him. He breathed hard, closed his eyes and lifted his hands. When he opened his eyes again, people were already crowding before him.


    \"This is not the end yet,\" he began his speech. \"Greed will take over the hearts of some, bringing doom to many people. Fear will cover the land as darkness builds. Soon, a crippling chaos will happen.\"


    The people gasped at his words. Some women began to cry already. Mang Tomas looked at the crowd with scorn in his eyes.


    \"I ask everyone to stay at home. Stay still and be vigilant for what can happen next. Many will come out, claiming to be saviors. Watch out, for some are true but most will be false....\" Mang Tomas became quiet for a few minutes while people waited for his final words.\" Go home. Be safe. It is happening already.\"


    His last sentence sent shock and chill to the listeners. Immediately, the crowd dispersed, bringing along worry and fright in their hearts. For the Biker Brothers, they could only believe the man''s words. He had been correct before, he could not be wrong now. But one question lingered inside their head: What was happening already?

 30 Nurse Grace

    Everybody hated walking up on a Monday morning and so did Grace P. Santillan. There was no work for the last three days and she was fine waking up late. However, she needed to hurry up as the school physician informed her yesterday that they should be reporting not later than 6.30 the following morning. She stared for a long time at her beeper, wondering what the fuss was all about.


    Against her will, she rose up, made her bed, took a long shower, ate a low-carb breakfast, and hurried to school. Grace was the school nurse at Subangdaku Elementary School. While her superior Dr. Jose P. Gatbunton simply delegated almost all tasks to her, Grace was untiring in giving her service to the school. It was always to her that the kids run up to whenever some medical attention was needed. They loved her, particularly that she was kind and modest. Though she moved slow, she was always precise and meticulous with her actions. She believed that there was no room for mistakes for people like her. Other than her commendable work ethics, she also looked pretty, demure, and really young at 25. Unlike her, Dr. Gatbunton was loud and careless. Despite being in his mid-40s, he looked older with his gray and untidy hair, unkempt clothes, and oversized glasses. He also always kept himself locked in the clinic office, leaving Grace to do all the chores. In fact, the students and teachers rarely saw him but they knew he was present because his old tan car was always parked by the clinic.


    Grace had no issues working with Dr. Gatbunton. Subangdaku was a small rural district that there was actually not much things to do everyday, except when there were scheduled medical activities. Besides, she enjoyed the company of kids. She had no problem whatsoever dealing with children of any age, possibly because she had a number of little siblings.


    Back at home, she had two little brothers and one younger sister. The girl was already in college, taking up education. Grace hoped she could graduate that school year. The older brother was a freshman in high school while the younger one was in fifth grade. Life was hard for the family and so Grace needed to contribute in the family''s funds. Both her parents were engaged in small businesses whose income were not always reliable. Thus, Grace felt obligated to help, especially to her younger sister.


    So despite the temptation of her bed and the cryptic message of Dr. Gatbunton, Grace arrived at the primary school with a smile on her lips and a sleepy glow in her eyes. She loved her family enough to work hard, and she loved the kids enough to work with a lively and gentle spirit.


    Her watch said 6:20 and Grace sighed a relief. Dr. Gatbunton might be an airy and incautious boss but she did not want to act badly. She did not want him to comment anything not good about her. Besides, Dr. Gatbunton had already arrived in the clinic. Gently, Grace parked her bicycle beside the doctor''s car and went inside the building. Oh yes, Grace drove her bike when going to work. Like most people in Subangdaku, Grace grew up wandering the streets of Subangdaku in a bike. She already relinquished her old bicyle to their youngest brother, in exchange of a new one which was more feminine in appearance.


    \"Good morning, Doctor,\" Grace said upon entering the doctor''s office and gave him a sweet smile. She had earlier left her things in the consultation area and hurriedly went to report to the doctor.


    \"Good morning, Grace,\" Dr. Gatbunton greeted back without looking at her.


    He was talking to two people before Grace entered. They did not look familiar to her and she tried to hide her wonder as best as she could. For a year working in the school clinic, the doctor only had few visitors, like some local goverment officials or loved ones, so in a way, she had already memorized their faces.


    \"Do you need any help, Doc?\" she inquired.


    \"Yes, we have plenty to do today. You better wash up and get dressed.\"


    \"Yes, Doc,\" she replied meekly and went out of the office.


    Grace could not help but wonder who the visitors were and what would they be busy with during the day. Immediately, she proceeded to the dressing room and donned her nurse''s garb. She tied her hair and she looked even lovelier with her cute bun. After she was done, she went back to the doctor''s office.


    \"Grace,\" Dr. Gatbunton began, \"we have some people here from the local health center. Cecilia and Tara will be assisting us in giving flu shots to the kids, and possibly to the whole community if ever an outbreak happens.\"


    Grace could not believe what she had heard. The school did not usually administer flu shots, though October would be best since the flu months were coming. But what was more unusual was the doctor''s last words. She could not answer in shock.


    \"You see, Miss Grace,\" Cecilia spoke up without being acknowledged, \"a meteor just landed here in the district. It could contain allergens and unknown substances that could trigger different ailments, particularly those affecting the respiratory system of the body.\"


    \"Dr. Alvarado, the great scientist, met up with the health officials yesterday,\" Tara added. \"In the emergency meeting, he recommended to take precautionary measures to prevent possible spread of diseases caused by the meteor. The mayor agreed and we are here to assist in conducting these measures.\"


    Grace recovered from her initial shock and listened to the two women. Only then she was able to size up the two. While Cecilia looked regal and authoritative, Tara was cheeky and aggressive. The former seemed to be in late thirties while the latter appeared to be at the same age with her. Both were beautiful but the older one was more restrained and proud while the younger was tactless and playful.


    \"It''s going to be really a big task ahead,\" Grace commented with a smile while trying to hide what was playing inside her head. \"How are we going to accomplish it?\"


    The visitors discussed the process with Grace while the doctor simply listened at his seat, surreptitiously glancing at their direction from time to time as he flipped through the pages of what appeared to be a magazine or journal. After which, the women hurried to their stations and began doing their individual tasks. Before they called the children, Cecilia went out of the clinic. She took the pager from her sling bag and typed \"DONE.\"


    She looked at the kids who were queued going to the clinic. She smiled a genial smile, but behind that, an evil thought lurked.

 31 Attack of the Bullies

    The Biker Brothers were excited to go back to school that Monday morning. It was not anymore holiday and people began to relax again. They rode their bikes happily as the sun kissed the grasses of Subangdaku.


    They arrived early at school and after some chitchats, they went into their separate classes. Before the first period, all teachers in the school informed their respective students of the emergency flu shots. They explained the situation and how the shots would be administered.


    \"So after the fourth grader,\" Mrs. Casabueno said, \"all the fifth grader will be going to the clinic for your individual shots.\"


    \"Ma''am,\" Bogart spoke up, \"each of us will be injected, right?\"


    \"Of course,\" she replied.


    \"Are you scared, Piggy?\" Andrex whispered from behind Bogart.


    The boys around them heard him and they all laughed. Andrex was the leader of the gang who delighted in bullying Bogart. Andrex was tall, muscular, and a bit handsome in a ragged way. Bogart was too embarrassed with his remark that he did not answer back or even look behind him.


    \"What''s the noise about?\" their teacher asked.


    \"Nothing, Ma''am,\" Eric, the gang''s second-in-command who was equally boastful but undeniably simpleton, answered for them. \"Bogs here wet his pants imagining being injected.\"


    The class got into an uproar that even their other classmates laughed. Bogart remained motionless, opting not to aggravate their teasing.


    \"I think I smelled his piss,\" Albert, son of a wealthy local businessman and the gang''s financier said.


    \"Is that his piss running on the floor already?\" Pepito, the group''s loud-mouthed and no-brainy member chimed in. \"Am I right, Henry?\"


    The gang''s fifth member simply nodded and did not add anymore fuel to the fire. The class roared in laughter again as others also began mocking Bogart. The truth was he did not wet pants, he was just silent while absorbing their insults. He bit his lips and clinched his fist but he did not dare move a single muscle.


    \"Enough of that class!\" Mrs. Casabueno ordered. \"Bogart, did you really piss in your pants?\"


    The class cried laughing. Being in her early fifties, Mrs. Casabueno easily believed whatever was said to her. Thus, she really thought Bogart wet his pants. Her innocence and their classmate''s silence made everyone laughed. Bogart held his composure, but deep inside, he was grieving.


    \"Quiet!\" Mrs. Casabueno shouted and the noise instantly subsided. \"You should not be kidding Bogart.\"


    \"Yes, Mrs. Casabueno.\"


    \"Yeah, we should not be kidding him,\" Andrex whispered just low enough for Bogart and his friends to hear. \"Instead, we should be pigging him.\"


    The gang giggled and then behaved like good boys. All throughout the class, Bogart was quiet and uncomfortable. He felt everyone was observing him, waiting for him to pee his pants. During lunch with his friends, he acted like everything was fine. Yet, they noticed his lack of energy.


    \"Are you fine?\" Jamie asked. \"It seems like you are not your usual self.\"


    \"I''m fine. Maybe I am just thinking of some things, like the coming flu shot.\"


    \"Why?\" Tonton wondered. \"Are you afraid of injection?\"


    \"Really?\" Kiko teased him.


    \"I did not say I''m scared!\" Bogart yelled at them.


    \"Sorry, just chill, dude,\" Kiko said defiantly. \"Don''t be angry, l was just kidding.\"


    \"Oh, sorry,\" Bogart apologized. \"I did not mean to react that way. My head is just preoccupied.\"


    \"Just relax,\" Jamie said. \"We are your friends here.\"


    Bogart smiled in response. After which, they finished their meal while talking about the latest episode of their favorite comics. By early afternoon, it was the turn of the fifth graders for the flu shot. They formed a queue outside the clinic while waiting for the grade four pupils to come out. The students in the first section were first in line, followed by the second and third sections, respectively.


    \"Did anyone piss his pants?\" Andrex hollered from behind the queue which made everyone instantly laughed.


    \"I heard him say oink oink while wetting his pants,\" Eric added.


    Kiko heard every word and understood what they meant. Only then he realized why Bogart was touchy earlier. He left his line and went to Jamie and Tonton, and told them everything he heard. The two also flared up and they immediately went to the end of the queue. By then, the bullies were already encircling Bogart with the boys pushing him around.


    \"Hey!\" Jamie yelled at them. \"What do you think you''re doing?\"


    \"Oh, who do we have here?\" Andrex said mockingly. \"Does Piggy need rescuing?\"


    \"Don''t you dare call him that?\" Kiko ordered him.


    \"So what are you gonna do, Mr. Trying-Hard President?\" Andrex glared at Kiko.


    \"What bunch of craps - a piggy and a loser!\" Eric added. \"You two should not be hanging out with them.\"


    \"That''s none of your business,\" Tonton snapped.


    \"Hey!\" Andrex yelled and pointed at Tonton. \"I don''t like how you sound, Nerdy Boy.\"


    Jamie stepped out and stood up against Andrex, his eyes fierce and angry. They were head to head, and suddenly, Andrex pushed him hard. Jamie was thrown but immediately got up and pushed Andrex too. Eric was about to join in but Kiko pulled him aside. The other three thugs also engaged in the scuffle, so did Tonton and Bogart. But before it could get worse, the school guard whistled and ran up to them. The boys stopped and the guard, together with teacher Mr. Lucero, sent them to the school''s principal. They appeared to have come to terms, and Kiko and Bogart were immediately sent to the clinic to treat their wounds.


    \"What are you boys up to these days?\" Grace asked them.


    \"They got it days ago when we were playing,\" Jamie answered. \"Not from the fight.\"


    \"I know,\" she said. \"The wounds are not fresh but they need to be continually cleaned and disinfected. You should always change your bandage.


    Kiko and Bogart nodded. Indeed, the wounds still hurt, especially Bogarts burn. Kiko''s wound had already dried out but because it was located on his knee, it kept getting touched.


    \"You boys are quite naughty,\" Tara remarked upon entering the room. \"You should get your shots now.\"


    She brought some injections and vials. Grace helped her with the tasks. Meanwhile, Cecilia went to the doctor''s office to replenish their stocks. By then, the doctor had already left and she was all alone. She took some vials from another box and mixed them with the flu vaccines.


    \"A few this morning and some more this afternoon,\" she said to herself.


    She finished stocking the boxes and after observing that nobody had entered the room yet, she took her pager and typed \"RIGHT ON PLAN\".

 32 Healing of the Wounds

    Administering the flu shots went smoothly at Subangdaku Elementary School. Most of the kids cried when injected, especially the first up to the third graders. A few seemed to have allergic reactions as they experienced sneezing or shoot up of body temperature. However, a number of students had already colds and itchy nose earlier that day. Several had been sneezing on the streets and even inside the classrooms. Others were feeling weak, tired, and hot like the onset of a fever.


    By the afternoon, Jamie had been sneezing as well. His nose was beginning to get runny. His friends noticed it when boarding their bikes.


    \"Hey, Jamie,\" Tonton called his attention, \"are you alright?\"


    \"I''m not sure,\" he answered. \"I did not feel well after our fight with the thugs. I was not sick this morning. One of them must have transferred it to me.\"


    \"Yeah,\" Kiko said. \"Or one of your classmates. People had been sneezing all day. They said it is because of the meteor, but we know that it is not.\"


    \"It''s just the flu season,\" Tonton added.


    \"Thank you again, guys,\" Bogart spoke up. \"Sorry if I was not being totally open this lunch.\"


    \"I understand,\" Jamie said. \"But we are brothers now. Call us whenever you need help.\"


    \"And your enemies will be our enemies, too,\" Kiko concluded which made everyone chuckled.


    They boarded their bikes and began their ride home, their pace slow and easy since Kiko and Bogart still had difficulties with their wounds. The sun was still up, giving the afternoon a hopeful and blissful brightness.


    \"So what do we actually do now?\" Kiko asked them. \"I mean how do we investigate the real story about the alien?\"


    \"We can start by roaming around the campus,\" Jamie said after a long thought.


    \"The scientists found nothing last time,\" Bogart reasoned.


    \"That''s what they said,\" Jamie answered him. \"They could be telling the truth or not.\"


    \"If not,\" Tonton''s turn, \"then we must find out what it was.\"


    Kiko: \"How?\"


    \"If something unusual happens in the school,\" Jamie said, \"then that''s it. They would come back to the school after what they discovered in the second impact.\"


    There was a moment of silence as the three pondered on Jamie''s words. He had a strong point and that was there starting point.


    \"So let''s keep our eyes open from this moment on,\" Jamie said after a strong cough. \"Something off could happen in the school anytime soon.\"


    Once again, Jamie coughed and they all paused biking. He coughed so hard that it seemed he would spit out his esophagus.


    \"Hey, Jamie,\" Tonton worriedly said and went up to his friend and rubbed his back, \"try to relax and breathe slowly.\"


    \"Have some water,\" Bogart offered his tumbler which Jamie instantly gulped.


    \"Feeling better now?\" Kiko asked.


    \"I''m fine now,\" he answered after catching his breathe. \"My throat was really very itchy.\"


    They rested for few minutes and then resumed biking. They soon entered their village and life seemed to be back to normal again. But what was not quite normal was the small crowd gathering in a corner. A man seemed to be preaching on the sidewalk while a group of not more than ten men were listening or watching around him.


    \"Is that Mang Tomas?\" Tonton asked.


    \"I don''t think so,\" Bogart answered. \"He looks much younger.\"


    Indeed, the preacher was a younger man, somewhere in his late thirties. He was Loduvico Gaspar. Nobody was with him as he delivered his words to a half-listening crowd.


    \"He could be like Mang Tomas,\" Tonton said. \"He could see something in the future that could help us in our little investigation.\"


    \"That''s right!\" Kiko exclaimed. \"We''d better hear his speech.\"


    The Biker Brothers stopped and walked up to the crowd. They squeezed through and positioned themselves right in front of Loduvico.


    \"I am not lying,\" Loduvico said. \"I am who I am. My presence had been predicted and I am here to bring salvation to everyone....\"


    \"He is not predicting the future,\" Kiko whispered.


    Bogart: \"So what is he?\"


    Tonton: \"A prophet?\"


    \"I am not a propher, my child,\" Loduvico answered when he heard them. \"I am the promised savior.\"


    At that, the crowd laughed.


    \"So you are saying you are Jesus?\" someone


    asked mockingly.


    \"I did not say so,\" Loduvico said. \"You said so.\"


    \"But that''s what you are implying!\" another shouted back.


    \"Someone had already came ahead of me to prepare the world. He told you of the things that were about to come but you did not believe him. So why would I expect that you would believe me either.\"


    \"Is he talking about Mang Tomas?\" Kiko whispered again.


    \"Yeah,\" Jamie whispered back after some thought. \"I think he is.\"


    \"If you are the promised savior,\" someone challenged him, \"then show us some miracles.\"


    \"How faithless these people are!\" Loduvico said in exasperation.


    He scanned the crowd and most of them had a look of ridicule in their eyes. They were testing him and he was not going to back down. He sensed that two of the boys had injuries, and swiftly, he went up to them. He held both Kiko''s and Bogart''s hand and as if some powers flowed into him, he stiffened and looked up. He remained motionless for several seconds before relaxing and loosening his grip on the boys'' hands.


    \"You saw everything,\" Loduvico said in a soft tone. \"You know the truth and that''s why you got these wounds. Fear not, my children, the merciful hands of heaven will free you of the pain.\"


    A gentle wind blew and enveloped the sidewalk. A soft glow of light radiated from Loduvico''s hands. As sudden as it came, the wind and light disappeared. Mildly, he touched Bogart''s bandage. The boy resisted at first but after feeling warmth coming from his hands, he gave in. The man''s hands stayed on his injured arm for several minutes while the crowd waited impatiently.


    \"He''s a fraud,\" someone whispered. \"Nothing will happened.\"


    Feeling a little ease, Bogart rocked his arm back and forth. He felt no pain. Hurriedly, he untied the bandage with Jamie''s help. To their surprise, his burn was gone and not even a scar was left behind.


    Loduvico then knelt down and touched Kiko''s knee. He also felt warmth flowing through the man''s hands. Like Kiko, he also felt pain disappearing from the wound. When none was left, he took out the adhesive bandage, and alas, the graze was gone.


    The boys were stunned and no words left their mouth. The crowd also gasped but after an initial shock, they began doubting again.


    \"These are just kids,\" someone said. \"They could just be playing tricks to us.\"


    \"Yes, just another fraud.\"


    One by one, the people left, leaving Loduvico and the boys. For the boys, it was a true miracle. For the people, it was just another magic show to fool everyone. When the last one had left, Loduvico stooped low and gave the boys a piece of advice.


    \"Search the truth because you will not only free yourselves but the people of Subangdaku as well.\"


    The man turned around and walked without looking back, leaving the boys in uneasy wonder.

 33 Dreams

    That night, the boys could not get off from their heads what they had witnessed. Kiko and Bogart had been really healed. It was all true, they were not playing with Loduvico. Their wounds and pain vanished right after he touched them. They were speechless, even after the man left.


    \"It''s really a miracle\" was all Bogart could say. They rode home in silence as they pondered on several things. Even in their beds, disbelief and wonder still lingered in their heads. How could the man heal their wounds? Where did he get such power? What truth was he speaking about? Is it the same truth they knew?


    Kiko twisted and turned in his bed. He was sleeping and dreaming of something incredible. His dream was not related to the miracle but something more exciting. He dreamt he was running in an unfamiliar land. Around him were rolls of mountains and grasses. Leaves and petals swirled as he raced through the terrains. But it was not just a regular boy''s dash. His speed was unbelievably fast, like he was already flying. He covered places in a matter of minutes.


    \"Am I fast enough?\" he asked himself.


    Kiko knew he was only dreaming but it felt too real. He stopped running to catch his breath. In the blink of an eye, he found himself transported to another dimension. He was in a crowded marketplace and around him were different aromas of life. There were the scents of fresh flowers, decaying fruits, excreta from fowls and various animals, and human sweat. But was it really human sweat?


    Kiko robbed his eyes to see clearly his surroundings. The fruits were peculiar and he was certain he had never tasted or seen anything like them. The animals looked different, as if their heads or bodies were dislocated. But what was more interesting were the people. They had oversized heads against their narrow jaw and slender bodies. Their faces were a blur to him. More importantly, they looked familar to him.


    \"The alien,\" he gasped after realizing his thoughts.


    Just then, the people turned around and looked at him. They tilted their eyes as though wondering what kind of being he was. Panic started creeping into his heart. He stepped back when the people moved slowly toward him. He knew what he must do and summoning all his guts, he sprinted and ran away from them. He worked through a labyrinth of unknown streets and no sooner, he was in another place.


    It was night time and there seemed to be a war. The forest shone brightly as laser blasts and bombs exploded everywhere. Kiko''s heart beat a hundred times faster.


    \"What''s happening here?\" he asked himself frantically. \"Why am I caught in this mess?\"


    Kiko ran as fast as he could. He never turned turned around nor opened his eyes, in fear of the things he would see. He just ran and ran until he woke up, sweating and panting. All through the night, he was restless as he tried to sleep soundly again.


    Similarly, Bogart had a weird dream. In his dream, the school bullies attacked him again. They were in the grassland, exactly where the army camp was located. The five boys encircled him, hurling various insults.


    \"Piggy!\"


    \"Melon boy!\"


    \"Squeaky pants!\"


    Bogart was on the ground, kneeling and crying. He wanted to shut his ears but their voices persisted. Andrex lifted him up so that they were eye to eye.


    \"What now, Piggy?\" Andrex said. \"Want to wet your pants? Unfortunately, you have no friends now to back you up.\"


    The other boys laughed. He reminded himself to remain calm but it was simply too much. With all his strength, he kicked Andrex in the belly. Not satisfied yet, he pulled his arm, swung him around, and threw him as far as he could. To his surprise, Andrex was sent into the sky, his miniscule figure kept vanishing until the bright sunlight engulfed him. The other four bullies were mystified, and all at once, they attacked Bogart. He was overpowered and the boys were on top of him, punching him in various places. Mustering all his might again, he pushed them all away at once. He picked them up one by one and hurled them into the sky until the sun devoured them.


    \"Serves you right!\" Bogart hollered.


    He smiled to himself. He knew it was only a dream but it was very satisfying. He was in such blissful state when he was suddenly transported to another place.


    No, it was the same place - the grassland but at night. There were no stars in the sky. Just few meters from him was something that looked like a vehicle. It was oval-shaped and its rear end seemed to be damaged. Bogart''s eyes widened upon realizing it was the spaceship.


    Slowly, he paced towards the spaceship. It was lit inside the vehicle, and a man, or an alien, seemed to be trapped inside. The being was trying to get out as he kept punching the windshield in an attempt to break it.


    Bogart ran towards him. The alien was struggling inside, as if he was running out of life. Bogart reached for a rock and tried smashing it on the windshield but to no avail. Subconsciously, Bogart collected all his strength and focused it on his right hand. He clinched his fist and in one stroke, he broke the windshield of the spaceship. The glass was shattered into tiny pieces. The alien immediately breathed and was too weak to act.


    Impulsively, Bogart pulled him from the wreck. To his surprise, the alien had turned into a handsome man, looking like a movie star or some prince.


    \"Help me,\" he whispered while trying to breathe hard. \"No, you are in grave danger. Run!\"


    Suddenly, the alien died in Bogart''s arms, leaving him uncertain on what to do next. Minutes passed by and the alien seemed to melt in his grasp. Bogart felt disgusted and the body was reduced to a green puddle of ooze at his feet. To his surprise, the ooze moved and formed into another being. It transformed into a huge squid-like monster and pounced on Bogart. He was thrown on the ground with the monster on top of him. It was heavy but he kept punching at him. He kept doing so until he finally woke up from the bad dream. He panted hard.


    \"I won''t eat squid again,\" he whispered to himself.


    Later, Bogart laid in his bed again but he had only restless sleep through the remainder of the night. For Tonton, he dreamt of the same dream again - the alien couple, the war in the forest, and the meteor landing.


    He knew it was not really a meteor but a spaceship. He ran to the crash site which was somewhere near their school. There was woman inside. She was struggling to get out. Tonton only looked at him, fear taking most of his resolve. Slowly, the woman evaporated into the air but before she completely vanished, she wrote on the windshield the word \"Danger\". Instantly, the spaceship disappeared.


    At that, Tonton woke up from his sleep. Like his friends, he spent the rest of the night in a restless sleep. It was different for Jamie. He had no dream but he was not feeling well. He shivered constantly in his bed. Unknown to him, small red dots began appearing on his legs....

 34 Feverish Jamie

    Jamie was groggy that Tuesday morning but still he went to school. His friends saw his condition and it was apparent that he was not well.


    \"Jamie, are you okay?\" Tonton asked. \"You look tired and dazed.\"


    They had already arrived in school. While waiting for classes to start, they dallied in the corridor and chatted. They talked about their dreams and it was only Jamie who had nothing to share. They felt that their dreams were connected and it was only a matter of time before they would get the meaning. Jamie was unusually silent, only contributing a smile from time to time.


    \"Yes, dude,\" Bogart agreed. \"You don''t seem fine.\"


    \"I''m just okay,\" Jamie answered but was instantly thrown into a fit of coughing.


    \"Oh man, you are not okay,\" Kiko said. \"Your cough is worse than yesterday.\"


    \"Don''t worry, I can manage. I will not come to school tomorrow if it turns really bad.\"


    However, Jamie''s condition only worsened. By noon, he already had high fever and his throat itched. Like him, many of the students in the school also experienced coughing, colds, sneezing, and fever. After lunch, his friends took him to the clinic. By then, Jamie was too groggy and his temperature was too high that he seemed to exhale fire everytime he breathed.


    To their shock, countless children were also in the clinic with only nurse Grace tending to them. The doctor was nowhere in sight, as well as the two women who gave the flu shots yesterday. Despite the busyness, Grace was calm and systematic in assisting the kids. After twenty minutes, it was finally Jamie''s turn.


    \"What do you got there?\" Grace asked Jamie.


    \"He had been coughing since yesterday,\" Bogart answered for him with a big smile on his lips. \"But it got worse today.\"


    \"He is also feverish now, \" Kiko said, with a smile also painted in his face.\" Plus some headache.\"


    \"Uhmmm,\" Grace said. \"You don''t look good. How about these blisters? Are these new?\"


    Grace pointed to some red dots on his arms.


    \"Yes, I just got them today,\" Jamie answered. \"I think I also got some in my legs. They are very itchy.\"


    \"Let me look at them.\"


    Jamie pulled his loose pants up and to their surprise, there were more blisters in both his legs.


    \"Oh no, honey,\" Grace gasped. \"You got chickenpox.\"


    \"What?!\" Jamie exclaimed.


    \"I got it when I was grade one,\" Bogart announced. \"It''s very contagious.\"


    \"Mom said I got it when I was still four years old,\" Tonton said.


    Kiko: \"Mine was during grade two.\"


    \"That''s good,\" Grace said. \"It''s highly likely that you boys will not get infected as well.\"


    Grace gave Jamie some prescription. Since it was still hot outside, Jamie took his rest at the function hall, along with the other kids who could attend their classes because they were too sick. Some were complaining of headaches while others, like Jamie, were sleeping.


    The three other boys participated in the fire and earthquake drill that afternoon. The recent calamity had taken a toll in the mayor''s office that he ordered different drills to be conducted in the town to prepare the citizens. The boys were not really listening to the speakers.


    \"This is really weird,\" Kiko was saying. \"We got flu shots yesterday but now, several kids became sick.\"


    Tonton: \"There could be more if not for the shots.\"


    Bogart: \"Or none. Yesterday, our teachers said the flu shot was to help us prevent ailments from the meteor impact. But we knew it was not a meteor.\"


    Tonton: \"What are you trying to say? That the alien made them sick?\"


    Kiko: \"It''s possible. The alien could be bringing some disease.\"


    Tonton: \"Oh no, Jamie is in danger.\"


    Bogart: \"He''s got chickenpox. It''s not an alien disease.\"


    Kiko: \"How sure are we that it''s really chickenpox? What if it is another disease?\"


    Tonton: \"I''m really scared now.\"


    Just then, the sound system boomed and all the kids were on their feet, seeking shelter from the imagined earthquake. Quickly, the boys participated in the re-enactment.


    Meanwhile, Sonny and Estella were back to Subangdaku. Their Sunday blow-by-blow documentary was a hit that the station manager gave them a leave on Monday. Yet, they declined and instead, they used the time researching about Dr. Alvarado. Apparently, the man was an exemplary citizen. He had a degree in astrophysics and meteorology, both taken at different prestigious schools; thus, he was stationed at the nearby local weather station in the next town. He had a wife and two sons. The older was in another country with a family of his own, a successful scientist like his father. The younger was still in college, studying medicine in one of the country''s top medical universities. Wife was simply at home, assisting Dr. Alvarado in his business ventures. The couple was also a philantrophist involved in different charity institutions.


    \"The man seemed to have no bad bone in him,\" Estella commented.


    They were wandering in the streets of Subangdaku, slowly so that they could observe the subtle lives of the simple district. They smiled for the people had remained strong ang resilient.


    \"But something is not right about him,\" Sonny added. \"His statement was not believable. And up until now, his team had not yet released any further statement.\"


    \"And no pictures of the meteor,\" Estella said sternly. \"They could have at least shown the people what had hit Subangdaku. They owe that to the people.\"


    \"Yeah, it seems that they simply want the peope to forget about it.\"


    They visited Dr. Alvarado''s businesses and interviewed random people. By afternoon, they had established that he was a good man based on the testimonies. Exhausted, they stopped near a street vendor and ordered sliced unripe mangoes. They were chewing on their snacks when a woman also went near. She was coughing violently while she gave her order.


    \"Oh no, that cough sounds bad,\" the vendor remarked. \"My husband had also been experiencing the same since Sunday.\"


    \"Yes, I think I got it during the church service,\" she replied. \"Father was also coughing while giving his homily.\"


    \"Its the flu season, I think.\"


    The duo hurriedly finished their mangoes and went back inside their car.


    \"This flu-like sickness of the people could be because of the meteor,\" Estella said. \"Dr. Alvarado warned us about this possibility.\"


    \"Let''s check at the local health center,\" Sonny answered. \"We have to know how widespread it is now.\"


    Sonny was about to start the car''s engine when four bikes passed by them. Boys of about eleven or twelve were riding them. They were pedalling slowly, with one almost unsteady in his action. They stared at the boys, sensing something familiar about them.


    \"Those boys,\" Estella spoke, \"aren''t they the ones we saw in the grassland?\"


    \"I''m not sure,\" Sonny answered, \"but I think they are.\"


    \"Let''s go to them.\"


    Just as they were about to go outside, one of them fell. Instantly, his friends helped him while the crowd gathered around them. The duo hastily went to them and moved their way to get into the center. The three boys were worriedly touching and shaking their friends to wake him up while the crowd continue to look and murmur on what was the best thing to do.


    \"Is he sick?\" Estella asked them.


    The three boys looked up and widened their eyes upon seeing her. Estella could clearly see the shock and fear in their eyes. Immediately, she knelt down beside them.

 35 Outbreak in Subangdaku

    Estella moved the boy so that he was leaning on her lap. She felt Jamie''s forehead and neck. He was burning. Still in shock, the boys simply stared at her.


    \"Has he been checked?\" Estella asked. \"Has he taken medicine?\"


    \"Yes,\" Tonton answered. \"Nurse Grace from the school had taken care of him.\"


    \"That''s good. He must be dehydrated now from all this heat. Does anybody have water?\"


    \"My tumbler is still almost full,\" Bogart offered.


    He instantly opened his water bottle and gently tocuhed its lid to Jamie''s lips. His friend was startled from the coldness of the water. Immediately, he gulped the liquid and felt refreshed after. He sat up and looked around him. It was incomprehensible. He was still dazed that he only see a sea of varied vibrant colors. He blinked his eyes several times until the faces of his friends became lucid. To his surprise, there were several people around him.


    \"Boy, are you alright?\" Estella asked him.


    \"I think I am,\" Jamie answered slowly.


    \"Does your head still ached?\"


    \"It''s getting a little better now.\"


    \"I''d better bring you to your home to be safe.\"


    \"No!\" the three boys echoed.


    Jamie shook his head. He could not let his mom see him like that. She would be more worried. Estella looked at them; she really wanted to know where these boys are living.


    \"Ok, I won''t accompany you,\" Estella gave up the idea. \"But are you really sure you can all go home safely by yourselves.\"


    \"Of course,\" Bogart replied defiantly. \"We are big boys already.\"


    Estella smiled at his response. She fished out a calling card from her denim jacket and handed it out to Bogart.


    \"It''s got my contact information there,\" she instructed them. \"I want you boys to call me whenever you are in trouble. And I mean any kind of trouble.\"


    Bogart got her card and slipped it in the pocket of his polo uniform. She was smiling as she said those words. There was sincere concern and kindness in her tone. The boys nervously smiled back.


    \"Keep it properly. You can call me anytime. Just be safe always.\"


    Slowly, Estella stood up and so did the boys with Tonton helping Jamie. The crowd around them clapped their hands, as if cheering a gladiator after a long battle in an arena.


    \"Ms. Estella really has a beautiful heart, not just a face,\" a woman announced.


    \"I''m rooting for you Ms. Estella!\" a man yelled his admiration.


    \"You''re my idol!\" a lady screamed but his voice instantly broke and she coughed violently. She cleared her throat and looked at the people staring at her. \"Ooopsss, sorry.\"


    The people laughed. Others also declared their praises for Estella but like the lady, some strained their throats that they coughed hard. Estella smiled a thank you for everyone and along with Sonny, slowly went back to their car. The boys also boarded their bikes and continued their ride home.


    \"You just let them off easily,\" Sonny commented as he started the car engine and air-conditioning. It was a humid afternoon that he felt his sweat all over his body.


    \"They are just regular school boys,\" Estella answered. \"We can''t involve them in our hunt for the truth.\"


    \"What if they know something about what really happened inside the camp?\"


    \"That''s why I gave them my calling card. If they will be ready to tell us what they saw in the camp, they can easily reach us. If they got into some trouble or are being chased by people from the camp, we are just one call away.\"


    \"So you are sure it''s them?\"


    \"A hundred and ten percent. I saw it in their eyes.\"


    Sonny nodded and moved their car. He hurried as it was getting late in the afternoon already. Fortunately, the district health center was still open when they arrived. Several individuals were flocking the consultation area and near the laboratory clinic.


    \"These many people are also suffering from flu-related illnesses,\" Sonny said as they moved through the crowd, covering their mouths and nose along the way.


    They proceeded to what seemed the central office and knocked. The people in queue instantly looked at them, feeling betrayed as they had been waiting in line for quite some time already. Estella flashed her ID and smiled at the people. The door opened and they were ushered in.


    \"How could I be of help?\" the doctor asked when they entered. He was writing prescription for his patient at that moment.


    \"Doctor, is flu outbreak happening in Subangdaku right now?\" Estella went straight to the point.


    The doctor looked at her and smiled. He dismissed the patient and signaled for them to sit.


    \"Yes, it seems some diseases have spread in the district at this time,\" he said. \"People have been suffering from colds, fever, dry cough, and sore throat. Some have extreme muscle pains which they claimed was not like ordinary cramps. Some kids even contracted sore eyes and chickenpox.\"


    \"Where did all these ailments came from, Doctor?\"


    \"Nobody really knows. Some said they had not been feeling well as early as Saturday. That''s three days ago. So no wonder, so many had been infected.\"


    \"How many, Doctor?\"


    \"I don''t have an exact figure right now since we are simply district health workers here whose services are free. Since yesterday, we had been receiving patients every minute. If you visit the hospitals, it could be worse.\"


    Estella pondered on the magnitude of the doctor''s words. Nobody thought it was that bad already. It could be because those were simple sicknesses that nobody gave that much attention. But now, it was grave.


    \"Thank you, Doctor, for your time.\"


    When they went out, they were overwhelmed by the sudden increase of people. They were coughing incessantly and complained of terrible pain. Several nurses were accommodating them.


    \"Miss, why is this happening?\" a patient was asking.


    \"Has this something to do with the meteor?\" another asked.


    \"The wise Dr. Alvarado said so, right Ms. Cecilia?\" Tara, one of the attending nurses, spoke up.


    \"That''s true Ms. Tara,\" Cecilia replied with a commanding voice. \"The meteor had indeed caused all these ailments.\"


    The crowd gasped. \"Is that really true?\"


    \"It''s up to you to believe or not,\" Tara answered snobbishly. \"But all these things happened only after the meteor crash. You know what, your sicknesses might just be symptoms of much greater diseases to come.\"


    \"The meteor could be very dangerous,\" Cecilia added fuel to the fire. \"We might be facing a harder battle ahead.\"


    \"Do you have bases for what you are saying?\" Estella, unable to hold her disgust of their words, challenged them.


    Tara looked at her and raised her eyebrow before saying, \"None so far. This is just a warning from concerned individuals like us.\"


    \"There is no danger in foreseeing the future,\" Cecilia added hostilely.


    \"But you -\" Estella was about to say when one of the patients, a woman of about sixty, suddenly stood up and vomitted blood.


    There was an instant chaos. The other patients moved away, while the nurses rushed to help the old woman. Estella and Sonny was about to give assistance also but they were blocked by Cecilia and Tara and asked to leave it to them.


    Sheepishly, the duo obeyed and left the clinic. As advised by the doctor, they surveyed some of the nearby hospitals and indeed, a more depressing sight awaited them as sick people flocked around the lobby waiting to be catered.


    \"This is really an outbreak,\" Sonny whispered. \"And it is beginning to get out of hand.\"


    Unable to give any help, Estella just stared at the suffering patients....

 36 The First Death

    \"Did they recognize us?\" Bogart asked his friends when they had reached a good distance from Sonny and Estella.


    \"I''m not sure,\" Tonton answered. \"But it seems they did not. The lady was nice enough to help Jamie.\"


    \"She was really kind,\" Kiko said, \"but we still have to be careful about them.\"


    \"I''ll keep their calling card in my room,\" Bogart said. \"Just in case we need their help in the future.\"


    \"Let''s try not to,\" Kiko retorted and everyone laughed.


    \"Jamie, you better skip school tomorrow,\" Tonton suggested. \"Nurse Grace had given us your medical certificate.\"


    \"Yes, you better rest and get strong,\" Bogart said. \"Chickenpox is really troublesome. You might be absent for at least one week.\"


    Kiko: \"Take your medicine as early as you can.\"


    A meek \"Thank you, guys\" was all Jamie could answer.


    That night, Sonny and Estella delivered another exclusive news on the outbreak. Other news channels were not able to pick up the incident and so the viewers, especially the families and loved ones of patients, stay tuned to Estella''s reports. According to her, hundreds were already admitted at both public and private hospitals in Subangdaku. So far, there was no concrete explanation of what really caused the varied sicknesses and why it had spread so quickly. The meteor crash was pointed out as the main culprit but there was still no official statement. There were only countless rumors.


    Estella''s footages were heart-breaking. Since the emergency room and all of the ward rooms were full, other patients were placed along the corridors. While they were coughing violently or delirious with their fever, their guardians were crammed in a single monobloc chair or sprawled on the floor. The atmosphere was pathetic as patients struggled to catch their breaths. To avoid catching the disease, Estella wore face mask and her trademark long-sleeved denim jacket as she delivered the news.


    \"So it is really that bad now,\" Mrs. de Jesus commented.


    \"I think so, Mom,\" Jamie answered. \"Am I one of them?\"


    \"No, honey,\" she answered. \"Yours is chickenpox. It happens to all of us.\"


    Jamie smiled as his mother reached out and fondled his hair.


    \"You have to be absent for a couple of days to avoid infecting your classmates,\" his father said.


    \"Yes, Dad. My friends will take charge of informing our teachers.\"


    Indeed, Jamie was absent on Wednesday. His absence was badly felt by the Biker Brothers.


    \"How is Jamie?\" Bogart asked.


    \"I dropped by his house this morning,\" Tonton answered. \"But I was not able to see him. He was still sleeping by that time.\"


    Kiko: \"Do you think he will get well anytime soon?\"


    Tonton: \"His mother said more blisters appeared on his legs and arms last night. I don''t think he is getting better.\"


    Bogart: \"Yes, I remembered mine was really bad, too. Sores appeared even on my face. There are still some scars left in my neck.\"


    Kiko: \"Much worse for me. I got mine later than yours. It was terribly itchy. Thankfully, I had none on my face, just in my arms and back.\"


    Tonton: \"I don''t remember mine. But Mom said they were on my legs.\"


    The boys chuckled. They showed their scars and compared the sizes.


    Bogart: \"Can we visit him after school?\"


    Tonton: \"I think so. We already had chickenpox before so I guess we will be fine.\"


    The two boys grinned. Just then, the school bell rang and they went to their separate classes. Tonton was surprised to see several parents inside their classroom. They were battering Ms. Sanchez with questions and excuse letters.


    \" Ms. Sanchez,\" one mother said, \"Lizzie had not been feeling well since Sunday. After the flu shot yesterday, her fever went very high.\"


    \"My boy also experienced the same,\" a father complained. \"The shots did not help.\"


    \"As for my little Anna,\" another parent said, \"she was not sick until this morning. When she woke up, she was having difficulty breathing. I guess it''s just her asthma attack but I need to be sure so we will be visiting her doctor later this morning.\"


    Another said, \"Well, my boy has sore eyes. His eyes are really red and watery this morning. He''d better not attend classes to prevent infecting others.\"


    \"The news is all true, right? An epidemic has spread in our district?\"


    \"Are our children safe here?\"


    \"What has the principal advised about this issue?\"


    \"Oh Lord, what is happening in Subangdaku?\"


    \"Parents, please calm down,\" Ms. Sanchez addressed the worried mothers and fathers. \"All of us here will take care of your children while inside this school. Those absent today will be excused, considering they have medical certificates or that their parents have talked to me. Our school nurse will also be conducting brief check-ups with the ones present today. Those who have mild symptoms like runny nose, high temperature, and sore throat will be separated and allowed to stay in the function hall in order to prevent the spread of these sicknesses. Rest assured, parents, that your kids are in good hands.\"


    The parents began to pacify upon the assurance delivered by Ms. Sanchez. When they had all departed, Tonton went to her and explained Jamie''s condition. Anxious parents were also found in Kiko''s, Bogart''s, and all classes in Subangdaku Elementary School.


    Last night''s news also stirred worry and panic in the entire district. Those feeling the same symptoms immediately rushed to the nearest clinics and hospitals. Even without a doctor''s prescription or consultation, others bought medical stocks from the pharmacies like syrups, tablets, and ointments. For those who cannot afford medical services and remedies from private institutions, the public district health center was their only option.


    Hence, the situation in the center was much worse than the previous day. The crowd thickened, almost twice the number of people yesterday. Health workers were running to and fro to cater to as many people as possible.


    \"Folks, let''s not push one another,\" Cecilia reminded the people in her full commanding voice. \"Those who have no seats, just follow the queue. However, maintain a good distance from one another, say one meter. These sicknesses can easily be transferred from one to another.\"


    \"Don''t be hard-headed,\" Tara added in her high-pitched, uncaring, sexy voice. \"Your disobedience will cause more harm.\"


    They were attending to the whines of the crowd when an old woman suddenly went inside the area, ignoring the people in queue who immediately complained. The woman was coughing violently and by the way she swayed while going to the nurses, she was in deep pain.


    \"Help me,\" she croaked while struggling to catch her breath.


    She was reaching out for the nearest person when she suddenly tripped over. Suprised, the nearby people dispersed and looked at the woman trembling on the ground, while others from the distance began flocking around her. Two nurses came to the rescue and held her tight on the floor.


    \"Ma''am, please calm down,\" one of them said. \"Try to relax amd breathe hard.\"


    The old woman continued shaking, more forceful this time as she squeezed her throat. With one last strong tremble, the woman froze and lost consciousness.


    \"Look for pulse,\" Cecilia yelled at the two nurses.


    They searched on her hand, but at that time, she was already cold and frigid. They tried reviving her but she was already gone.


    \"She''s dead already, right?\" asked a woman patient.


    \"Looks like it,\" a man answered. \"She died because of the outbreak.\"


    \"Oh no!\" another woman said in panic and screamed.


    The people in the health center was thrown into a turmoil as the news of the outbreak''s first death scattered like wildfire in the entire district....

 37 Locking Subangdaku

    \"Time of death - 12: 43 PM,\" the doctor said and the body of the woman was immediately taken away.


    The people in the center was taken aback by what they saw. Fear and worry instantly took over their hearts upon realizing that the outbreak had finally claimed a life. Despite being a rural community, Subangdaku was efficient in delivering all sorts of news and rumors; hence, the incident did not take a long time before being known to everyone. In fact, it even reached the office of the mayor who straight away acted on the matter. He then called for a quick emergency meeting with his councilors that afternoon.


    Meanwhile, Sonny and Estella were doing a round of interviews in a private hospital when they heard about the old woman''s death. Immediately, they wrapped up their interview and went to the health center. As expected, the center was full to the brim. Countless people had already gathered in the main door. Other mediamen had also arrived earlier than them.


    \"We have to get inside,\" Estella said between her teeth.


    \"I know another way,\" Sonny answered.


    He led her to the back of the center where the fire exit door was located. He turned the knob. It was open! They smiled to each other and went inside.


    The hallway was dark and musty, typical of community health centers. They ran through the corridors and finally reached the clinic area. Despite the death of the woman earlier, there were still plenty of people. Estella''s heart ached for them, knowing that the free service of the center was their only choice because of poverty. For the poor, health insurance was not really a top priority.


    \"Tighten your mask,\" Sonny whispered. \"We don''t want to be infected as well.\"


    They adjusted their masks, and after inhaling and exhaling loudly, they braved the crowd of the disease. The two nurses they met the other day were still in the area, still giving strict orders and reprimanding the stubborn.


    \"Oh no!\" Tara exclaimed, \"Keep a good distance, old man. You should not be able to reach the persons in your front and back once you stretch your hands.\"


    \"And only one company per person,\" Cecilia barked. \"If you brought your entire family, they can wait outside the center. There are plenty of sheds outside.\"


    Again, Estella was not impressed by the way they treated the people. She disliked and mistrusted the two. Despite her feelings towards them, she went up to them, determined to find out about the outbreak''s first death.


    \"Good afternoon, ladies!\" Estella greeted them with a fake smile.


    \"Back again?\" Cecilia did not bother greeting her back; instead, she gave Estella an eyeful.


    \"I bet it''s about the old woman''s death,\" Tara butted in while raising her left eyebrow.


    \"Well, you ladies are absolutely not wrong,\" Estella answered with a smile, ignoring the humiliation she felt. \"We just wanted a few more details about the incident.\"


    Cecilia: \"Woman. Age is 69, almost 70, birthday is next month.\"


    Tara: \"No husband or children. So lonely to die alone.\"


    Estella: \"Can we see the doctor? I need the details coming straight from him.\"


    The two stared at her long and hard, shocked at how smoothly she insulted them.


    \"The doctor''s busy with important things,\" Cecilia answered coldly.


    \"Well, you can go to the conference hall,\" Tara added. \"There are also other reporters there.\"


    Cecilia: \"You can find a copy of the complete transcript of the woman''s death there.\"


    Tara: \"We also have staff inside the room to entertain your questions.\"


    Cecilia: \"Assuming she knows the answers.\"


    Tara laughed aggressively.


    \"Well, thank you,\" Estella said with a smile, still trying to hide her irritation. \"You have been both of utmost help.\"


    Hurriedly, Estella and Sonny went to the conference room. It was excruciating for Estella to be dealing with the two nurses. Several people were already inside the room when they entered. Most faces were familiar to them as they were also the same people they worked with in the news industry.


    \"Hey, I beat you with this one!\" a friend said to Estella, a big smile spanned her lips. She was Chloe, a writer from a local newspaper who was Estella''s schoolmate back in college.


    \"Just this one!\" Estella answered back and winked.


    \"Your exclusive last night was really good. That brought us all here.\"


    \"It was both a hunch and coincidence.\"


    \"That''s what I admire about you. You know by instinct where the real news is.\"


    \"And what''s happening right now could be worse than what we can imagine.\"


    \"If you are right, then the district is in big trouble.\"


    Sonny handed Estella a copy of the transcript. It was just few pages and nothing beyond what they knew was described in it. After going through the report, they discussed it with their fellow reporters in the room. Nobody knew yet what could have really caused the flu-like outbreak in Subangdaku. They could only offer wise guesses to their fellow reporters.


    Estella found a table in a corner and sat down. She took out her notebook and began taking down notes, including what her fellow reporters thought.


    \"Where should be find our next lead?\" Sonny asked while approaching her.


    \"I don''t know right now,\" she replied. \"But our local officials need to act fast.\"


    \"Yes, I agree a hundred percent. Now that somebody has died, precautionary measures must be done sooner than later.\"


    \"We can''t wait for another death.\"


    \"Guys, heads up!\" a reporter shouted out loud at the congregation. \"The mayor''s delivering another speech.\"


    \"Let''s switch on the TV,\" another said while pointing at the bulky CRT television set hanging at the wall.


    In response, the assigned staff in the room flicked the power button and Estella''a network instantly flashed. Estella smiled to herself, she could not be prouder. Sonny nudged at her elbow, feeling the same delight.


    \"We have a winner!\" Estella''s friend teased that made everyone laughed.


    The press conference was yet to begin. The mayor was still seated at his office, seemingly looking at something. He was alone on screen and his neat desk was impressive. Official logos were displayed at his background, pinned on a navy wall. The country''s flag was hanging by his side while a glass cabinet filled with plaques and books took his other side. On cue, the mayor looked at the screen and began his speech.


    \"Good after everyone, especially to the people of Subangdaku....\"


    Like his previous speech, he took a sweet time giving preliminaries. He gave a quick recollection of the events that besieged the district, clearly implying all these led to the present predicament.


    \"One tragedy over another,\" the mayor was saying. \"And now, while the district is still in the verge of recovering, an epidemic of uncertain origin or name has infected many of our people, causing them unusual fever, colds, cough, and flu. While our team of scientists are still on the process of finding out specifications about this disease, I want everyone to be safe.... \"


    He looked at the camera long and hard, as if talking to real people.


    \"I want everyone to have peace of mine. I want everyone to live unburdened. We can only achieve this if the disease will not spread and infect the healthy onces. It is with a heavy heart that I must say this - Subangdaku will be locked down.\"

 38 Quarantine Plans

    \"What?!\" Estella exclaimed in surprised.


    Like her, everyone in the room had violent reactions.


    \"Did we hear it right?\"


    \"Oh my God!\"


    \"Subangdaku is not safe anymore.\"


    \"Is it that bad?\"


    Everyone was hysterical as the mayor paused on the screen. Such had never happened in Subangdaku, not in other districts or even in the province. The mayor''s eyes became shiny as sad tears began forming.


    \"So what does locking down Subangdaku mean?\" he resumed his speech. \"In the next several days, no one leaves or enters the district. Barricades will be put up to assure this measure. No human or vehicles can pass through the barricades without an official pass? Who can secure passes?\"


    The mayor enumerated those who can get free passes from the district hall. They included vehicles carrying essential cargoes like food, medicine, and hardware supplies. People were not permitted to go in and out of the Subangdaku, except those working in other districts. They simply had to present their company or employee ID at the police manning the barricades. However, they were encouraged to simply stay at home and not to leave for work; instead, they could request their employers to be temporarily assigned in Subangdaku or bring their workload to their respective homes.


    \"We need to do this to prevent aggravating the outbreak. Everything I said had been put into a new executive order and will take effect by tomorrow and will last for one week only, unless an extension is necessarily if the cause and cure of the disease will not be discovered yet.\"


    Estella gasped, and so did her fellow reporters. One week was quite a long time for a quarantine, but may not be long enough to find the cure.


    \"We must get our passes immediately,\" Sonny whispered to which Estella nodded.


    \"I asked for understanding and cooperation from the people of Subangdaku to make these preventive measures successful,\" the mayor continued his speech. \"Aside from the new executive order, we will also be strengthening the medical services of the district.\"


    Estella nodded; yet, she believed that should have been done right from the beginning, or even before the outbreak started. Just becasue Subangdaku was a rural community, this did not mean that it had immunity from any form of calamity - natural, man-made, or even supernatural.


    \"We will be providing more facial masks, alcohol, disinfectants, and personal protective equipment to the local health center and public clinics and hospitals. There could be shortage of medical facilities and hence, we will be fast tracking the medical arcade proposed by Dr. Silverio Alvarado, head of the scientist team who investigated the meteor crash. The good doctor had been planning to convert an abandoned two-storey building near Subangdaku Elementary School into a one-stop state-of-the-art medical facility. \"


    Estella was stupefied for a while. Even Sonny could not believe what he just heard. Why did Dr. Alvarado suddenly enter the picture? Is his involvement more than what the eyes can see?


    \"The facility will have diagnostic laboratories and cater to various medical services pertaining to the pulmonary, cardiovascular, renal, and other systems of the human body. With all that had happened in Subangdaku, Dr. Alvarado had rendered his steadfast support with his outstanding knowledge and experience in the field. He had become a good friend in the process, not only to me but to all the citizens as well. With his project, we can save more people from the outbreak.\"


    The mayor paused as he shuffled and looked at the papers he was holding. He appeared to be sad and worn out. Eerie silence filled the monitor screen as people waited for him to resume his speech.


    \"What has Mr. Alvarado got to do with this drama?\" Estella asked Sonny.


    \"It really smells fishy,\" he answered. \"He has been involved right from the very beginning.\"


    \"Exactly. Dr. Alvarado covered up the discovery of the meteor crash. They hid that from the public, until we discovered what they were up to. They made alibis but they never presented any evidence.\"


    \"They remained silent until the people forgot about it.\"


    \"Forgot because they were distracted,\" Estella intervened. \"The tragedy of the meteor crash was still fresh, but another one suddenly happened.\"


    \"And in both stories, Dr. Alvarado appeared to be a savior or a hero.\"


    \"The mayor trusted him. It will not be longer before the entire community of Subangdaku will also trust him, even love or worship him.\"


    \"Yet, we still don''t believe him. Despite his actions and words, we still distrust him. Why do you think so?\"


    \"Because he lied from the start,\" Estella said with conviction. \"And he could be lying again or covering something up.\"


    Sonny could not reply. He simply nodded. The mayor gave more details about Dr. Alvarado''s medical facility. It was indeed ambitious and extravaganza, probably requiring tons of money. And with the hastening of the establishment of the facility, Dr. Alvarado would be spending plenty of cash. Just how hefty his assets were, Estella and Sonny could only guess based on the evidences they had gathered so far.


    \"Dr. Alvarado''s facility will take a long time to put up,\" the mayor continued. \"In case it is not yet finished and the outbreak had worsened, we would be establishing an isolation camp. Persons with mild symptoms will be placed in the isolation camp while both public and private clinics will only accept severe cases. In the camp, doctors and nurses will also be on standby. Everyone inside the camp will not be allowed to leave, including patients, medical personnel, and camp staff. Each patient will have separate isolation tents and contact with families and loved ones will be prohibited. Only babies and chidren twelve years old and younger will be exempted from this rule. They can bring along one to two guardians. However, their guardians will also be treated the same way and will not be allowed to leave the camp unless completely recovered.\"


    \"Oh my, that camp sounds horrible,\" Sonny said.


    \"I bet putting up camps is also Dr. Alvarado''s idea,\" Estella insinuated that made Sonny smiled.


    \"After meeting with our city councilors, we figured out that the camp must be strategically locate. It should have easy access to roads, near the most congested communities, and has wide area to accommodate several isolation tents....


    After careful deliberation, it was decided that the isolation camp will be organized at Subangdaku Elementary School.... \"

 39 A New Wave of Panic

    It felt like the mayor had dropped a bomb. Everyone in the conference room was breathless, dumbfounded by the unexpected announcement.


    \"That''s unbelievable!\" one reporter exclaimed.


    \"They can''t just do that!\" another one said.


    \"Oh no, my daughter is studying in the school.\"


    Everyone turned to her, pity and sadness were all over their faces. A friend offered her hand to console her.


    \"We already have coordinated with the Health Department,\" the mayor was saying on TV. \"They will be providing the medical tents that will be put up inside the campus. In case the number will keep on increasing, we will be forced to utilize some of the classrooms, especially those in the newer buildings. Rest assured that the rooms will be properly sanitized for the operation.\"


    Again, the mayor paused for a long time, as if thinking while giving his viewers time to absorb what he had just said. And when things sank in, the media men were both sad and infuriated.


    \"They are placing the school in danger,\" one said.


    \"It may only be the buildings that would be used,\" another agreed, \"but what if there will be mishandling of the operation?\"


    \"Even if there is none,\" Estella added, \"how sure are we that the campus is safe for the children to use again?\"


    There was a moment of silence as they all pondered on the question. By then, the mayor resumed his speech.


    \"Our health experts will be handling the entire process with utmost care,\" he said, as if answering Estella''s question. \"We will make sure that the conversion of Subangdaku Elementary School into an isolation camp will be foolproof and properly executed. We understand that the school is in the middle of the community, and hence, sound protocols will be followed and exercised.


    Even after the outbreak, the medical tents will be suitably dismantled and disposed. Sanitization will be done in the entire campus to prevent any kind of possible infection. We care about the children of Subangdaku and so we will make sure that the school they loved will be once again clean and safe.\"


    \"Do they really care?\" Chloe, Estella''s friend, spoke up. \"Had that option been fairly discussed?\"


    \"Well, that had been decided during their session meeting,\" Estella answered. \"But apparently, some decisions were hastily made.\"


    \"Or they were influenced by unseen forces,\" Sonny added.


    \"Forces who have plenty of interest in this matter.\"


    The same live feed of the mayor''s speech was also being watched in Subangdaku Elementary School. It was mid-afternoon and since most offices in the campus already had television sets, office staffs and teachers on break were able to watch it. They also shared the same mixed reactions - shock, sadness, worry, anger, and disappointment.


    \"How could they do that?\" one teacher said in dismay.


    \"They are insane!\" another exclaimed.


    \"Oh no, please don''t. Hope the authorities change their minds.\"


    \"Imagine, the classrooms we had been decorating and taking care of for so many years will become like hospital wards!\"


    \"Goodness, the amount of effort we put into them! They will all vanish in a snap.\"


    \"They will all be taken down to sanitize the rooms.\"


    \"Teachers, we need to calm down,\" the school principal addressed the people in her office. \"This is for the greater good. These are just classrooms. I understand we invested our time and dedication in beautifying its four walls. It has become like our own very house. But this is an extraordinary time. And whatever opportunity comes our way to help, let us all take it, wholeheartedly and with open minds. If this school will be able to contribute in saving lives during this outbreak, we should be happy and thankful.\"


    The teachers became quiet, slightly ashamed of how they behaved and partly proud of their school head. Yet, the panic in their hearts could not be helped. What would they do if something bad happens along the way?


    Back in the health center, the patients were also able to watch the mayor''s speech in the lobby. They were joyed that the local government responded quickly to the outbreak, especially the establishment of a new medical facility and isolation camp in the school.


    \"I hope they would also offer more free medical services,\" one patient said.


    \"I agree,\" another chimed in. \"Medicines are really very expensive.\"


    \"I''m just worried about my child. She is also having coughs like mine.\"


    \"My son as well. I think I have infected him.\"


    Worried and sad chatters went on in the lobby. Inside the conference room, tension escalated as the media men continued watching the mayor''s speech.


    \"I understand that this is a challenging time for everyone and we may encounter more difficulties ahead. That is why, I implore each one of you to cooperate and obey the rules and guidelines we are imposing. We advise everyone to continue wearing face masks and to practice physical distancing when going out of your homes. For now, refrain from kissing, hand-shaking, touching, and physically contacting people other than our immediate families. In this way, we can help prevent the transmission of the unknown disease.


    \"Likewise, I implore everyone to remain calm and not to rush into panic. All services in the district will still be available and the supply of basic goods is still plentiful. Even if the cases surge, I believe there will still be enough to nourish and maintain a healthy lifestyle for everyone. Many resorted to panic buying last week due to the meteor crash but the supply chain remained steadfast. Hence, be at peace as supplies will be adequate for everyone and your local authorities are in excellent control of the situation as of the moment.


    \"Citizens of Subangdaku, we are yet facing another difficult situation. But if we work together, we will brave through the challenges successfully....\"


    The mayor went on to enumerate and thank several offices in command of the situation and various operations. After saying\" have a pleasant afternoon, \" he went off air. The health center, school, houses, and all buildings remained quiet as people weighed the statement of the mayor. After the initial shock, they immediately went out of their houses to purchase goods. In a matter of minutes, supermarkets and grocery stores were flocked by panicky buyers.

 40 Loduvico and the Angels Voices

    Loduvico was at his home when he watched the mayor''s speech. His words pierced his heart. The sadness and pity he felt was painful, as if a thousand knives stabbed his heart again and again. He looked around the living room; it was lonely, as lonely as his aching heart.


    Life was full of hardships for Loduvico. Born to a carpenter father and a supermarket vendor mother, he grew up frequenting the streets of Subangdaku doing various jobs. At a young age, he assisted his mother selling meat and fish at the local wet market after school. During holidays, he peddled snack foods in the streets. He did not pursue high school; instead, he became his father''s helper at the construction sites most of the time. When there were no construction jobs, he worked part time as restaurant waiter, tricycle driver, and car washer. Later, he went back to the wet market as freighter of wet goods.


    It was then that he met Margarita, a vendor of fish and seafood products. Theirs was a typical love story that started with a fishy courtship. Margarita was easily pursuaded and they later decided to stay under the same roof. After a year of living together, they tied the knot via civil wedding. Months rolled but his wife was never impregnated, no matter how much they wanted to and anyhow they did so. Margarita became an unhappy wife and the tenderness they once shared were forgotten, replaced by bitter memories. Then one day, she sudddenly disappeared, leaving Loduvico confused and depressed. Nobody knew why she left, even her own parents and siblings.


    Since that day, Loduvico had been living a solitary life. There were relationships now and then, but only lasting for fleeting moments. That had been ten years ago and over time, Margarita gradually faded in his mind.


    But on that Thursday night, he saw her again. While the \"meteor\" cruised in the dark sky, as he was staring at its bright light crashing on Subangdaku, he saw her coming down from the heavens. She was as beautiful as he could remember. She was not in her mortal form; instead, she was an angel in pure white dress with matching huge white wings. She descended from the sky and taken suprise by her sudden appearance, Loduvico was transfixed until the meteor landed and caused a violent earthquake. He was thrown on the floor and lost his consciousness. She was nowhere when he woke up; yet, her sweet voice spoke again but only inside his head.


    \"Loduvico,\" she whispered.


    He was taken aback by the familiar voice.


    \"Margarita? \" he asked himself.


    \"I''m an angel.\"


    \"What?!\"


    Lovudico turned around but indeed, there was no other person in his small shack other than himself. Fear instantly paralyzed him that remained kneeling on the floor. To his surprise, tears began falling from his eyes.


    \"Don''t cry,\" the voice spoke again. \"Do not be afraid. Instead, be glad and rejoice.\"


    \"Who are you?\" he asked calmly.


    \"I am who I am.\"


    \"Why are you here?\"


    \"I am here to bring bad news. Families and cities will be torn apart. There will be hunger and devastations. Fear and hopefulness will reign in people''s hearts.\"


    \"Why are you saying this to me?\"


    \"Because we have chosen you. You are the chosen one.\"


    \"We? Margarita, isn''t it you?\"


    \"I am an angel with many voices.\"


    \"So it is not you.\"


    The angel did not answer. Loduvico stood up and roamed inside the house. He looked around; it was as empty as his heart. But at that moment, there was hope and peace rising within him.


    \"I am who I am,\" the voice spoke again. \"Go and tell them the bad news.\"


    \"Who''s them?\" he asked.


    \"The people.\"


    Loduvico became even more confused. Why did a voice inside his head talk to him, as if they were conversing? Had he gone mad?


    \"I''m going nuts,\" he said to himself. \"The earthquake must have shaken me to the core.\"


    \"Believe us,\" the voice said. \"You are the chosen one.\"


    \"No!\" Loduvico screamed hard, losing his peace, and ran around the house. When he drained all his energy, he collapsed on the couch, panting and dizzy.


    \"Go and tell them,\" the voice spoke again.


    \"What should I be telling them?\" he screamed despite his choking voice.


    \"The news.\"


    \"What news?\" he said meekly, finally surrendering to his madness.


    An unknown force took over Loduvico and he was lifted outside his house. He looked up at the sky, now dark and void of any movements. A warmth overwhelmed his entire body and in a split second, visions flashed in his mind. When it was done, Loduvico felt redeemed, as if he became a renewed human being free from sinfulness and shackles of his past. He went back inside his house and accepted the fate bestowed upon him.


    \"How will I tell them about the news?\" he asked the voice.


    \"Worry not. Words will be given to you.\"


    Loduvico nodded. He closed his eyes, letting more power get inside him and warming him further.


    \"People will not believe you. Be patient.\"


    He nodded.


    \"They will scorn you. Make fun of you. Endure.\"


    He nodded.


    \"Go. Start in the streets where the poor people are. You will give them hope.\"


    He nodded. The voices were suddenly gone. That night, Loduvico had a fitful sleep. He saw the visions again in his dreams. Most of them were disturbing, but many were also nostalgic and promising. When he woke up, all his fears and worries were gone, replaced by his willing spirit to help the people of Subangdaku. He immediately went to the market area and began preaching the news. He was spontaneuos all the time, the voices giving him the right words to say. He trusted the voices. What they said were true - people did not believe him. But he must continue what he had started. He must not give up or be discouraged. He must tell the people the news. He must persevere for their sake.


    At present, while hearing the mayor''s speech, the voices again spoke to Loduvico. He was overwhelmed with love and pity for the people. Obediently, he went out of his shack and proceeded again to the market area. He must tell them the news and offer words of hope and salvation. He must speak up....

 41 Like Jesus and John

    Lovudico took his usual spot at the market area, somewhere between the wet and dry goods, and near the public highway. Unlike usual days, the citizens of Subangdaku were flocking the marketplace. The crowd was so large that people could hardly walk because of the limited spacing. In fact, people were pushing each other in order to purchase the merchandise they needed. Though they were wearing face mask, they did not observe physical distancing. In essence, most of what the mayor had implored in the live telecast had fallen to deaf ears. In their excitement to stock up on supplies, they risked contracting and spreading the unknown disease.


    Lovudico felt so much pity for them. He climbed up a raised concrete platform in the sidewalk and began giving his sermon.


    \"People of Subangdaku,\" Loduvico said, \"I am here to tell you about the bad news and the good news. The bad news is that a devastation will sweep through the district, causing division and unbelief which will lead to so much agony, hatred, and frustration. But everything will not last forever. For those who believe, salvation will come to them.... \"


    Loduvico''s words were lost in the crowd. A few people gathered around him, especially the old and the sick. Hearing him gave them temporary relief and hope.


    \"Listen everyone, ''I am'' is finally here on Earth and you have just missed his coming, \" Mang Tomas words'' reverberated in the noisy area.


    Loduvico heard him and turned to his right where the voice originated. There was Mang Tomas in his tattered clothes standing on concrete stairs. Like him, he was also giving a speech to a small group of listeners.


    \"Beware citizens of Subangdaku,\" Mang Tomas was saying. \"The things we saw last week are just the beginning. We are yet to experience more spectacles in the coming days.\"


    \"What do you mean?\" a listener asked. \"There are more meteors to come?\"


    \"No, my child,\" Mang Tomas answered. \"More unexplainable things are yet to happen in Subangdaku.\"


    \"Oh no, please tell us that it is not true,\" begged another person from his audience.


    \"I''m afraid I cannot do that, my child,\" Mang Tomas said. \"I will speak only of the things I see.\"


    \"What are the things you see?\"


    \"The future.\"


    \"Can you speak to us in plain words? What exactly do you see?\"


    \"I cannot speak of them. Greater danger will happen if I do so.\"


    \"Please, you are scaring us.\"


    \"Fear is good, my child. It drives us to do the right things.\"


    \"But is this outbreak part of the things you see?\"


    Mang Tomas nodded, making his crowd more restless. Meanwhile, Loduvico was also tending to his own flock. By then, a few people already joined his audience, amazed at the words he was speaking and curious of what they meant. Even more stunned were the people he worked and dealt with in the marketplace.


    \"Lodie\" one acquaintance called, \"since when did you become a preacher?\"


    \"When the angel descended from heaven and spoke to me,\" he answered upon hearing the person.


    \"Why you?\" another one asked. \"You are just the son of a carpenter and of a vendor.\"


    \"I am the chosen one.\"


    They laughed, surprised at how bold he said those words. They laughed, thinking that he was only kidding the people. But when they realized he was serious, they stopped.


    \"Is this really for real?\"


    \"Real is the grief that awaits Subangdaku,\" he answered. \"Real is also the salvation that will come.\"


    \"Prove to us that it is real,\" one of them demanded.


    \"Show us a miracle,\" another one added.


    \"But he had already performed a miracle,\" one of the female vendors in the sidewalk said. \"He healed some children two days ago.\"


    \"Children? Why children? They could just be playing around!\"


    \"Yes, it is so easy to bribe little kids!\"


    The people laughed again. Loduvico was not offended; instead, he was only saddened by their faithlessness and cluelessness. His sadness stirred emotions within him, that he wanted to embrace them and take them out of their miseries.


    \"It shall be,\" Loduvico finally said, \"like you wanted.\"


    He looked around him and found an old woman. She had been listening to him since the first time he began preaching. Being old, she was inclined to believe promises said to her. So when she first heard Loduvico, she was instantly filled with hope.


    \"Woman,\" Loduvico called her and reached out his right hand, \"come here.\"


    She obeyed and went up to him. Once she was in front of him, her throat itched that she coughed hard, so hard that she went down on her knees before him. With one last cough, the woman spit blood on the pavement. Disgusted and afraid they would get infected too, the onlookers stepped back.


    \"Watch,\" Loduvico spoke in a loud voice, \"as the hands of heaven frees this woman from her sickness.\"


    Slowly, he bent down and lifted the old woman by her shoulders. As she rose, bright light shone on his hands and warmed her, while a chill wind passed by the spectators. When she had finally stood up, she felt relieved from her cough.


    \"It''s gone,\" she whispered. \"Oh no, my sickness has finally left me.\"


    She embraced Loduvico in gratitude. There were tears in her eyes. Indeed, the pain in her chest and throat that she had been feeling for days had finally gone.


    \"Believe,\" Loduvico addressed the crowd, \"and you too shall be saved.\"


    However, the crowd still had doubts. Some were amazed but most did not believe in miracles. In this modern time, miracles could not just happen.


    \"What makes you different from Mang Tomas?\" one person asked.


    \"Who is Mang Tomas?\" another asked.


    \"That man over there,\" she answered and pointed at Mang Tomas who was also preaching in the nearby crowd.


    \"Oh, that one? He had been telling about the end of the world since the meteor crash.\"


    \"He really creeps me out. He also just came out of nowhere and gave scary prophecies.\"


    The crowd began talking among themselves. Indeed, the preaching and prohecies of Mang Tomas in the streets had been heard by many already. But Loduvico?


    \"Are you also a prophet?\" a girl asked.


    \"I am who I am,\" Loduvico answered her. \"A messenger has been sent ahead of me.\"


    \"You mean Mang Tomas?\" a man asked.


    \"So you both are the modern Jesus and John the Baptist? John came first to announce the arrival of Jesus.\"


    \"You said so,\" Loduvico simply said.


    \"You two are sick!\" a man mocked.


    \"You can''t be serious with this shit!\" another shouted.


    Like before, the crowd slowly thinned as people left, still unbelieving and worried about the outbreak. While they went away, Mang Tomas inched towards Loduvico while a group of three boys rode their bikes to pass through the market area....

 42 Worsening Jamie

    When school was done, Tonton, Bogart and Kiko grouped together. Despite having classes all day, they knew about the mayor''s speech delivered that afternoon because their teachers kept talking about it. They were also excited to see Jamie so they rode their bikes at the speed of light. Upon entering the market area, Tonton had an idea he shared to his friends.


    \"Can we stop by the market and buy Jamie some fruits?\" Tonton asked them. \"Fruits are good against many sicknesses.\"


    \"I can''t agree more,\" Kiko said. \"Fruits are full of vitamins and minerals.\"


    \"We can bring him some oranges,\" Bogart added.


    \"Hey, is that Mang Tomas?\" Kiko said after seeing the old man.


    Tonton and Bogart nodded. They slowed down their biking and stopped near a fruit stand, just few feet away from Mang Tomas. By then, Mang Tomas was already face to face with Loduvico.


    \"Who is he talking to?\" Tonton asked


    \"Have you forgotten?\" Kiko replied. \"That''s the guy who healed us.\"


    \"Yes, it''s him,\" Bogart added. \"Why are they talking with each other? Do they know one another?\"


    The two just shrugged their shoulders. They parked their bikes and went to the fruit stand, just near enough to eavesdrop on the two men. However, their voices were too low that they could not hear everything. At times, they whispered to each other.


    \"....the future.... devastation....\"


    \"Make them.... faith needed....\"


    \".... won''t.... talk.... believe....\"


    \".... dangers....\"


    Whispers.


    \".... sky.... dream at night....\"


    \"An angel.... out.... good....\"


    \"Help them....\"


    The boys could not make sense of the things they heard. They gave up and started picking up oranges. They chose the big and bright ones.


    \"What could they have been talking about?\" Bogart asked.


    \"Like you, I have absolutely no idea,\" Kiko answered. \"Mang Tomas is living near your place and according to my mom, Loduvico lives near here.\"


    \"So there''s no way they are friends,\" Tonton concluded, \"assuming they not like us - always hanging out with each other.\"


    \"And even if they know each other,\" Kiko added, \"they can''t be that close. They were talking like old friends.\"


    Bogart: \"Are they conspiring something?\"


    Tonton: \"Oh no, not again. They can''t be the mean guys here.\"


    Kiko: \"We don''t know that yet.\"


    \"Hello, kids!\" a voice boomed from behind them.


    The three froze, unsure of what to do. It was a low but sweet baritone voice. Under normal circumstances, that voice would have been soothing and warm to the ears, but at that moment, it only surprised them and seized them by the feet. They dared not move, scared of who they will see behind them.


    \"Don''t be afraid.\"


    Slowly, the trio turned around and indeed, Loduvico was standing right in front of them. He was smiling and the lonely gentleness shown in his face was infectious.


    \"How are you, boys?\"


    \"We... are fine now,\" Kiko managed to say after stammering. \"Thanks to you.\"


    \"Yeah,\" Bogart chimed in. \"Thank you so much, Mister.\"


    Loduvico flashed another warm smile and the three Biker Brothers felt a little relaxed. They calmed down, as if the tension inside them vanished because of Loduvico''s presence.


    \"Go, my children, your friend is waiting for you.\"


    \"Can you heal anyone?\" Tonton asked.


    \"My child, I can free anyone from all kinds of miseries.\"


    \"How do you do that?\" It was Bogart''s turn.


    \"Because I am the chosen one. An angel sent by the heavens on that fateful night told me so.\"


    \"So you are not a prophet like Mang Tomas?\" Kiko also inquired.


    \"I am more than a prophet. I am who I am.\"


    His answer confused the kids. But with all the things that recently took place in Subangdaku, and with everything they had discovered, nothing could be impossible.


    \"Just believe. Follow your heart and do what you must.\"


    The boys nodded to Loduvico''s final advice. They boarded their bikes again and went to Jamie''s house. Fortunately, he was awake when they arrived. However, their friend was hesitant to receive them; his conditions got worse and his chickenpox had almost covered his entire body from head to foot. They persisted and after minutes of haggling, Jamie'' s mother finally convinced him to see his friends.


    \"See? I looked like a rotten strawberry!\" Jamie complained upon seeing his friends.


    Indeed, the three were shocked to see Jamie''s conditions but they were able to hide their surprise. His once flawless skin was not inundated with tiny red blisters.


    \"Don''t be so upset,\" Tonton consoled him. \"It all happened to us.\"


    \"Yeah, you will get by it,\" Bogart added.


    \"Thanks, guys,\" Jamie said. \"But I really feel bad. These red dots hurt a lot.\"


    \"Have you taken your meds?\" Kiko asked.


    \"Yeah, and it''s still terrible.\"


    The boys laughed and then took their separate comfortable spots in Jamie''s room - Bogart by the bedside table, Kiko by the window, and Tonton at Jamie''s feet on the bed.


    Tonton: \"Have you seen the news?\"


    Jamie: \"Yeah, all of it. It''s just scary that our school will be turned into an isolation camp.\"


    Bogart: \"Exactly. I don''t think I will look at our school the same way again.\"


    Kiko: \"Wow, that''s going too far. But seriously, the school will only become a quarantine or isolation camp if Dr. Alvarado''s medical clinic will not be put up soon.\"


    Jamie: \"That''s actually the funny thing. Dr. Alvarado has a say again in this thing. First the meteor crash which is actually not true, and now this - an outbreak!\"


    Bogart: \"Could the outbreak be another lie?\"


    They suddenly became silent as they analyzed the situations.


    Tonton: \"But people are already getting sick. That could not be a lie.\"


    Bogart: \"What if this outbreak is just to cover up something?\"


    Jamie: \"If that is the case, Dr. Alvarado would be a very evil person.\"


    Kiko: \"I think he is really evil. He can go that low.\"


    Jamie:\t\"Are we judging him too far?\"


    Kiko: \"We can''t blame ourselves for being biased against him. He had lied about the meteor crash and he did that right in our faces.\"


    Bogart: \"And now if his medical facility will be pushed through, he will be the hero again.\"


    Tonton: \"So what do we do now? With the restrictions brought about by the outbreak, how can we continue finding out about the missing spaceship and the alien?\"


    A moment of silence again.


    Bogart: \"Shall we abort the mission?\"


    Kiko: \"No, I don''t want to.\"


    Tonton: \"Me, either. We have come so far to turn back now.\"


    Jamie: \"Yeah, there''s no giving up now. We just have to be extra careful because of the outbreak.\"


    Bogart: \"Alright, if the school closes again, we can sneak inside and locate the possible crash site of the first spaceship.\"


    The three instantly turned to look at Bogart. Oftentimes, their friend had such wild ideas that were so good to resist.


    \"I like that idea,\" Jamie said which made the Biker Brothers laughed.


    \"But you need to get well first,\" Tonton said.


    \"The man who healed us might be able to heal you, too,\" Bogart announced.


    \"You mean Loduvico?\" Kiko asked in wonder.


    \"Yes, Loduvico or whatever his name is.\"


    The three smiled, once again amazed at their friend''s tempting idea.

 43 Silent Evils

    It was already past ten in the evening and the last few days had been exhausting for both of them, especially today. They were disgusted dealing with the sick but they had no better choice. Well, the payment was good so they had to follow orders, every word of them. For Tara, what she got from doing her assignments would enable her to buy new bags, shoes, and clothes, and possibly to travel to different cities or even countries.


    \"I would really love to get away from here,\" Tara said. \"I don''t mean I hate Subangdaku but there is nothing much to love here. I want to go somewhere fun and possess fun things.\"


    Indeed, working as a plain nurse at the district health center would not help her with her goals. So when Dr. Alvarado''s man presented her the opportunity, she was quick to grab it. She could not let the chance pass; besides, the works so far were too easy.


    For Cecilia, her motivation was different. Being a single mother to two kids, she would do everything to secure their future. Her daughter was in high school while the younger child, a naughty boy, was still in primary school. Like Tara, she was also working in the district health center and the wage as nurse was really terrible. The offer from Dr. Alvarado''s man was irresistible and though she had hesitations at the beginning, she later accepted it. Besides, she believed in Dr. Alvarado and what he had been doing would be for the greater good. Since she and Tara were not really friends in the center, just regular acquaintances, nobody would suspect their involvement.


    \"You are just being a brat,\" Cecilia told Tara.


    \"I don''t care,\" she answered Cecilia. \"I can''t look poor.\"


    \"I was hoping you would have a deeper reason for doing this but I guess it is all about yourself.\"


    \"Whatever! Watch out, you''d better get a good parking.\"


    Cecilia parked their car under an old tree. Her rickety car was the only good gift her late husband left to her. Tara went out first and after Cecilia joined her, they walked past by a few buildings before entering their destination. Cecilia buzzed the doorbell once and waited for several minutes before the door finally opened. They walked through several rooms before finally entering Dr. Alvarado''s office.


    \"Good evening, Doctor!\" the two women said.


    \"Good evening, ladies!\" Dr. Alvarado greeted back with a huge smile on his face. \"Pretty tough days but you both made it through. Congratulations for making my plans truly successful.\"


    The two smiled and their smile grew larger when Dr. Alvarado threw each one of them a fat envelope. Tara hastily opened hers and chuckled when she finally finished counting her cash.


    \"I put in some bonus,\" the doctor said. \"You really did great.\"


    \"What happens after this?\" Tara asked.


    \"Just standby. Let''s enjoy this outbreak for a while.\"


    \"It''s not exactly enjoyable, Doctor,\" Cecilia protested. \"But we will remain safe through all this chaos, right?\"


    \"Of course, Cecilia. I guarantee everyone''s safety, including your children.\"


    \"Thank you for reassuring, Doctor.\"


    \"Have some confidence in me. I have everything figured out already.\"


    \"I believe we will still be properly compensated, right?\"


    Tara''s question made Dr. Alvarado laughed hard.


    \"That''s what I like about you, Tara. You are so easy to please. For now, you can both go and have some peace of mind and plenty of rest. More exhausting days will come as this outbreak spreads.\"


    The two nurses bade farewell and happily left the office. Once the revving of their car''s engine faded, Dr. Alvarado once again took out his documents. He had been studying them before they arrived. He spread open the blueprint of his facility plans.


    The medical building would have two storeys. The reception area and different clinics for children will be on the first floor. Medical services catering mostly to adults will be on the second floor. He knew the doctors who would be renting the rooms; they were all friends and acquaintances. Even before the outbreak, he already had contacted them to make sure he would have partners. However, he truly trusted some of them, enough to include them in his secret plans.


    After the spaceship crashed in Subangdaku, his simple plans for the medical facility became more ambitious and illusive. The government had taken his alien, somewhere he did not even know. But he knew there was another spaceship from the first crash and he was positive there was another alien. What happened to the being, he had no idea but he believed it was only hiding in the district. He must find it first before the government did.


    In order to accomplish his plans, he needed some distraction and a headquarter. The original building already had a spacious basement. Initially, he had no intention of utilizing it but with the present opportunity, he would instead transform it into a secret base where he could keep the alien and perform necessary experiments on it. In order to buy him time to find the alien, the government must be busy with something. It was then the idea of an outbreak came. A meteor came and then an outbreak spread. Dr. Alvarado could not think of a better plan.


    \"One week and the facility will be finished,\" Dr. Alvarado said to himself while tracing with his finger the drawing of his facility. \"The mayor is quite easy to convince. A little cash and some reason for urgency.\"


    He laughed out loud. He could not believe his luck. Deceiving the mayor was not a difficult task; what was even more exciting was that he instantly facilitated the approval of all permits for the establishment of the medical facility. He could now quickly do everything he planned. And the knowledge from experimenting the alien and the countless possibilities afterwards thrilled him a lot.


    \"As for the little fools, they don''t have to know about all my plans,\" Dr. Alvarado said. \"But they will be involved for a little while. There are some details for which I could still use them.\"


    The doctor was still studying his notes when his telephone suddenly rang. Nobody called him at that time of the night. He hesitated on picking it up but his guts told him to do so. Reluctantly, he grabbed the phone.


    \"Hello? Who is this please?\"


    He smiled upon hearing the man behind the line. He was his eyes at the government facility which kept the alien.


    \"Any good news for me?\"


    Dr. Alvarado was tapping his fingers on the table.


    \"What? So the subject contains a new substance in it? Something not found in Earth.\"


    He began folding his documents while talking on the phone.


    \"It''s not yet known what the substance can do. But it can be fatal, right?\"


    He talked on the phone for a long time. When he was done, he was beaming with delight.


    \"The alien has a biological composition different from anything on Earth,\" he said to himself. \"And they are calling it Subangdakudium. Very interesting. So interesting that a little idea just came into my bright mind.\"


    Dr. Alvarado laughed to his heart''s content. He was indeed a very lucky man.

 44 Jamies Hysteria

    October was usually a humid month in Subangdaku, and the warm humidity was not helping Jamie. It was hot and his fever made him feel a lot hotter. The red blisters on his skin became itchier when touched by his uncontrollable sweat. He moved slowly on his bed because a slight touch on his skin magnified the pain and heat.


    Since Bogart opened up the idea, Jamie could not take it out from his head. It was just simple - go to Loduvico, let him touch his skin, and he would be healed. But it was not as easy as that. He had blisters from head to toe, so where would Loduvico exactly touch him? Secondly, he was on house quarantine. His mother specifically told him to stay indoors. Going out could result to two consequences - him spreading chickenpox, or him becoming infected with the unknown disease. Either way, Jamie would be in trouble. So he must really stay home. Lastly, Jamie was partly afraid. What if Loduvico was using some sort of withcraft tricks to do the healing? Worse, what if he was using black magic? Or summoning the spirits of the dead? Loduvico could not do such act if he had no powers. Not knowing what it was scared Jamie.


    He was in this state of hysteria when sleepiness finally visited him. Minutes after closing his eyes, he instantly dreamed. In his dream, Jamie was lying on a sidewalk. He was feverish and his entire body was covered with red blisters and boils. Much like his present condition but worse and more pathetic. He felt itch and pain at the same time. He sat up and looked at his legs and arms. To his surprise, he was also covered with dirt and filth, as if he did not bathe for several days or weeks. He smelled like cow dung. Horrified, Jamie cried so hard that he did not hear the footsteps approaching him.


    "My child, fear not," the voice said. "Salvation is coming to you."


    Jamie looked up but he was only blinded by a bright light. The light slowly dimmed as large hands closed in on him. The hands touched his face and warmth flowed through him. He felt relieved as pain gradually vanished from his body. He relaxed and closed his eyes. It was soothing and as he relished the moment, the hands that touched his face slowly withdrew. Feeling the cold air, he opened his eyes. It was already night.


    And to his wonder, he was also somewhere else that looked like a marketplace. He wondered around the deserted streets and stalls. It was nothing like the market area of Subangdaku.


    Jamie was confused. He knew he was only in a dream but why was he someplace he did not know. Usually, one dreamed only of places and events familiar to him. Yet, everything about the place was new - the brick-laden streets, the canvass stalls, the surrounding stone buildings, and even the purplish black sky.


    "What is this place?" he asked himself.


    He continued roaming around and explored the empty streets. Suddenly, he heard footsteps running towards him. Panicky, he looked for a place to hide and immediately took cover behind a large tent. He peeped through a big hole in the canvass. There were three people outside and they stopped right in front of his tent. They looked around and sniffed through the air.


    "Where is it?" one of them spoke.


    "It''s somewhere here. I can smell him."


    Jamie studied the men who did not exactly look like regular men. They did not even look like humans. Their head was too large for their long, slender bodies. They actually looked like aliens.


    "Oh goodness," he whispered. "Are they the same alien that landed in Subangdaku? Am I in their planet?"


    He was still guessing things when the door of his tent was violently opened wide, exposing him. His eyes widened in terror.


    "There you are," one said. "You are not going anywhere."


    Jamie screamed and kicked the hands that were about to touch him. He crawled his way and managed to escape them. However, they ran after him until he reached a dead end. He groped around but there was nothing on the cul de sac but only brick walls. The aliens closed in on him. He continued fumbling on the wall.


    "It''s the end for you."


    Disheartened, Jamie gave up trying. The aliens were slowly inching towards him when he felt his arms getting heavy. He looked at his arms and surprisingly, they had turned into brick. The aliens were also in similar wonder. One of them suddenly pranced at Jamie but with one big swing of his right arm, the alien was instantly knocked down. The two jumped at him and he was overpowered. He wiggled but they were restraining him tightly. All of a sudden, one of them bit him in the arm. It attempted to bury its teeth but his brick arm just crumbled with the force. Jamie screamed.


    He yelled and trembled until light appeared above him. It was already daytime, and he was back in Subangdaku. He looked at his right arm but it was still intact - no bites, not even a scratch.


    "This is crazy," Jamie whispered. "Such a crazy dream. Is this the same dream that Tonton had?"


    He looked around him and he was in school, except for several silver tents on the open ground. There were people everywhere - nurses and doctors in uniform, patients and their guardians, and volunteers bringing food and supplies. They were oblivious to his presence, as if he was invisible. He went inside one of the tents and to his horror, Kiko was lying in the bunk, screaming in pain. Nurses were gathered around him, tending to his medical needs. Scared, he went outside.


    "It felt too real," he said and began weeping.


    He went to another tent and saw Bogart. His friend was also in similar agony. He looked inside more tents and saw Tonton, Mr. Lucero, Mang Tomas, and other people in Subangdaku he knew. It was a depressing sight as the people he cared for were groaning in suffering.


    "Please, stop this dream," Jamie cried and fell on the floor.


    He could not look again at the things happening around him. Their pleas were excruciating to hear. He could not bear them all. Jamie was still crying, his head over his bended knees, when some hands shook his shoulders.


    "Stop crying now. We need you."


    Jamie wiped his eyes and looked up to the speaking voice. To his greater horror, Dr. Alvarado was smiling down at him.

 45 Insomnia

    Jamie could not believe his eyes. Why was he facing eye to eye with the devil? Terror and disgust overwhelmed his spirit.


    "You need to be strong," Dr. Alvarado was saying to him. "We need you to make the cure."


    "What do you mean?"


    "You are patient zero and you survived. You have the cure."


    "No!" Jamie screamed.


    He pushed away Dr. Alvarado''s arms violently and tried to run away. However, there were men in white around him and he was kept, or imprisoned, inside what looked like a closed cell. Its walls were painted with silver. There were no openings except for a small white door.


    Jamie ran around the room but not one of the men chased him. They simply let him run until all his energies were exhausted.


    "Please, let me go," he pleaded.


    Dr. Alvarado just shook his head, his evil smile still lingering on his face. Jamie slammed himself on the wall and kept punching at it while wailing loudly. Two men grabbed him and dragged him back to the middle of the room. Jamie felt a slight heaviness in his arms and when he looked at them, they had turned into concrete painted silver, just like the walls of the room.


    "What''s happening to my arms?" he whispered.


    "Interesting," Dr. Alvarado said. "There is something intriguing you can do with your hands. Let''s see what''s inside them. "


    The two men seized him again but Jamie resisted. They pulled him hard while he screamed and shouted. He yelled and yelled until Jamie finally roused from his sleep. His blanket, bed sheet, and clothes were soaked with sweat. His body ached as some blisters exploded when he shuddered in his sleep. He struggled catching his breath and despite forcing himself, he was not able to sleep again until early morning.


    Meanwhile, Tonton could also hardly sleep that night. It had been several days already since his last dream so he did not think his visions would come back again. But that night, he had those dreams again; this time, they happened in Subangdaku.


    He was outside their house. His bike was all cleaned up, ready to take him to school. Jamie was sick so Tonton would have to start their ride. He would fetch Kiko, then Bogart, and then the three of them would go to school together. That had been their daily routine but without Jamie of course.


    Tonton boarded his bike and slowly began riding. He wore a face mask as advised by the government. It was a fine morning, except for the people who were out in the streets, coughing and writhing on the ground in pain. The sight was more than just scary, it was frightening and dreadful.


    "Why are they outside?" he asked himself. "Are there no hospitals?"


    He entered Kiko''s street and the same thing was happening. One woman was even hugging his barely breathing child. To his surprise, Kiko could not go out. He was in bed and terribly sick that he could hardly get out of bed. He hurried to Bogart''s house and he was in similar condition - bed-ridden because of extreme body pain and high fever.


    He went alone to school but the campus was already transformed into a quarantine area. Silver medical tents were put up on the open ground. Medical professionals were all over the place, tending to the countless number of sick people.


    "Is this what''s going to happen to Subangdaku?"


    Tonton felt a heavy sadness in his heart. He knew it was only a dream but the misery was all to real to ignore. Cries of agony could be heard all over the campus. He could not bear the sounds anymore so he covered his ears with his hands and shut his eyes.


    The eerie cries soon ebbed and when Tonton opened his eyes, he was lying on what looked like a hospital bed. His arms and legs were tied to the siderails. He shook his body but the knot did not loosen up.


    He lifted his head as high as he could possibly do. He looked at his surroundings. To his wonder, he was not inside a hospital but in an abandoned building. The room''s walls were painted white, but over time, they were covered with dust, dirt, and cobwebs. Birds were also inside the room and dried leaves were hanging on the webs.


    "Why am I here?" Tonton whispered. "What is this place?"


    The room was wide and there only two metallic doors, both on the longest wall and each on the opposite ends of that wall. He was in the middle of the room and it would take a great amount of effort to reach either of the doors. Suddenly, one of the doors opened forcibly, its loud bang echoing in the dreary room. Tonton went back lying on the bed as he heard footstep hurriedly walking towards him. He closed his eyes and pretended to sleep.


    "I bet you are now up, little man," an old man''s voice said.


    It was a familiar voice. Tonton''s heart beat wildly, especially upon realizing that the man must have seen him moving. In few seconds, the man was right beside him, holding his arm. He turned his head sideways and he was staring directly at Dr. Alvarado, a wide smile spanning his lips. He shrieked.


    Tonton immediately woke up from his sleep. He was scared and sweating hard. His nightmare had taken a face in the person of Dr. Alvarado. Tonton tried to doze again but he only had a restless sleep throughout the remainder of the night.


    In another house somewhere in Subangdaku, a child was also having trouble sleeping due to bad dreams. The child screamed in sleep and immediately, the mother came to rescue. Like Jamie and Tonton, the child was also not at peace, and so was the mother.


    In the old haunted house in Subangdaku, something evil was forming. It was only as small as a fat larva moth. But it kept growing as it fed something on the air. It was a chilly creepy night and so the larva opened up its mouth to nourish itself. It wriggled and rolled, enjoying its food from the night....

 46 Second Death

    The sun rose brilliantly on Subangdaku. Anyone would have thought it would be a great day but unfortunately, it was not. Health facilities in the small district were full to the brim, especially in the public hopsital. People were still suffering from extreme cough, fever, colds, and muscle pains. There was still no clear explanation about the incident, except for the theory that an unfamiliar substance from the meteor could have caused the flu-like outbreak. Hence, the people were still fighting an unknown disease and this made them more panicky and terrified with each passing hour.


    Like other similar facilities, a certain private clinic was catering to overloaded capacity. People writhing in pain and suffering were found in its lobby. Inside the ward rooms, patients were crowded on the meager floor space. It was in one of these rooms that an elderly man had a massive attack that fine Thursday morning.


    He was sleeping soundly few minutes ago but when he woke up, he complained that he felt something like a knot of thick phlegm choking his throat. He was barely talking that time but when more nurses came to him, he felt more anxious and worried that his symptoms seemed to worsen. In a matter of seconds, he was violently shaking in his bed.


    The nurses tried to restrain him but his present plight appeared to give him more strength so that he easily knocked the hands that touched him. By and by, he began coughing hard while trembling wildly in bed. With one last cough, he vomitted blood and phlegm on the floor. He opened his mouth wide to suck in air but he immediately lost breath. Instantly, he collapsed on his bed, cold and frigid.


    One patient screamed despite her broken voice. The other patients also joined in as more nurses and doctors rushed to the scene. The man''s primary doctor looked for a pulse and finding none, he shook his head. They did all means to revive him but only failed. By 7:52 AM, the old man was declared dead.


    "Another death from the outbreak," one of the nurses said under her breath.


    "Yes, the second one," her colleague answered.


    "Will I also die?" their patient asked.


    They looked at him, pity and sadness in their eyes. They could not give any assurance, particularly that it was an onerous time for the citizens of the district. The news about the new death spread rapidly throughout Subangdaku, sending everyone to a heightened state of panic and fear. In the local district health center, the situation was no less challenging.


    "Please observe physical distancing," Cecilia was barking at the people in the lobby. "And your mask, wear them properly."


    "Miss Nurse, have you heard the latest news?" someone asked. "There was a new death just an hour ago."


    "Well, we should not be surprised," she answered. "More can die from this outbreak."


    "Please don''t scare us. No one should die anymore."


    "We are fighting an unknown enemy," Tara interjected. "We don''t know yet this thing from the meteor."


    "So we will just get sick and sick?"


    "Probably. It will never stop until there is a cure."


    A sick woman cried. Already, life was hard for her, and this outbreak made life even more oppressive.


    "So I will just wait for death to come," she said.


    "Well, the government and Dr. Alvarado are working hard to discover what this disease is and how it can be cured," Cecilia said and raised an eyebrow at the woman. "Don''t be so negative."


    "I don''t think I can survive," she said dejectedly.


    "Well, good luck."


    However, the second death did not reach the newspapers as it happened after printing was done. Sonny heard about it though and while waiting for Estella to come out of her apartment, he opened the newspaper and began reading. Their black company vehicle had been like a second home to him and thus, he enjoyed having his coffee, reading the news, and having meals inside it. He scanned for the news about the recent death and indeed, it was still not in it.


    "I guess we''ll just have to drop by the clinic first and cover the news," he said to himself.


    He skimmed the newspaper''s contents and found something intriguing. It said that experts found out that the composition of the meteor was not exactly the same as any substance on Earth. It was something novel and unique. Arbitrarily called as Subangdakudium, the new substance offered infinitesimal possibilities.


    Sonny checked the paper and it was a tabloid type known for publishing unverified news, controversial commentaries, and overdone editorials. He went back reading the news feature, curious about the entirety of its contents.


    According to the undisclosed writer, what was more concerning was the unknown disease caused by the substance. Because of its unfamiliarity, usual medicines to treat the fever, cough, and other simple sicknesses associated with the outbreak might not work at all. The writer called the disease as Falling Star Plague. The spread of illnesses might also not end sooner as the meteor crash could left countless dust suspended in Subangdaku. Eventhough there would be no local transmission from one person to another, anyone who inhaled the dust could be contacted with the disease. Moreover, he urged the local government to respond quickly like putting up more medical facilities and research laboratories for the new substance.


    Sonny was blown by what he had just read. It was more like an opinion column than a news article. The theories were supported by some scientific explanations which impressed him a little bit. But as a whole, it sounded more like a fiction than a worthy news. For Sonny, it was the possible repercussions that worried him. The claims in the paper were not simple; they were actually worrisome and horrifying. What if they were all true? How would the readers handle such information?


    "This writer is kind of irresponsible," Sonny whispered.


    The passenger door suddenly opened. Estella hopped in and arranged her stuffs.


    "You looked shaken," she remarked upon seeing Sonny''s face.


    "I really am," he answered. "You need to see this."


    He handed her the newspaper and watched her face changed from being beaming to serious and then confused....

 47 Silverio Alvarado Medical Suites

    For Dr. Alvarado, his mood was was sunshiny as the morning. Everything went smoothly as planned. The discovery of Subangdakudium from the alien being was a big bonus. They said that a little knowledge could be dangerous and he would prove that true. He could use the discovery in pursuing everything he planned. A little modification and it would be perfect. He was in an ecstatic dreamy state of mind when his telephone suddenly rang.


    "Hello? O, Mister Mayor, this is a surprise! What can I do for you?"


    The smile on his lips widened. The mayor did not just call anyone on early morning. There could be an emergency that needed his expertise or even just his opinion.


    "I have not yet checked the morning''s news.... Uh uh? A new substance?"


    A faint laugh escaped his lips. He was getting excited with what the mayor wanted to share. He listened intently to every word he said.


    "So there is an urgent need to start the facility?"


    "Alright, and maybe then we can do some research in the facility. We really need to learn as much as we can about this substance as soon as possible."


    He was drumming his fingers on the table. He was fond of such habit, especially if he was thrilled of a new idea.


    " What? There is another death? Oh my God, this is unbelievable. This substance could really be very deadly. "


    The drumming went faster and louder. Everything had worked to his advantage.


    "Oh yes, I really understand. The outbreak must be stopped soonest. We can''t let it kill more people in Subangdaku."


    The mayor was talking incessantly on the other line. He was frantic and tense. Dr. Alvarado could sense he was under pressure to stop the outbreak. After a long conversation, the mayor began to relax and think clearly. But that time, the telephone felt hot on his ears.


    "Thank you, Dear Mayor, for the assurances," Dr. Alvarado finally spoke again. "I will work on this matter right away. I will inform your office of any developments."


    He put down the telephone and exhaled. He was right - it was an urgent call to speed up the construction of the medical facility. It was very pressing that the mayor''s office would facilitate approval of all necessary permits. Dr. Alvarado spent the next hour calling several people - the construction team, the designers, and some close colleagues he would be working with once the facility became operational.


    He was exhausted after the calls, thanks to old age, but his day had just began. His mind was weighing different ideas and this made him more energetic. After his work in the desk was done, he went out of his office. He felt like visiting the location of his soon-to-rise facility.


    He drove in silence as several ideas kept running in his head. He parked by the side and sprinted towards the old abandoned building. A number of engineers had already visited the site and decided that it was still serviceable. Most of the concrete works were still strong and durable. He just had to do some renovations to turn the abandoned commercial center into a medical facility.


    He stared at the building from a distance. Originally, the facility would house clinics only and with a secret laboratory in the basement. But with the discovery of Subangdakudium, the children''s clinic supposedly in the first floor would now be disregarded. Instead, diagnostic laboratories and selected clinics for adult medical needs would occupy it. On the second floor, a research laboratory would be put up, just like the mayor requested. That was the bargain for fast tracking the construction.


    He was fine with that. Dr. Alvarado did not care about how the two floors of the building would be utilized. It was the secret laboratory at the basement he was more concerned and exhilarated.


    "Silverio Alvarado Medical Suites," he whispered. "That''s your name, baby."


    He went back to his car and looked at the newspaper on the passenger seat. That part was not difficult - publishing a fake news feature packed with exaggerated science and hoax. Indeed, a little knowledge was dangerous. He knew the right people and one call to his mule at the tabloid newspaper was all it took. In the succeeding hours and days, all citizens of Subangdaku would be hiding in fear and plead relentlessly to the mayor for help and cure.


    Cecilia and Tara had already done the first phase of the plan - to create an outbreak. He provided them with shots containing different viruses. It was the flu season and the early sicknesses the people experienced were natural. But to create chaos and urgency, a greater proportion of the population must be infected. With the mayor''s approval and some flu shots mixed with contaminated shots, the nurses infected some children who later infected their loved ones and so on.


    Dr. Alvarado smiled again, elated that his plans were all executed successfully. The people believed that there was really an outbreak and the mayor wanted him to create the cure or vaccine in the earliest possible time. Hence, the medical facility needed to be altered to please the mayor.


    "Don''t worry, Dear Mayor, we will create a vaccine for this outbreak," he said to himself.


    He laughed out hard. With more ideas grilling inside his head, Dr. Alvarado started his car and burned the road.

 48 I Dont Wanna Miss a Thing

    It must have been three in the morning when Jamie was able to sleep soundly again. His dreams were frightening and worrisome at the same time, that whenever he tried to sleep, the images kept popping in his head. He just twisted and turned in his bed for hours, waiting until exhaustion took its toll. And when it finally did, the morning stars had already taken their positions in the bleak sky while the roosters prepped for the day.


    When he woke up, it was already past eight. He was feeling groggy and there was a slight ache in his head. He massaged it a little, hoping the pain would abate.


    "What a headache," he whispered. "What a night. Why did I have such dreams?"


    He sighed, tired from waking up after a nightmarish sleep. Just then, his stomach began to grumble. In a split second, he let out a huge fart which instantly filled his room. He sighed again in satisfsction.


    "Well, I guess this headache is caused by my empty tummy," he said while picking his nose.


    He was very careful touching his nose because of the large blister near the tip. In fact, he was in worse shape than yesterday. The sores in his face became more swollen and red. They were itchy that he was always tempted to scratch them. The ones in his arms, legs, and back were no better. They were larger and increasing each day, as if the older ones were creating children.


    Gently, he rose and went out of his bed. He was too careful not to touch his blisters, or else, they will be provoked and he would start scratching anywhere in his body.


    He went to the dining room and saw his breakfast ready. He had been eating his breakfast alone for the last few days as his parents were off early to work and he, owing to his chickenpox, was not too eager to get up and eat his meals. Well, there were some soup, hard boiled eggs, and fruits on the table. They were delectable to his eyes but his taste buds were not at their finest so he ate only a little.


    After his plate was clean, he went back to his room and changed his clothes. Again, he was too careful with his actions. He opened the curtains and went back lying on his bed. The feel of the sun''s warmth on his skin was soothing.


    He took out his walkman and put on the earphones. His favorite radio station was instantly played and upon hearing the music beat, he sang along to an Aerosmith hit.


    "I could stay awake just to hear you breaking,


    Wash your smile while you ahh ahhh..."


    He sat up and tried to match words to the lyrics. He took his comb and held it like a microphone. With each beat, he twisted his body and swang his arms like a pro singer. And then, the chorus came.


    "I don''t wanna close my eyes,


    I don''t wanna fall asleep


    ''Cause I miss you baby


    And I don''t wanna mess a thing (boom!)"


    He closed his eyes and felt the music. He relived his favorite scenes from a disaster movie where a large asteroid was supposed to hit the Earth. Bruce Willis was the main protagonist and the astronaut things in the movie were really exciting for them. They watched the movie from a pirated CD, secretly in Bogart''s room. There were fragments of the asteroid that already entered the Earth''s atmosphere and destroyed many cities and landmarks. They could not gaped at how amazing those scenes were created.


    "I don''t wanna close my eyes," Jamie sang loudly as the second chorus came.


    Carried away by the music, he tried to stand up but some sores on his legs were pressed that he suddenly jumped out of bed. He groaned in pain as Aerosmisth reached the bridge of the song. As the music faded, he crouched on the floor, yelling silent screams.


    "Holy mother, that was a pain beyond belief!"


    He looked at himself in the mirror. Horrified to see his face, he was frustrated. He was not as handsome as before. He still had that movie actor eyes, nose, and lips but his prettiness was overshadowed by the innumerable dots on his face. Once they die out, they would leave black and dark brown scars. He was fine if the scars would be on his body, but not on the face.


    "This is nightmare!" he whispered in surrender. "Would girls still like me? And wouldn''t these things hurt like hell once I began playing baseball or basketball? "


    He chuckled at himself. Had he gone crazy? For days, he had been talking to himself most of the time. Dancing and singing all by myself. Being quarantined must have caused him to go insane. He stood up and sat on his bed.


    "I love that song," he said. "And the movie as well. Seeing those heavenly bodies causing destruction was jaw-dropping...."


    And upon realizing his words, his jaw began to drop. Like in the movie, something hit Subangdaku but it was not really a meteor.


    "I don''t wanna miss a thing," he whispered.


    Quickly, he took out his pen and scrawled some notes. He recalled everything that had happened, including his dreams, and wrote them down. His notes were random but he could arrange them chronologically later. Possibly, he could make connections among several events. For now, he needed to write them down fast before he forgot about them. After almost an hour of scribbling, he looked at his notes.


    "Did I miss a thing?"


    For the next hour, he rearranged notes and made wide guesses of missing links. And once he was done, he was overwhelmed with disbelief.


    "Could this be true?" he gasped. "Have I done it right?"


    He stood up and went up to the windows. The bright sun was covering the entire district with heat and light. But if he correctly connected the dots, Subangdaku was unknowingly screwed up. In his heart, he firmly believed that they had been manipulated all the while....

 49 Alex and Grace

    The school bell rang and hurriedly, the students packed their bags and went out of their classroom. Slowly, Alexander Lucero closed his books and notes and piled them up. He arranged the planets on the solar system model and put it back on the shelf. He sighed and smiled. It was noon and it was terribly hot. The sun shone brightly early that morning and it ablazed even more by noon. He wiped a sweat or two on his forehead and picked up his things.


    Like many young adults in Subangdaku, Alex spent his entire life in the district. He was born and raised in Subangdaku, and he knew the place like the back of his palm. He also spent his childhood at Subangdaku Elementary School and so when he finished college at the nearby city, went back to his beloved Alma mater to teach science to the young kids.


    Like any child in Subangdaku, he also enjoyed every nook of the district. He used an old blue bicycle when going to and fro the school. After classes and on the way home, he went with his buddies to the grassland to catch spiders. They raised their captives until they became worthy for a derby. On weekends, they dipped on the cold waters of the nearby river, only the water was deeper and clearer back in his days.


    Despite being an outgoing kid, Alex was a diligent student. He was the class valedictorian in his primary school and continued to receive honors in high school and college. He was a bright child but what he was most interested in was science. He enjoyed anything science - botany, zoology, astronomy, and other fields of study. He liked building stuffs and research things, and share his knowledge to other kids. He was not selfish, even to a point that he was willing to share his assignments and conduct exercises for his classmates. When he entered college, he did not hesitate to take up a degree in education.


    Presently, Alex looked at his watch. It was five minutes past twelve. He placed his things inside his bag and went out of the classroom. He walked fast going to the school clinic. Nope, he was not sick. He would be seeing Grace, the school nurse, and join her for lunch.


    The two had been dating for months already. Alex was twenty-nine, four years older than Grace. It was an instant attraction. Alex was having a really bad headache one particular morning and decided to visit the school clinic for a paracetamol. It had been weeks since Mrs. Berna, the previous nurse, retired and Alex was unaware that a new one had already reported for work. So when he opened the door and saw a young beautiful lady sitting by the reception desk, he was blown away. He was speechless for a while and feeling as if his headache had gone.


    As always, Grace flashed a charming smile like she did to all visitors in the clinic. That smile and her sleepy eyes mesmerized him.


    "Hello, Sir! What can I do for you? " she asked. "By the way, I am Grace, the new school nurse."


    "Well... I''m Alex, the science teacher for the fifth and sixth graders," he stammered in response. "My head felt achy since this morning."


    "Oh, I see. Let me get you a pain reliever."


    "Well, thank you but seeing you for the first time relieved the pain quite a bit."


    Grace laughed at his words. Immediately, they hit off and Alex pursued her in the days to come. They ate together during lunch and even though Alex countlessly offered to take her home with his car, Grace refused him most of the time. She preferred riding her pink bicycle. On weekends, they saw each other and explored places outside of the district.


    Alex presently opened the clinic door and alas, Grace was waiting for him at her desk. She was all smiles upon seeing him.


    "You''re a little late," Grace teased him. "I''m starving already."


    "Well, my princess, I can''t fly away from the classroom all the way here in the blink of an eye."


    Grace let out a hearty laugh and then gave Alex a smack on the lips. He smiled, feeling lucky to have a kind, loving, and beautiful special someone. They took out their lunchboxes and began eating their food while watching TV and chatting at the same time. Just then, a news flash interrupted the commercials.


    They looked up the TV, intrigued at the breaking news. They listened intently and were suddenly taken aback. It was a brief news about the mayor''s new pronouncement. It said that because of the new death caused about by the outbreak, and while waiting for breakthroughs to come, plans of converting Subangdaku Elementary School into an isolation camp would be pursued. Medical facilities and equipment would arrive in the campus by that afternoon in order to set up the isolation tents. Classss would be postponed beginning Friday and would resume only until further notice.


    Grace''s heart beat faster with the news. What they feared for the school had finally arrived.


    "Will you be alright?" Alex asked her.


    "I think so," she whispered uncertainly.


    "I can''t help but worry about you."


    She nodded. She was also worried because she would become one of those in the frontlines. While the school remained as a quarantine area, the teachers would not be reporting for work temporarily. However, office staff would continue working, especially her as the school nurse. In the days to come, she would not only be tending to children but to any sick person who would be confined in the isolation camp. She would be continually exposed to the diseases, and she feared that, not only for herself but also to her loved ones.


    "Are you not scared?" Alex asked her again.


    "I am, but I have no other choice. I have to serve Subangdaku," she answered with a quiver in her voice.


    Alex looked her in the eyes for a long time. He then got up, went to her, and hugged her tight. She felt his warmth and affection that a tear broke loose from her eyes.


    "I won''t leave you alone during this time," he said softly. "I will be around here with you."


    "Thank you, Alex. It means a lot to me."


    "I love you, Grace. I will go to hell and back just for you."


    They untwined and finished their lunch in silence. Outside, the whir of large wheels began approaching the school....

 50 The Isolation Camp

    Several white trucks arrived at the school grounds. The team leader, donned in white overalls with transparent shield protecting his face, proceeded directly to the principal''s office and after less than thirty minutes, he went out and signaled the trucks. Immediately, the personnel in similar protective suits unloaded the paraphernalia from their respective vehicles. They performed it with precision and agility as instructed by the higher ups.


    Medical supplies, apparatus and instruments were temporarily stored in the vacant room near the principal''s office. Other personnel swiftly put up the tents. They began by erecting the metallic posts then assembling the plastic sheathings that served as walls and partitions. Portable air-conditioning units were also put in many tents. They would accommodate the medium- to high-risk patients, while the minor cases would have to stay in the non-airconditioned tents. However, patients with severe cases would only be accepted in the isolation camp if there were no more available rooms in the clinics and hospitals.


    The personnel stayed in the school premises until late that afternoon to ensure that medical tents were properly put up, apparatus and instruments were suitably in place and working, and assigned medical frontliners were correctly briefed with their respective tasks.


    Despite the activities in the school grounds, classes went on as usual as there was no advisory that classes were suspended. That raised worries from many parents. So even before the bell rang one last time that afternoon, mothers, fathers and siblings rushed to the school to fetch the children. Yet, the school was strict in following protocols that they stayed outside the school fence until the right hour. And while passing the time, they could not help but expressed themselves to one another.


    "This is making me tense," one mother protested. "Why are there classes when all these medical things are being placed? "


    "True, this is disappointing," another mother agreed. "Our children could get infected while they are doing this."


    "I took leave from work this afternoon just to get my son," a father said. "How careless can the government be?"


    "These morons could not be thinking right," another father remarked.


    While they were busy chattering, a black car approached the school guard and after an initial argument, it was permitted to go inside. With the establishment of isolation camp, going inside the campus became more strict.


    "This could just be the beginning," Estella commented. "In the days to come, visiting buildings could become more difficult."


    "I agree," Sonny responded, "especially when we are dealing with the unknown."


    Earlier that day, the duo was frustrated by how a local tabloid delivered the news update about the meteor, especially with their malicious commentaries. What was more intriguing was that they were the only news outlet who knew about it. They visited their office but the chief editor only told them that an anonymous individual gave them the news which they verified at the local office of the National Science Center.


    Estella also called the concerned office but they also told them nothing new - that there was a new substance extracted from the meteor and further details about it would be published in due time in an appropriate medium. Unknown to Estella and Sonny, and to the woman behind the line and all other inividuals in the Center, there was something going on inside their facility that only a few people know. Even Dr. Alvarado who manned the team that salvaged the alien was not thoroughly informed of the agency''s activities. Thanks to his "eyes" that fed him bits of information.


    They also visited the private clinic where the second death occurred. Since it happened early that morning, the body was already delivered to the morgue when they arrived. They talked with the doctors and nurses and gathered a few details only. With celerity learned from their experiences, they taped a report to be aired on the evening primetime news.


    After which, they shared a late lunch at a small restaurant. They were enjoying a hot soup when the breaking new appeared on TV. It was indeed a nerve-wracking news as a plan everyone feared had come to reality. Hurriedly, they finished their meal and went to the school.


    "I hope this plan would not endanger the school," Sonny presently said.


    "Not only the school but also the surrounding community," Estella added.


    Sonny spotted a vacant spot near one of the large medical trucks and immediately parked in it. They gathered their stuffs and talked with the school principal and the head of the medical team. After their brief interviews, they went to the tents, did their own inspection of the facilities, and talked with random individuals who were busy with the ground works.


    "Well, this isolation camp seemed to be perfectly in place," Sonny said.


    "There should be no mistakes on this," Estella agreed, "or else, the community suffers."


    They taped another report of their excursion. In a while, they would send the news coverages to their news chief.


    "We should get back here tomorrow and do a follow-up," Estella said as they were packing up.


    "Agree," Sonny seconded. "Once patients will be here, it will be very interesting."


    "How about Dr. Alvarado''s clinic?" Estella asked upon remembering what they saw earlier on the way to the campus. "The construction and renovation has started when we passed by the old building."


    "Alright, that will also be interesting as we have doubts about Dr. Alvarado."


    Estella smirked at his answer. They headed back to their car and on the way, the school bell rang. Immediately, the doors in the buildings opened wide and children rushed to go outside. Most were curious of the commotion on the ground and went that way, only to be stopped by the medical personnel. A cyclone fence was put up around the perimeter of the isolation camp to limit people going inside. Hence, the kids simply stared at the camp through the fence. Others, especially those who were fetched by their parents, hurriedly headed to the school and out to their waiting loved ones.


    "I hope these kids will be safe while the district is under quarantine," Estella said.


    "I really hope so," Sonny agreed.


    They entered their car and was about to head out of the school when they saw three young boys boarding their bikes.


    "Those boys again," Estella said. "I wondered what happened to their friend. He was terribly sick the last time we saw them."


    "Let''s hope he is just alright," Sonny added. "We need the truth which they knew about."


    "Silly."


    They chuckled. And even while they were going out of the campus, Estella could not help but look at the three boys....

 51 A Sneaky Plan is Born

    The three Biker Brothers were about to board their bikes when Bogart spotted the black car parked in between two medical trucks. Bogart stopped and stared at it.


    "Hey, guys!" he called his friends. "Isn''t that the reporter''s car?"


    The two looked at the direction he was pointing.


    "What is it doing here?" Tonton asked.


    "They could be covering the news about the isolation camp," Kiko answered. "This is big news."


    "It just creeps me out seeing them," Bogart said. "Our first encounter with them was not really good though last time, the woman was nice and helpful to us."


    "But we can''t just trust them," Kiko reminded his friend. "They are walking trouble."


    "Agree," Tonton seconded. "But for now, we should get going. Come on!"


    They moved their bikes and maneuvered their way through the crowded school grounds. The isolation camp occupied a huge area, forcing the children to squeeze through the remaining limited space. Even outside the campus, cars and parents were everywhere, as if there was a big festival going on in the campus or that a recognition ceremony was being conducted. After a painful amount of time, they finally entered a lonely street. They would not be coming home yet and so they hurriedly moved the pedals, eager to see their friend.


    Meanwhile, Jamie was taking a nap at their sofa. He was dazed and exhausted after spending hours writing down notes, analyzing them, and rewriting them. Some realizations really infuriated him. Adding more stress was his worsening condition. Although only a few new blisters appeared that day, the old ones grew larger and became redder. It hurt a lot, especially when the blisters were pressed. Tired, he endured the aches as he lay down in the sofa to take his rest.


    He was only twenty minutes into his nap when he heard excited knocks on the door. Lazily, he got up and opened it, and to his delight, the beaming faces of his friends greeted him.


    "Hey there," Jamie said. "I''m so glad you are all here."


    "Yeah, we miss you buddy!"


    Bogart''s words made them laugh. Jamie became conscious of his looks that he avoided direct eye contact with his friends.


    Bogart: "Sorry man, but you look like an ice cream with sprinkles."


    Tonton: "Come on, you can''t be that honest."


    The three laughed again that Jamie was embarrassed.


    Jamie: "Is it really bad?"


    Kiko: "Honestly? Yes. But that does not make us spite you or get disgusted. You are our brother no matter what."


    Tonton: "You really look funny though."


    Jamie pounced on Tonton and gave him soft punches. The other two joined and a pillow fight ensued. They only stopped when Jamie yelled in pain when a blister on his arm exploded.


    Bogart: "Lava jelly!"


    Tonton: "That''s really gross."


    They all laughed again. Jamie hurriedly cleaned himself and then joined his friends back in the sofa. They caught their breath and rested for a while.


    Tonton: "You look really sick. Not just sick but tired as well."


    Jamie: "Yeah, I slept late last night. As in really late like three in the morning."


    Kiko: "Do your sores hurt a lot?"


    Jamie: "Yes, but it is not just about these sores. I keep having bad dreams last night. Really bad that they were more like nightmares."


    Bogart: "What did you dream about?"


    Jamie: "I dreamed I was in an alien planet. I guess the same planet that Tonton dreamed before. Some faceless people chased after me so I keep running around."


    Tonton: "They sound like the same people in my dreams."


    Jamie: "I just ran and ran but they caught up with me. I felt helpless but then suddenly, when I touched a brick wall, my hands and arms turned into brick as well. With that new strength, I fought them hard but I was sort of defeated in the end."


    Bogart: "Wow, that''s like superhero power."


    Jamie: "Except that I was beaten down."


    They all chuckled.


    Kiko: "Wait a minute, I also had a similar dream several nights ago. I think that was the night after Loduvico the prophet healed us. In my dream, I was also in a weird planet. I think the same people with blurred faces chased after me but I ran very fast. Really, really fast like The Flash."


    Bogart: "Now that you have mentioned it, I also had a dream that night. But I did not have a super speed like yours, but I had an incredible strength. I felt like The Hulk - strong and wild."


    The boys boasted about their dreams. They were excited about their superpowers. They felt like heroes, and they were happy, even if it was only in their dreams.


    Jamie: "Well, my dream did not just end there. What was more terrifying was the succeeding parts."


    Kiko: "Game, tell us."


    Jamie: "After being in the alien planet, I was transported into the school. I saw what could happen if the school turns into an isolation camp. There will be sick people everywhere, including you, guys. You were all crying and suffering. Then suddenly, Dr. Alvarado appeared. "


    Bogart: "Holy crap, that''s getting really bad."


    Jamie: "Yes, it is. Some men then captured me and brought me to him. He wanted to experiment on me. He said I have the cure."


    The room became silent as the boys weighed heavily on their friend''s confession. Things were really getting intriguing and dangerous for them.


    Jamie: "Well, when I tried to escape and touched the walls in the room, my arms also turned to concrete. Sadly, I was defeated again."


    Tonton: "You know what, I think we dreamed the same thing last night."


    The three looked at him.


    Tonton: "I saw the future again, exactly like Jamie said. But it was worse. Outside the isolation camp in school, there were more people suffering. The hospitals were full that many were left in the streets, crying in agony."


    Kiko: "That''s totally scary."


    Tonton: "And while absorbing the things I saw, I was suddenly taken into an unfamiliar room. It was like a hospital room, but not like the hospital I have been to. I was strapped and while I struggled, Dr. Alvarado suprisingly appeared. I think he was experimenting on me, too."


    Bogart: "Or may be someone else."


    Tonton: "What do you mean?"


    Bogart: "Remember your first dream when the aliens crashed in here? You were having someone else''s memories. It could be the same this time, you are experiencing things through somebody else''s body."


    The three looked at him long and hard. Bogart was really more witty than they thought.


    Jamie: "I think some pieces of the puzzle have fallen into place."


    He stood up and took his notes from his room. He discussed each one to his friends, including his various theories. They also shared their ideas and after a long time talking, they had one solid conclusion - that Dr. Alvarado was behind the outbreak to cover up the truth about the aliens.


    "So what do we do now?" Kiko asked.


    "Go back to where we can find the answers," Bogart said.


    "And where is that?" Jamie''s turn to asked.


    "Where else but the school!"


    The three smiled in response. Finally, they were making good progress. Tomorrow, while the isolation camp would be busy, they would sneak into the school to validate their wild guesses....

 52 Falling Star Plague Claims More Deaths

    Before Thursday night ended, more aweful deaths happpened in Subangdaku. In one private clinic, a young woman died due to complications in childbirth. Days before her labor, she was diagnosed with mild pneumonia, but it turned acute as the days progressed. When she was about to give birth, her lungs caved in and she expired.


    In the public district hospital, two deaths were recorded - a man in his late 50s and a woman in her early 30s. Both had cancer of the lungs and in terminal conditions. When the outbreak started, conditions in the hospital became bad as doctors and nurses were occupied round the clock. With less medical attention, the two succumbed to death.


    The deaths reached the late night news program. It sent more panic and fear to the people. Estella heard about it from her news channel. So Friday morning, she set out early with Sonny to search for news.


    "So many deaths yesterday," Sonny commented. They had just departed from their office and was heading towards Subangdaku.


    "And it''s because of some meteor dust," Estella said mockingly. "What''s our itinerary for today?"


    "Well, we will visit first the clinics and hospitals where the deaths happened yesterday. After that, maybe we can take a look at Dr. Alvarado''s new clinic, and then the isolation camp."


    "Alright, that''s good. I hope we can come up with some useful information. I still have doubts about this outbreak."


    "Well, to ease your doubts, the official autopsy reports from the first two deaths came early today. You can find them inside my bag."


    Estella turned about and reached for Sonny''s bag at the backseat. She hastily scanned the documents.


    "First death is a 72-year old woman," Estella began summarizing facts. "Cause of death was diffuse pneumonia with concomitant fibrinous pleuritis, severe pulmonary edema and hints to septicemia. Woman was street vendor for more or less fifty years."


    "Life must be too hard for her," Sonny remarked.


    "Well, the second death is an 81-year old man. He has history of tuberculosis, severe anthracosis, and chronic bronchitis. Construction worker for the last forty years."


    "Wow, life is even harder for him."


    "These look like normal deaths for me."


    "Except they happened during this outbreak which everybody now calls as the Falling Star Plague."


    "Exactly. If they happened under ordinary times, they would not reach the headlines."


    "So you mean that these deaths were being sensitionalized to make the outbreak really terrifying?"


    "Or the outbreak is simply a make-believe."


    "Who would do that?"


    Estella shrugged her shoulders. She was guessing it was none other than Dr. Alvarado. Sonny also shared the same thought but they could not be too vocal about it. The man was a celebrated scientist in Subangdaku and for the people, he was some kind of a savior, especially with him putting up a new medical facility.


    The duo visited the private clinic and the public district hospital where the three deaths occurred. However, the nurses and staffs were reluctant to receive them. After giving them information sheets about the victims, they sent them away immediately. Estella kept pushing her inquiries but the people were always calculating their responses.


    "Suddenly, they evaded the media," Sonny said as they went back to their black car. "Are they scared?"


    "Probably," Estella answered. "Some media men tend to exaggerate the news, just like what the tabloid did."


    "Sometimes, it is better to be scared than to be complacent."


    "But in this outbreak, we need straight facts. People''s reluctance can cause more harm than help."


    "We can''t blame them. Fighting the unknown is scary."


    "All the more reason we need to cooperate."


    They became silent as they went inside their car. Sonny started the engine and the black car navigated through the streets of Subangdaku.


    "For the last two weeks, a lot of developments happened in the district," Sonny finally spoke.


    "Yes," Estella said, "it feels like Subangdaku is embracing changes. After the second meteor crash, plenty of people came here to study the phenomenon, including foreigners."


    "Where there are foreigners, there will also be money."


    "Look at this one," Estella said and pointed at a newly-opened convenience store. "This was an abandoned building before, but now it was rehabilitated to become a one-stop store."


    "And that one, too," Sonny pointed at an establishment. "From being simple diner, it becomes a nightclub by night."


    "Really? How did you know?"


    "Well, boys will be boys."


    Estella laughed. By then, they already entered a busy street.


    "In a way, that''s an advantage to the people in the district, " Estella said matter-of-factly. "This development opened different opportunities for them."


    "Yup, there''s plenty of job for everyone," Sonny responded. "How about Dr. Alvarado''s new medical facility?"


    "What about it?"


    "Do you think it will bring advantage to Subangdaku?"


    "Maybe, especially when all clinics and hospitals become full," Estella answered. "However, my guts tell me that some sinister secrets are being kept in the facility, something than meets the eye."


    "I''ll agree on that. Dr. Alvarado is too clean to be true."


    They entered the market street and traffic was worse than they could remember. Cars were bumper to bumper. Pedestrians in face mask were busily walking, some were carrying their packs of groceries while others were just starting gathering theirs.


    "I guess terrible traffic is the disadvantage of the recent development, " Sonny said and laughed at his words.


    While slowly moving through the traffic, the two discussed their news reports for the evening program. These included the current deaths, a tour of Dr. Alvarado''s facility, and a follow-up on the isolation camp.


    "We have plenty for tonight," Sonny remarked.


    "Yup. The isolation camp will be our greatest exclusive."


    Sonny nodded. Their car was almost leaving the marketplace area when Estella spotted the Biker Brothers roaming through the sidewalk.


    "Those boys again," Estella said. "They are complete now, though their friend still looks sick for me."


    "And why are they out in the streets? It''s class holiday."


    "Silly, they are not in their uniforms."


    Estella continued staring at the boys as they approached someone who looked like a prophet....

 53 Visiting the Healer

    Bogart was like a puppy when he woke up that Friday morning. He needed to look cute and good for him to be permitted to get out of the house. There was class holiday because of the outbreak and he needed a valid reason to go out. He rehearsed his lines to make sure he would say them right.


    "Jamie was so ill yesterday when we visited him," he murmured in his bed. "He looked so bad and down, and we believe that as his friends, we should be there by his side no matter what...."


    Once he was done practicing for like a hundred times, he went out of his room, brushed his teeth, and sat on his chair by the kitchen table. His favorites were served for breakfast.


    "Wow, these are so delicious!" he exclaimed with a huge smile on his lips and a bright sparkle in his eyes. He needed to appear adorable.


    Last night, the Biker Brothers agreed on two things. First was that they would visit the school''s isolation camp. Dr. Alvarado was the center of all the crisis and they believed that he would be in the camp once it became operational. He had to oversee things to make sure his plans went smoothly. So the boys had to confront him about their suspicions. To conceal their identities, they decided to wear black pants, black top, and black bonnets if they would raid the camp. They could not afford to commit the same mistake they did last time. Plus, the mandatory face mask would entirely make them anonymous.


    Their second agreement took so long to settle. Against Jamie''s will at the beginning, the three believed that Loduvico would be able to heal Jamie. Bogart and Kiko, being the recipient of the man''s first miracles, strongly proposed the idea. They continuously convinced Jamie, saying that when the prophet touched them, they felt power flowed through them until the pain they felt disappeared. They swore they were not lying, so after almost an hour of pestering, Jamie surrendered. Hence, their Friday itinerary was to see Loduvico first before going to the campus.


    Bogart did not tell his mother about their plan; it was a secret anyway. He simply said that Jamie needed some company so he would not feel so lonely and bored. And because they were the Biker Bothers and they were his friends, Bogart''s mother finally gave the go signal.


    Kiko was not in similar situation. His parents were already out for work so it was only with his older brother Jackson that he sought approval, and it was easy. His brothers had no qualms about the things he did as long as he promised to be careful and responsible. As agreed, Bogart would be coming to his house and together, they would meet their friends near the marketplace entrance.


    For Tonton, asking for permission was also quite challenging as it was always his friends who fetched him and not the other way around. He fumbled on his words but when he finally said them right, his mother approved easily. It was for Jamie and she had no issues about it, provided they would just stay within one of their houses and did not roam around crowded places.


    "Why do you have large backpacks?" she asked when she noticed the bulky bag he carried as he were leaving.


    "Just some stuffs," he answered hesitantly. "Well, we can''t decide what we really want to do until we are all gathered. So I bring most of my stuffs along."


    His mother gave him a knowing look but after he returned her stare with a shy smile, she waved her hands for him to go. Hurriedly, Tonton scampered before she changed her mind. He rode his bike and went next door.


    Jamie''s heart leapt upon seeing his friend through the windows of their living room. For him, it took longer than he expected for him to convince his parents.


    "You may infect your friends," his father had reminded him.


    "You are not really well, yet," his mother had argued.


    However, Jamie had already prepared answers to all possible arguments so that he answered them all flawlessly.


    "They are chickenpox survivors. They had now immunity to this sickness."


    "I may not be perfectly well yet but just staying at home, without adequate sunlight, air, and body movements, I may only become more sick."


    So after rebutting his parents'' worries, he was finally permitted to go outside. Upon seeing Tonton''s bike parked at their gate, he quickly snatched his heavy bag, bade farewell, ran up to his bike, and rode away with Tonton.


    "We must hurry," Jamie said while catching his breath.


    Tonton laughed, realizing the amount of effort his friend exerted just to convince his parents. They rode noisily as they chatted along the way. With face mask on, they could not talk normally, and for them to hear each other, they raised their voices each time they spoke.


    After a while, they saw Kiko and Bogart waiting for them by the entrance towards the marketplace area. They were panting when they arrived.


    "Good morning, guys," Kiko greeted them. "You are both out of breath."


    "We had to hurry up," Tonton explained.


    "Plus this sickness and this mask made it a lot harder for me," Jamie complained. "My lungs would explode any minute now."


    "Have a sip of this," Bogart said and offered his bottle of blue drinks.


    "What''s that?" Jamie asked.


    "An energy drink. We need loads of energy for today."


    "Is it safe for us?" Tonton asked.


    "Of course, it is the kid''s version. I bought it at the pharmacy."


    The boys chuckled. They made a quick rundown of their plan and what were inside their bags. After everyone were satisfied with the accounting, they went inside the marketplace. They proceeded to where they last saw Loduvico. To their gratefulness, he sat by his usual spot; the only difference was that there were more people now. It seemed his relentless sermons in the marketplace paid off.


    Slowly, the boys approached him. Loduvico was busy preaching to the crowd, but when he saw them, he gave them a warm smile. He was not wearing any mask.


    "Come here," he said. "I have been waiting for you."

 54 Jamie is Healed 1

    The Biker Brothers simply stared at Loduvico, dumbfounded and too frozen to move. The people looked at them in return, confused at the same time why the man knew them. For a while, only silence could be heard around them except for the vendors shouting their merchandise from the nearby stalls.


    "We have to move now," Bogart finally whispered.


    "I think so," Kiko whispered back. "Who will lead?"


    Gently, Bogart pushed Tonton forward who had no choice but to continue his steps going towards Loduvico. The three also lagged behind him.


    "Hello, Mister!" Tonton said when they were finally right in front of Loduvico.


    "A blessed day to the four of you," Loduvico replied. "I know that you will be coming back for me."


    Bogart: "Really? How?"


    Loduvico: "The voices said so. The four of you are important in all the things that are happening and will soon happen."


    Kiko: "Who told you? The voices?"


    Loduvico: "Yes, the voices speak to me."


    Tonton: "How? Do they speak with you in your dreams?"


    Loduvico: "Dreams. Visions. Prayers. Anyway they want to, they speak to me. Even right now that we are talking, the voices are whispering things in my head."


    The people gasped. Though his words were unbelievable, there was a hypnotizing force in him that drew people. It was almost irresistible and contagious that one would mock him only to be stupefied at the end.


    "I know why you are here. I know it even before you came here. The voices spoke to me and showed me."


    The four gazed at him, uncertain what to do next. Loduvico smiled at them and slowly, he lifted his right arm and reached out to Jamie.


    "Come here, my child. You have been in pain and misery. Fear not for I will give you comfort. Worry no more for I will take away your suffering."


    Uncertainly, Jamie walked towards him while the three also moved forward but kept a good distance from Loduvico. The people also inched forward, curious as to what would happen next. All the while, they were talking relentlessly.


    "Look at the boy," one said. "He must have been suffering a lot. Sores and blisters are all over his body."


    "I could not imagine the agony he is in, " another said.


    "He must have been a handsome boy. Just look at that arched nose and tantalizing eyes."


    "Pity him. This outbreak is really so bad."


    "Please don''t come so close. We are almost elbow to elbow."


    "Physical distancing please."


    "Your mask please. It''s almost falling."


    Meanwhile, Jamie was distracted from all the murmurs he heard.


    ''This is embarrassing,'' he thought.


    He closed his eyes to shut down the noise. When he opened them, Loduvico was already face to face with him. The man was kneeling on the ground on one knee.


    Loduvico: "Do you believe?"


    Jamie did not answer, unsure of what was the correct reply. In his heart, he had hesitations. He wanted to believe because he wanted to be healed and to act normally again. However, he had never experienced any miracles before, maybe except for Loduvico''s first miracle when he healed his friends. But then, he was only an observer and not the receiver.


    Loduvico: "Do you want to?"


    Jamie: "Want to what?"


    "Be healed and moved on to normal life again."


    "Yes."


    "Do you really want to?"


    "Of course."


    "How much do you want to?"


    "So much."


    "Tell me how much."


    "Like I''m gonna die?"


    Loduvico stopped and looked him straight in the eye. Slowly, he moved his face forward and spoke gently in the boy''s ear.


    "My child, you may see things that must not be spoken about," he whispered, so soft that the crowd could not hear him. "You must not tell anyone about what you may witness. They are meant to be kept secret; otherwise, a greater harm can happen."


    Jamie froze upon hearing those words. Loduvico went back to his position and slowly lifted his hands and touched the boy''s face with them. Jamie was overwhelmed with mixed emotions. He was scared because of what the man had just said, but he also felt eagerness and peace. He was excited at what he might experience. Warmth also flowed from Loduvico''s hands that he relaxed, almost to the point that he felt sleepy. A soft glow emanated from Loduvico''s hands. He was both blinded and soothed by the light that he gently closed his eyes. Once he fully closed them, his spirit soared high, as if his soul was lifted out of his body. Indeed, his spirit and body became separated.


    He saw his body surrounded by his friends and the peope. It was like watching himself from a large monitor and yet, the motions were slowed down. He had been moving a lot in his position but his visions lagged for several seconds. It was so slow that he could see how a man skillfully opened the zipper of the bag of a woman beside him and how a boy took off his mask and sneezed violently. The sneeze happened for several seconds that he could see how saliva droplets floated in air and danced around before finally dropping to the nearby people. Jamie chuckled at the things he saw.


    ''Is this what Loduvico warned me about?'' he said rhetorically.


    He looked around him and indeed, everything happened in slow motion. It was as if things moved more slowly in spirit than in body. But suddenly, everything turned dark. He kept blinking his eyes but there was only darkness that was so pitch black there was not a hint of shadow in sight.


    "Be healed, my child!"


    He heard Loduvico''s voice boomed from above him. He looked up but he could see nothing. His heart beat wildly. He panicked because his vision was then getting creepy.


    "Free yourself from suffering!"


    Again, the man''s voice echoed. It was terrifying enough that Jamie wanted to cry. He rubbed his eyes to erase tears that began to well up. Just then, a light shone from a distance. It looked like a flashlight directed downwards so that illumination was flashed down below. In the middle of the brightness, there was someone sitting. He could not make out the figure since he was far away. Though scared, he slowly went up to the light. The closer he got, the crazier his heart beat.


    He was only a few meters away when he could finally make sense of the sight. It was a woman sitting on a chair, her back to him. He appeared to be naked, save for her long flowing hair that was covering her entire body. He could only see her hair as her head was bowed down. Her hair was blonde, almost shining yellow because of the bright light.


    Jamie stopped in his tracks. He breathed hard and because it was dead silence, he heard nothing but his labored breathing. To his surprise, the woman gently moved her head, her yellow crown bobbing with each slight movement.


    "Hello," she whispered.


    Her low voice echoed in the silence.


    "Help me."


    And suddenly, a strong grip touched Jamie''s arms. He screamed in fright....

 55 Jamie is Healed 2

    Jamie jumped, surprised by the strong grip on his arms. He looked around but nobody was touching him. The woman remained in her position under the dazzling light.


    "Who are you?" he asked.


    "You do not have to know."


    Jamie resisted the urge to come near her. She was terrifying enough that he could hardly move.


    "You will know me someday."


    He did not answer. He was wondering if the woman was the same voices that Loduvico heard. It was only in his dreams, but now, the unexplainable force or entity was finally communicating to him.


    "Help me."


    Silence.


    "Help me so I can help you too."


    "From my sickness?"


    "From everything. This is only the beginning."


    "What are you talking about? Is there more to come?"


    The woman lifted his right arm and pointed something behind him. Jamie followed his finger but when he turned around, there was nothing behind him. There was only darkness like before. He was still wondering when a bright light suddenly exploded before him. Jamie shielded his eyes from the glow. When he uncovered himself, Jamie was back to Subangdaku, back to the night when the meteor or the alien hit the district.


    Maybe, it was the first crash. The meteor-like object appeared in the bleak sky and swiftly cruised through the night. As it moved, short clips of events flashed in the night. It was like watching brief films on a big dome, except those clips only lasted few seconds and randomly flashing all over the sky. Jamie''s eyes scanned those clips but could not make sense of them. They were too random. There were sick people lying on hospital beds. People crying in a ceremony. Children in Halloween costumes. Old men and women bowing to Loduvico. Dr. Alvarado and Mang Tomas facing each other. Bogart smashing a gigantic stone wall. A child crying while in his sleep. The haunted house of Subangdaku glowing with light from within. A jelly-like fish eating children in the school.


    "What are these things?"


    Jamie''s attention was caught by an unfamiliar sight. There was a girl in one video clip, much like his age. She was inside their classroom, sitting by the window and gazing outside so that her back was to him. Her hair was curly and since the sun was shining on the window, it shone like the sun itself. Her hair was golden yellow. She was about to turn her head when the meteor that traversed the night sky suddenly crashed on Jamie.


    Meanwhile, the three Biker Brothers and the spectators were transfixed on what Loduvico was doing. His hands shone brightly as he touched Jamie''s face. He stayed in that position while he uttered gibberish. Jamie was motionless as the man performed his miracle.


    "Will the boy get healed?" one spectator asked.


    "I hope so. But look at him, there are sores all over him," another said.


    "If Loduvico heals that boy, then no doubt, he is this outbreak''s savior."


    "I pray that happens, and if that really happens, I will be Loduvico''s disciple."


    The people continued murmuring as Loduvico became more intent in his miracle. When the meteor landed, Jamie was shaken and he regained consciousness. He was not yet back to reality but to the darkness. He turned around and saw the woman in her chair, still in her position.


    "What have I seen? Are they visions of what is coming to Subangdaku?"


    The woman shrugged her shoulders.


    "What?!" Jamie shouted and rushed towards her. But before he could reach her, a strong grip once again touched him by the shoulders that he could not move forward. "Let me go!"


    "Help me so I can help you."


    After those words were uttered by the woman, Jamie was thrown on the ground. When he got up, he was back to the initial scene. He saw his body motionless as Loduvico touched his face. The people were also fixed in their place, wondering what would happen.


    "Be healed!"


    Loduvico''s voice echoed. Instantly, Jamie''s body trembled. He felt it and though he resisted, an uncontrollable force shook him. He closed his eyes, simply letting the force overwhelm him.


    "Wake up and be healed!"


    Loduvico shouted one last time. Jamie felt himself lifted and after a few seconds of dizziness, he felt the warm touch of hands on his face. A hot gust of air passed by his legs. Whispers were heard everywhere. Slowly, he opened his eyes.


    The first thing he saw was the smiling face of Loduvico. He looked like an angel or something much greater. He tried moving his arms and to his surprise, there was no pain or little aches. He looked at them and most of the sores were gone, especially the new ones. He stood up and look at his legs and feet. Indeed, most of the blisters had disappeared and the only ones that remained were the dying ones and scars.


    Tears fell from Jamie''s eyes and when he looked at his friends, they were gaping their mouths in disbelief. The people''s murmurs became loud as they discussed what they had just witnessed. A child clapped his hands in wonder and no sooner, everyone clapped in unison.


    "Indeed, a miraculous prophet has come to our midst!" announced an old man.


    "We are all gonna be saved," a woman agreed.


    The crowd cheered and celebrated. Jamie went up to his friends and hugged them. He was joyed that his suffering had gone, but at the same time, he was still shocked from the things he experienced in the other dimension.


    "Thank you, Mister Loduvico," Jamie turned around and said to his healer.


    "It is my happiness to ease you of your agony," Loduvico said and flashed his warm smile again which automatically infected the people. "Anyway, just call me Lodu."


    "Long live, Lodu!" the old man declared.


    The people also shouted the same. The passersby and bystanders were intrigued by the noise of the small crowd that they also began flocking around Loduvico. Immediately, the witnesses shared the story to the curious gatherers and the news of the healing miracle spread like widefire.


    As people kept talking, Loduvico took his chance and moved away from them. The Biker Brothers also took the opportunity to slip away and silently left the crowd. In few minutes, they boarded their bikes and began their ride again. When they felt famished, they stopped by a shed, took out their lunchboxes from their bulky bags, and shared a hearty meal.


    "It was an exciting first half of the day," Bogart said after finishing his last chicken drumstick.


    "Can''t wait for what happens this afternoon," Kiko said energetically.


    "It can be more exciting," Tonton spoke and giggled.


    "Or it can be dangerous," Jamie said forebodingly.


    The three looked at their friend. Since the miracle, there was a weird and unexplainable change that happened in me. It would only be a matter of time before they would understand it.....

 56 Sneaking Adventure Begins

    After finishing their lunch and taking a short rest, the Biker Brothers decided to proceed with their next plan - to sneak into the isolation camp in the school to find answers. They were guessing that Dr. Alvarado would be in the camp since it was now accepting patients. There could also be media men around so it would be to his advantage if he was found helping in the act.


    "Dr. Alvarado loves being in the news so he should be there," Kiko said with conviction.


    "I really hope we can find some answers," Tonton expressed his doubts. "We can''t confront the man so that we can only get information by hiding somewhere and eavesdropping."


    "We will find some answers," Bogart declared. "If not about Dr. Alvarado, then something about the lost spaceship. The first one landed in the school so there should be clues somewhere."


    "Or we can get lucky and stumble upon something that can answer everything," Jamie said. "We just need to be very cautious."


    "By the way, what was it felt like being healed by Loduvico?" Tonton changed the topic. "You did not talk about it after."


    As they were riding their bikes, the three boys slowed down and looked at Jamie. He was silent, uncertain of how much he should be telling them.


    "Well, when he healed us, I felt warmth coming from him," Bogart said. "It seems like his hands had some magical power that releases light and heals everything it touches."


    "Yes, it was an uplifting feeling in the end," Kiko seconded. "But the difference was that he performed it to us a lot quicker than to Jamie. I think it was just few seconds for us, but it took minutes for Jamie. It felt like decades."


    "It must be because Jamie was in a much worse condition than you, guys," Tonton said matter-of-factly.


    "Possibly," Kiko agreed. "But what happened all that time? Did you just simply close your eyes?"


    Jamie remained silent as he calculated how much he should be telling them. It was mid-afternoon and the sun''s heat was putting much pressure to him.


    "No, a lot has happened in that short time," he finally said. "It felt like my spirit was taken out of my body and made to experience something else in another dimension."


    "Wow," Bogart gasped. "That''s like a comics story."


    "But I am telling the truth. While Loduvico was healing my physical body, my spirit was experiencing something else. I am aware about them all. I could remeber everything that happened."


    Tonton: "And what have you experienced in that other dimension?"


    "I can''t talk about them. Lodu warned me of possible consequences if I told anyone about what I saw."


    Bogart:"Oh come on, just give us some hints."


    Jamie shook his head. He could not risk the future. Only then he realized that Mang Tomas and Loduvico were also not direct with their words. They had been preaching and prophesying for quite a time now but all the while, they were not speaking in plain words. They only gave parables, allusions, and cryptic messages, but nothing specific, concrete, and clear. Like him, they must have been also warned about their visions.


    "I can''t speak anything about it."


    Tonton: "Was it really bad?"


    Jamie nodded his head and said, "It is so bad that it could give me nightmares tonight."


    Kiko: "Then it is really very bad. Sorry you have to go though it."


    Bogart: "Well, I guess we will have to keep guessing."


    Bogart laughed and the three joined him. Jamie began to relax, thankful that he was able to confide without giving so much details.


    Tonton: "Well, I may still have visions later. Or maybe any one of us."


    Bogart: "I will pass on that. I want to sleep soundly at night."


    They chuckled. By then, they were nearing the school. They rode their bikes even slower, careful not to raise any suspension from the passersby.


    Bogart: "You know what, I felt like peeing. This adventure is kind of making me scared and anxious."


    Kiko: "Thanks for saying that, I felt the same way, too."


    Jamie: "Let''s be very careful."


    They finally arrived at the school gate. The concrete fence was high and so was the gate that they could not see anything behind them. Yet, they could her voices and rustling feet from inside the campus.


    An ambulance showed up from a corner and approached the gate. Its siren was wailing loudly. Upon its arrival, the gate instantly opened and let it in. The boys were able to peek quickly through the open gate. People in protective gears were running around the camp while patients were sitting on a wheelchair or lying on beds in the open ground. The plastic walls of the isolation tents were also moving, as if some people were frantically running to and fro inside them. They looked closedly until the gate closed again.


    Bogart: "There''s a lot of people inside. That worries me."


    Jamie: "That''s why we should be extremely careful. We should not get caught."


    Kiko: "Or be infected with the sick."


    Jamie: "Let''s go."


    They moved farther away from the gate and stopped around a corner. Just few meters ahead, there was a vacant lot with nothing but overgrown grasses. There was a small hole in that part of the fence, small enough to fit small kids like them. There were also tall grasses on the other side of that fence so that the school management was unaware about it. That hole had been secretly used by the students if they wanted to cut classes and left the campus. Only the kids knew about the hole, maybe some teachers also but they did not bother themselves. Since the gate was not open for everyone, they planned to sneak through the hole to gain entry to the isolation camp.


    Tonton: "Guys, there is something I must do first."


    Bogart: "What?"


    Tonton: "I want to see that place."


    He pointed a finger to somewhere far ahead of them.


    Kiko: "What''s out there?"


    Tonton: "To the old building that will be converted into Dr. Alvarado''s medical facility."


    Bogart: "Is it there?"


    Tonton: "Yes, there is only one old abandoned building in that street. I believe it is that building."


    Jamie: "Why do you have to go there? Dr. Alvarado could not be there. His facility is still being constructed. "


    Tonton: "It is hard to explain but my guts told me to visit the place. While we were watching the school gate a while ago, something whispered to me to go there. There could also be answers right there right now."


    His friends pondered on his words. Tonton could also be right, considering that his visions and intuitions had been right before.


    Jamie:" I am going with you. The two of us can go to the old abandoned building while Kiko and Bogart can go ahead of us inside the isolation camp."


    Kiko: "Let''s just go all together, first to the old building and then back here."


    Bogart: "We will be more suspicious in that case. People will easily notice if there will be four of us instead of only two."


    Tonton: "I agree, so it would be better if I go alone then join you guys later on."


    Kiko: "That will be too dangerous for you."


    Jamie: "That''s correct. No more argument, I''m going with you while they go ahead."


    Kiko and Bogart nodded their heads, and after an initial hesitation, Tonton finally agreed.


    Jamie: "Wait for us near the school clinic. It should not take us so long before we can join you."


    Kiko: "Let''s keep our eyes wide open. The sun is still up and we can get caught easily."


    Tonton: "We will be quick."


    Bogart: "Alright, see you in a while."


    Kiko and Bogart moved ahead with the plan and turned around the corner, while Jamie and Tonton continued through the street going to the old building. It was a slight detour from their plan but it could be worth it. Meanwhile, a black media car was also heading towards the isolation camp....

 57 Is It A Miracle?

    "Sonny, stop the car," Estella requested. They were almost exiting the market area by then.


    "Why?" Sonny asked and instantly braked the car.


    "I want to see what the boys are doing here. I really could not help but wonder."


    "Maybe they are just here for some errands."


    "I don''t know but my instincts tell me to follow them."


    "Ok, I just need to park this car properly."


    Sonny moved the car and parked it along other four-wheel vehicles near the edge of the marketplace. Estella hurriedly got out while Sonny reluctantly followed. Their paces quickened, almost to the point of running, so that they would catch up with the boys. Finally, they found them.


    "Why is there a crowd?" Sonny asked upon observing a small group of people bunched around a middle age man. The boys were heading towards the man.


    "That makes me wonder also," Estella answered. "Come on, let''s find out."


    They ran across the street and joined the crowd, but at the same time, they were careful enough to maintain at least a one-meter space from other people. Estella tiptoed and moved her head, eager to watch what was happening. By then, Loduvico was already touching Jamie''s face. The news duo saw the brilliant light emanating from the man''s hands.


    "Who is that man?" Estella asked the woman beside her.


    "Huh, you don''t know him?" she answered sarcastically. "That''s Loduvico the prophet."


    "Has he been doing that for a long time?"


    "You mean the miracle healing? No..... I''m not really sure but I heard he already had healed some kids of their wounds few days ago. I was not able to witness it, that''s why I am here now. I can''t miss this one if indeed he can perform miracles. As to preaching, he had been doing it since last week."


    "Has he been a prophet or miracle worker for a long time?"


    "Oh no, Lodu is working here in the market doing different kinds of job. But when the meteor crashed in Subangdaku, he began acting differently. He began talking about some tragic future for Subangdaku. And yet, a savior will also be coming."


    "I see. He does not have any mental problems, right?"


    "Of course, none. Lodu is a good man though his life may not be perfect. His wife left him years ago. No child so he is living alone now."


    "Do you believe him?"


    "At the beginning, I had doubts. Who wouldn''t? I have known Lodu since he was a child and he was just like any ordinary person here. But suddenly, he had become a confident speaker."


    "And doing miracles as well."


    "I hope so. I would be happy if he succeeds."


    Sonny was listening to their conversation all the while, and at the same time, he was observing closely what the man was doing. The dazzling light from his hands was mesmerizing, even the incomprehensible words he kept uttering.


    With final declaration, Lodu took his hands from the boy''s face. There seemed to be a soft explosion of light from his hands that momentarily blinded everyone. An eerie silence ensued as the light slowly vanished. Quickly, the people rubbed their eyes and looked at Lodu and the boy. They gasped in disbelief. The myriad sores that covered the child had mostly gone and only the dying sores and scars were left.


    "He did it," the woman whom Estella was talking to whispered.


    Estella simply nodded. She could not believe what she had witnessed. She turned and looked at Sonny but he too was shocked. She looked around her and the people were already celebrating. They cheered and spoke praises for Loduvico. Because of their noise, curious bystanders starting joining them and listened to their stories. In no time, news of Loduvico''s miracle spread my mouth to mouth.


    Sonny pulled Estella away from the crowd and walked towards their car. They could not stay much longer, there were news they needed to cover.


    "Was it a miracle we have just seen?" Estella voiced out once they were inside the car.


    "It looks like it," Sonny answered and started the car. "But we could not just believe it right away. The man could be a great fraud."


    "They say he is a good man. Life''s hard but not a troubled person."


    "That''s not enough."


    "I know. That''s why I want to dig deeper on who he really is."


    Sonny looked at her in puzzlement.


    "Are you serious?"


    "I am. I believe what he did was newsworthy."


    "I can''t believe you fall for that act."


    "I had an odd feeling about him."


    "Instincts? Again?"


    Estella nodded and went silence, careful not to raise any argument with her partner.


    "Well, that''s up to you," Sonny said. "But for now, let''s focus on truly substantial news."


    "I agree. That miracle worker was only a small distraction and I can work on him later. For now, the outbreak and Dr. Alvarado first."


    "That''s my girl."


    They rode in silence until they finally arrived at the school. Since their management already secured a pass for every newsperson, the duo easily got through the entrance. However, Sonny struggled finding a parking space inside the campus. Doctors, nurses, patients, and families were everywhere. The sight was so much different than yesterday. Finally, Sonny spotted an empty space near the clinic and immediately, he took the spot.


    "This camp looks like a circus," he commented as he got out of the car.


    "This is worse than I expected," Estella said. "I thought only the low to medium risk patients are accepted here but from the look of this commotion, the medical personnel may not have followed the order."


    "Yes, but we can''t really blame them. Maybe they are too busy to classify people that come here."


    "That could be more dangerous. If there are worst case patients here, they could jeopardize the other patients."


    They were still talking and preparing their equipment when the clinic''s main door suddenly opened. To her disppointment, Estella saw the two nurses from the local district health center coming out of it.


    "Oh, Estella Bermudez!" Tara exclaimed. "I''m surprised to see you here."


    "So am I," Estella retorted. "Volunteering here?"


    "We are sort of relocated," Cecilia answered. "They need more nurses here."


    "How noble the two of you are."


    "Well, we''d better get going."


    Cecilia and Tara went on and entered one of the isolation tents.


    "I don''t really feel right about the two," Cecilia said when the nurses had gone a good distance.


    "They could not be bad persons," Sonny answered.


    "I hope so."


    But deep inside her, Estella had doubts about them....


    .

 58 Raiding the Medical Facilities 1

    The Biker Brothers went their separate ways - Jamie and Tonton to the old abandoned building that would be renovated to become the new Dr. Alvarado Medical Suites, while Kiko and Bogart to their school where the outbreak isolation camp was found.


    "Are you really sure about this?" Jamie asked his friend as they were riding their bikes. It had been minutes since they separated and the rooftop of the abandoned building loomed from a distance.


    "Yes," Tonton answered. "It is hard to explain but something in my guts told me to go there now."


    "Has the construction started? I did not hear it from the news."


    "I also don''t know. It''s crazy these days that we were not able to go in this part of the village."


    "I hope it remains abandoned so we can sneak around."


    Finally, they arrived at their destination but to their disappointment, several construction workers were already doing various jobs in the site. The two parked their bikes behind the bushes under a tree, several meters away from the building.


    "They won''t see us from here, right?" Tonton asked.


    "I think so. Once we escape later, I don''t think they will easily catch up with us."


    "Well, we should not get caught."


    Jamie grinned. Indeed, getting caught would be very troublesome. Slowly, they went near the building. It appeared the renovation job had just started. Most of the workers were on the first floor; only three men were on the upper floor. Except for three rooms, all doors in the lower floor were closed.


    "We should go at the back," Jamie suggested. "Hopefully, there are no people there."


    Tonton nodded. Along the way, they hid through bushes, heaps of building debris, and several construction equipment until they stealthily reached the back of the building. Fortunately, there were no people or activities at the area. The two sighed in relief.


    They entered through a broken door, its hinge at the top was the only thing that held it on the jamb. It created an eerie creak when they opened it. Once inside, cobwebs and creepy crawlied waited the two friends. Thankfully, it was daytime that the building''s interior was not as creepy as it was supposed to be.


    "What are we exactly looking for here?" Jamie asked.


    "I honestly don''t know," Tonton replied.


    They looked at each other in silence and then suddenly laughed. Having no exact plan was the ultimate adventure.


    "What are your instincts telling you now?"


    "Nothing for now."


    They laughed once again, so hard that Jamie leaned his hands heavily on a beam. His action rocked the ceiling joists that dusts, sands, and crawlies fell on them. Alarmed, they stared at each other and to their surprise, they were covered in so much dirt that they looked like Halloween ghosts. They laughed out even louder and rolled in the ground.


    "We are going crazy," Jamie said.


    "Yeah, I think we are," Tonton said. "We have gone nuts. Like in my dream, I felt like I was in a mental hospital. They strapped me in bed while Dr. Alvarado is doing some experiment."


    "That must have felt so traumatic."


    "Yes, it was. I don''t want to have that dream again."


    They walked farther inside the building. They were too careful in their treads so as not to create noise. Most of the men were just few meters away from them with only one wall separating them. When they reached the end of the building, Jamie noticed narrow concrete stairs leading downwards. It was not obvious because of the piles of wooden debris on top of them.


    "Tonton, see this one."


    His friend hurried to him and looked at what he was pointing. Tonton stepped back and feeling a chilly wind passed by him, he hugged himself. He shuddered once and looked hard at his friend.


    "There is something down there, " Tonton said.


    Tonton went to the stairs and pushed aside a wide sheet of plywood, revealing a wide gap that led downstairs. There were cobwebs spanning the gap and it was dark inside.


    "Are we going down there?" Jamie asked.


    "Yes," Tonton answered. "Some force is pulling me to go downstairs."


    "It looks scary."


    "But it''s just fine. We have to go down."


    Jamie swallowed a lump in his throat and reluctantly followed Tonton. They bowed low and entered the gap. They continued descending until they reached the last flight. It was darker inside since the only illumination was coming from the small overhead windows.


    Clearly, they were in the basement area. They could see the line of the ground on many windows. Grasses and rocks had covered some window panes. When their eyes entirely adjusted to the dimness, only then they realized that the basement area was so huge. It seemed that only one room occupied the entire place. It was so spacious that they could not see the end of the walls.


    "What is this secret place?" Jamie wondered. "It is very big."


    "It''s really large," Tonton agreed.


    They looked around them but Tonton suddenly froze when he noticed a narrow bed near a wall. It had a small mattress covered with unwashed linen sheets.


    Suddenly, Tonton closed his ears with his hands and squatted on the ground. He was terrified as his dream momentarily flashed inside his head. He was reminded that he had been used as laboratory mouse by Dr. Alvarado and his men.


    Jamie quickly went to him and helped him up. He could fell Tonton''s tremors as he touched him. He let his friend breathed some air and once he relaxed, Jamie sensed the fear and panic in Tonton.


    "What happened?" he asked.


    "I was suddenly reminded of my dream, and I realized that this place was where I was being experimented by Dr. Alvarado."


    "And if Bogart''s theory was right, then you are not actually the specimen. You were just made to experience what had happened to it."


    "Or what will happen. Your visions spoke of what lies ahead."


    "Does it mean that Dr. Alvarado is doing something to the aliens?"


    "Possibly, they could be doing some tests to them."


    "What a clever person! Where do you think he could be doing the experiments."


    "Here. Maybe this place will be turned into a secret experimental laboratory."


    "If that is the case, then he has not yet found the first alien."


    Tonton nooded. Now, they were closer to the truth. They would be racing against Dr. Alvarado to find the alien.


    Their reverie was suddenly disturbed by some footsteps coming from the stairs. Immediately, Jamie and Tonton ran and hid themselves behind a big old cabinet. They should not be caught now.....

 59 Raiding the Medical Facilities 2

    After waving goodbye, Kiko and Bogart immediately moved their bikes and went to their secret entrance. Many kids knew about that hole in the fence but since it was located in a wide empty lot and was covered by overgrown weeds, it was not noticed by the teachers and passersby, even by the residents in that street. Since it was a crucial time, the two were carefully riding their bikes. By and by, they arrived at the abandoned lot. Cautiously, they hid their bikes behind some bushes.


    "Are you ready?" Kiko asked.


    "Scared but I am ready," Bogart answered. "But where do we place our backpacks? Mine is really heavy. It has plenty of food."


    "Well, I don''t know either. We forgot to include that in our plans."


    The two laughed. It was still mid-afternoon and their black outfit was not helpful in dissipating the heat.


    "You can leave your bag here," Kiko suggested. "I''ll bring mine because it''s lighter."


    "Okay," Bogart said. "Hope the ants would not eat up the food."


    They laughed again. Carefully, Bogart hang his bag on his bike''s handlebars. They took out their black bonnets and wore them. If not for their children''s bodies and their printed face masks, Batman for Kiko and Teletubbies for Bogart, they could pass as bank robbers or petty thieves.


    "How do I look like?" Bogart asked naughtily.


    "Like a crazy funny cow?" Kiko answered.


    "Is there something like that?"


    "Maybe just you."


    The boys chuckled. Despite their mischief, they were frightened of what they would do. Yet, they made a resolve to find out the truth.


    Hastily, they ran to the location of the hole. They pushed aside the grasses until a hole at the base of the fence was uncovered. It was small enough to fit an average eleven-year old kid. Kiko went in first and did so with ease. Once he was on the other side, he peeped through the grasses and seeing no imminent danger, he cleared some of the grasses. Bogart threw Kiko''s bag on the hole, afterwhich he squeezed himself through the hole. It was a struggle as Bogart was larger than average kids. His protruding belly and stout limbs made the struggle even harder. And yet, after minutes of difficulty, he was finally able to get through.


    "Oh man, am I that big?" he asked while gasping for air.


    "You don''t have to ask," Kiko answered sarcastically. "It''s obvious."


    Bogart suddenly jumped on him and embraced him tight while rolling on the grasses. Kiko laughed hard as he grappled his friend''s arms. When they were finally exhausted, Bogart released Kiko and they lay flat on the ground, tired and panting.


    "That was strong," Kiko said. "You can easily take out Andrex and his gang with that."


    "You really think so? I guess my superpowers are true."


    They chuckled. After cleaning themselves up, they became serious again and went back to business.


    "What do we do now?" Bogart inquired.


    "We will go near the clinic and wait for Jamie and Tonton. That''s what we agreed."


    "Where exactly on the clinic?"


    "There was no specific spot, just near the clinic. Besides, the clinic is small and we can easily find each other."


    Bogart nodded and with Kiko''s cue, they went to the direction of the clinic. But before reaching it, they had to pass by open grounds which was now occupied by the isolation camp. To their surprise, the camp was crowded with people, unlike yesterday which was so lonely. Now, doctors and nurses were running to and fro, attending to panicky patients and their snappy guardians.


    "This place is really busier than it looked outside," Bogart commented.


    "It is," Kiko agreed. "We must not attract any attention or we will get caught."


    "Look at our silly outfits. They will certainly catch people''s attention."


    "Let''s try not to.... We estimated it wrong. We wore black because we thought it would be nightfall before we could enter."


    "But then we came too early." Bogart let out a loud laugh.


    "Shhh.... Don''t be too loud."


    Kiko pulled him to the side and hid behind a huge mango tree.


    "Let''s be careful," Kiko reminded him to which Bogart nodded. "We have to pass by the side of the tents since there are no people there. We should not wander off to the middle or they will see us."


    Kiko took the lead and Bogart followed. They were careful with each of their steps. Just a small noise and people might notice them. Upon reaching the first tent, they heard loud groaning from inside it, as if the patient was crying in pain.


    "I''m getting scary now," Bogart whispered. "It''s creepy to hear his cry."


    "Then don''t listen," Kiko said. "We can''t be distracted."


    They also heard the same groans on the second and third tents.


    "Please help me," the patient in the next tent spoke loudly.


    The two stopped in their tracks. They looked at the tent, shocked and frightened. They waited for the person to speak again but it did not. Suddenly, the patient threw itself strongly on the tent that its canvass wall bowed and swayed. The two jumped in surprise and losing balance, Bogart fell on the ground. Reflexively, Kiko sprinted forward, following the direction they agreed upon. In panic, Bogart quickly stood up and ran without realizing that he was heading to the middle of the camp.


    Bogart tripped on a cord and fell on the ground again. When he looked up, people were just walking in front of him, unmindful of his presence. He stood up with shaking legs while his heart was beating wildly. He took a few steps backward but again, he stumbled and landed inside one of the tents.


    His head lay flat on the ground. He felt dizzy that he decided to lie still, his gaze focused on the white canvass roof of the tent. At first, he thought he was only imagining but he heard something like a low growl near his head. He listened but it became louder with each passing second. To his horror, a hand firmly grabbed him by the shoulder. He immediately rolled and turned around, and instantly, he was face-to-face with an old man. His thick wrinkles were all over his face and they waved and stretched as he coughed violently. He was lying on ground, writhing in pain, while behind him, a bed was toppled over. He must have fallen moments ago.


    However, it was a horrifying experience for Bogart that he shrieked loudly. Hurriedly, he got up and went out of the tent but to his greater horror, several people were already gathered around the tent. He froze and stared back at the people. Realizing he was in big trouble, Bogart dashed away from the crowd.


    "Get that child!" a male voice ordered.


    Bogart did not dare look back as he ran and ran, intent on escaping the isolation camp. He just needed to get away from the tents and the people. He could find his friend later.


    Meawhile, Kiko heard his friend''s scream. He assumed that he was just right behind him when they were startled earlier. He stopped and based on the location of the scream, they were separated real bad. From his unfortunate estimates, Bogart could be on the other side of the camp.....

 60 The Golden Pieces 1

    Jamie and Tonton kept silent as they hid behind the old rickety shelf. They did not dare move a muscle, in fear that a slight movement can create a detectible sound.


    "Can you still hear the footsteps?" Tonton asked nervously.


    Jamie shook his head. But then, the footsteps continued and echoed even louder. The boys stiffened in their hiding spot.


    "It''s getting nearer," Tonton said.


    "I know," Jamie replied. "So we''d better stay put."


    They closed their mouths with their hands and listened carefully.


    "Is there anybody here?" a male voice asked.


    More voices were heard from upstairs.


    "Wait a minute," the man said. "I heard some noise here. Must be some stray cats. I''ll check it first, then I''ll come up."


    The boys heard him very clearly. Their fright intensified. The foosteps were now very close, as though the man had already entered the room. He kicked some planks and pulled aside debris. In the silence, the clanking was eerily defeaning.


    "It must be the cats then," he said and sighed.


    Hurriedly, the man went out of the basement and up the stairs. As the sound of his footsteps receded, the boys began to relax.


    "I think we can go now," Jamie whispered and Tonton nodded.


    They breathed hard once they were out of the shelf. The place was dusty and musty but the air of freedom cheered them.


    "I really thought we are done here," Tonton voiced out.


    "So did I," Jamie answered. "Thank God there are plenty of stray cats here."


    They surveyed the entire area of the basement. It was indeed wide enough that plenty of activities could be done there or additional clinics or rooms could be put up. The boys decided to go opposite directions, and then searched every corner and nook, looking for the unknown, as if answers would just magically arrive.


    Tonton finally reached the other end of the building and when he turned around, he did not see Jamie. The semi-darkness, cobwebs, and the place''s overall ambience added extra feeling of dread in him. For one last time, he searched for anything odd among the heap of debris. Thankfully, there were no rats in the basement.


    He was about to leave his spot when he saw something glittering atop a piece of plywood. It was resting there among some pebbles and balls of webs. Despite the minimal lighting inside the area, the object was brilliantly sparkling. He rubbed his eyes and blinked, uncertain of what he saw. But each time he did that, the object seemed to glow even brighter. It was mesmerizing and unconsciously, Tonton was hypnotized by it.


    While in this state of trance, Tonton suddenly recalled his dream. In an instant, the place suddenly brightened. The walls became clean and polished. Yet, it was bare except for what looked like a hospital bed in the center. Though there were no people, he could hear cries inside his head. Then it finally dawned on him. This place would become a research facility, not a hospital or a clinic. It was intended for studies about alien life, specifically the ones that came to Subangdaku. In his dream, he felt the pains and struggles of being experimented and studied by Dr. Alvarado and his team. His dream was both a warning and a plea for help. They needed to rescue the alien life.


    A sudden noise jolted back Tonton''s senses. His hands were shaking and large beads of sweat were forming on his head. He breathed hard, shocked at his vision. He looked for the brilliant object and there it was, still lying on the wooden plank. Quickly, he snatched it and examined what it was.


    At first, it looked like a broken piece of a toy but as he inspected it further, it was more like a part of an emblem. The whole thing could be circular and flat, and around one inch in diameter. What he was holding was a quarter portion. There was an engraving or an image inside but he could not really make it out. It appeared to be a corner of a triangle with something slender protruding beneath it, like a leg beneath a skirt. After careful consideration, Tonton was convinced that the entire object could be a big coin with a girl logo inside, just like the drawings being put on the door for the female restroom. It was broken into several pieces and what he found was the one with the left leg. He smiled at his analysis.


    It appeared to be just a simple trash but Tonton felt it communicated with him. What was more intriguing about it was that it was not made of ordinary metal. In fact, it was like a gold piece but only lighter. He raised the object and it dazzled even brighter when placed against the light.


    "This is brighter and more yellow than my mom''s gold rings," he whispered.


    "Hey Ton, what are you doing?" Jamie asked him.


    He turned around and Jamie was already few feet behind him. He must not have noticed him approaching while he studied the mysterious object.


    "I found this strange thing here. I don''t know what this is but it got me curious."


    "Let me see it."


    He gave Jamie the object who also examined it thoroughly.


    "This looks like a part of a coin," Jamie finally said.


    "I guess the same thing, too."


    "There''s an image inside but I really could not tell. Why are you curious about it?"


    "I also don''t know why but it feels like it is talking to me."


    Jamie handed him back the object which Tonton hastily inserted inside his pants'' right pocket.


    "What do you mean?"


    "I was staring at it when I suddenly had a vision. My dream came back again."


    "Which dream?"


    "The most recent one where I was in a hospital bed and being experimented by Dr. Alvarado. Now, I finally understand that the dream was some sort of a warning. The facility where I was held is in fact this place."


    "No way, you got to be kidding me."


    "I wish I am but I really believe this is the place. Dr. Alvarado will make this facility house several clinics but the things he wants to do in secret will be done here."


    "What secret things?"


    Tonton became silent. He had no clear evidences, only speculations, but he knew he must speak his mind.


    "Dr. Alvarado wants to do some research with the aliens. He will do it here."


    "You mean the alien he found in the grassland?"


    "Maybe, including the first one which has never been found yet."


    "Are you sure of this?"


    "I''m not. But my guts tell me so. In my dream, I was the one being experimented. But based on my dreams before that, the alien made me experience the things it had been through. We even shared some memories. I think this time, it is making me see some possibilities in the future."


    "If the alien is communicating to you through your dreams, that means it is still arrive."


    Tonton shrugged his shoulders. He did not thought of that possibility. Meanwhile, Jamie was pacing back and forth, thinking and scratching his head.


    "What''s happening to you?" Tonton asked.


    "I was trying to recall my dream and make some connection."


    "Is there?"


    "Well, I''m not sure. The dream was kind of similar to yours, except that Dr. Alvarado said that I have the cure while they were studying me. Is he referring to me or to the alien?"


    "I can''t answer that. But do you think your dream also happened here?"


    "I''m not sure but it could be."


    "Let''s go tell Kiko and Bogart about this."


    "Maybe this is why you were being drawn here earlier. Maybe these are the answers we can found."


    Tonton nodded. At least for now, their efforts to get inside the building were not wasted. Realizing their mission was already done, the two retraced their step to get out of the building. They left through the same door and went up the same stairs.


    They must have been reckless because they did not notice the man who was walking towards their direction. The man was not also paying attention so that when the boys reached the top of the stairs, he froze upon seeing them. If not for their masks, they would have a clear description of each other.


    "What are you boys doing here?" the man finally said.


    They stared hard at him, waiting for him to make any move. So when he was about to step forward, the boys jumped out of their position.


    "Run!!!" Jamie screamed at the top of his voice.

 61 The Golden Pieces 2

    Kiko was too careful not to divert the people''s attention to him. Bogart was already discovered and he could only pray he was not caught. He heard screams from his direction, including Bogart''s, followed by hurried hustling of feet. The people could be pursuing his friend but he hoped he evaded them. He knew Bogart was too clever to be captured so easy.


    He walked stealthily forward until he was out of the isolation camp. There were only deserted classrooms now. Relieved, he let out a big sigh. He passed by several buildings, hoping to bump into Bogart. Being not able to call out his name made the struggle even more challenging. And then, the sound of hurried footsteps echoed in the silence. Alarmed, he looked around him for a place to hide. There was none except for large trash bin nearby. Left with no other choice, he sprinted and jumped into the bin.


    Since school was out, there were no trash bags inside, and yet, he fell into something big and soft. The object moved and groaned upon his landing. To his surprise, it was only Bogart.


    "Oh my, that was hurtful," Bogart complained.


    "Sorry, but I am glad you are safe."


    Kiko instantly hugged his friend. They remained quiet as they heard foosteps and noise outside.


    "Where could that boy be?" asked one man.


    "He must have escaped the school already," another said.


    "Let''s quit. We have something more important to do."


    "I hope that boy isn''t sick."


    After some discussions, they gave up and left. When the last of their footstep was not heard anymore, the two got out of the bin.


    "Do we stink?" Kiko asked.


    "Ah, not much," Bogart replied with a grin.


    They laughed, finally enjoying their temporary safety.


    "Let''s go to the clinic," Kiko suggested. "That is where we are supposed to meet them."


    The school clinic was several buildings away and they needed to be more careful this time around. They already had a taste of being discovered. The clinic was actually just near the isolation camp, but then the chase happened. They walked silently through the corridors of the buildings until they finally arrived at the school clinic. There were people going in and out of the clinic so they decided to stay low at the back of the building. Minutes passed and the two soon got bored.


    "What has taken Jamie and Tonton so long to get here?" Bogart said dully.


    "Yeah," Kiko agreed. "They are supposed to be here now."


    "We can do some searching while waiting for them."


    "That''s a bad idea...." Kiko answered, but after a long thought, he said "I guess we can do that."


    "We can search around the clinic."


    "Could Dr. Alvarado be here?"


    "It''s possible. This could be his hideout."


    "Well, come on, let''s go inside."


    "But we need to remove our bonnets first. We look weird with this," Bogart said and laughed.


    There was a back door nearby and so they went to it. Kiko turned the knob and voila, it was open. He smiled at Bogart and they went inside.


    Surprisingly, it was quiet. They entered a corridor which led to several rooms. On their left was the stock room for medicines and the next room to it was the school doctor''s office. To their left was another stock room, followed by the ward room. Up ahead was the consultation area where Miss Grace, the school nurse, received patients, though now they were not anymore children. They heard minor movements coming from that area so they decided not to go there.


    "Let''s split," Kiko suggested. "You go to the ward room while I take the doctor''s office."


    "Then what?"


    "We search the rooms for anything that could help us expose Dr. Alvarado. And maybe something about the aliens."


    "Alright, let''s meet again after ten minutes."


    "Make it five. We can''t stay here for long."


    "Can we accomplish something in five minutes?"


    "Of course, a lot could happen in five minutes. Remember when our favorite basketball team won the national championship last season? It was only in the last two minutes that they scored higher than the opponent. Eventually, they won the game."


    "So see you in five?"


    Kiko winked at him and immediately went inside the doctor''s office. Bogart also went inside the room in front of him. He was familiar wiith the room for he had seen it before when he had to be rushed to the clinic for some bandage. There were three beds inside which were all unoccupied.


    "Why are these beds here?" Bogart wondered. "They should have used in the isolation camp."


    He groped the railings and mattress of the beds but found nothing odd. He dropped on the floor and looked around, but still nothing in there. Meanwhile, Kiko was momentarily amazed by the ambience of the doctor''s office. It was his first time to see the room because it was off-limits to the students and because the doctor was always not around.


    "This room is really for the intelligent," Kiko said in awe.


    There was a tall bookshelf behind the doctor''s desk and several more around the room. A single potted plant stood in one corner, bringing a breath of green in the dry and dreary office. Kiko looked around him and was overwhelmed. To look for the unknown in that jungle of random objects was a challenging feat.


    He scanned the books on the shelves but found nothing intriguing. He studied the objects atop the doctor''s desk; still, there was nothing peculiar about any of them. He tried rummaging the drawers but they were locked, except for one which contained the doctor''s toothbrush, comb, some pills, and loads of papers. He looked at his watch and realized he needed to get out of the office in less than one minute.


    "This is hopeless," he whispered.


    He was about to leave when he saw something glistening at the base of the potted plant. He did not notice it earlier but now that he was looking at it in another angle, the object shone brightly. He stared at it for a long time, hypnotized by its glow.


    Quickly, he went to the plant pot and picked up the object. It was a broken piece of something like a medallion or coin. As a whole object, there should be an image inside. Though the piece he was holding was less than a quarter of what it was, Kiko could make out the image. It looked like a protruding arm and above it, there was something like a curly hair floating, like that of a woman''s. What was more intriguing about it was its color. It was brighter but with lighter shade than gold. He bit the item and it was indeed very hard. It could be real gold.


    "What could this thing be?" Kiko whispered.


    He knew it was wrong to be taking things he did not own but there was something like a magical force in the object that tied it to him. It seemed it had a life that was begging him to take it along.


    "This could be just the doctor''s trash he threw."


    Without another thought, he put the object in the side pocket of his backpack. He was about to leave when the door suddenly opened. Startled, he jumped and tried to hide.


    "Kiko, it''s just me," Bogart said.


    "Oh man, you almost gave me a heart attack."


    "That''s not possible. You are too young to have heart attack."


    Kiko pranced on his friend and wrestled with him.


    "Don''t get too witty with me," he said annoyingly.


    "If you could only see your face when you got scared," Bogart said in between laughs.


    "Let''s get out of here now," Kiko said after loosening his grasp on Bogart.


    They arranged their clothes and left the office. They have just exited the door when they heard voices and footsteps coming from the consultation area.


    "Let''s get back inside," Bogart whispered.


    "We can''t. What if it is the doctor? He could be coming here."


    Bogart nodded. Kiko took his arm and they ran towards the next room. Fortunately, the door was not locked so they immediately went inside. There were several shelves around stocked with different medicines. They looked around for a spot to hide.


    "Behind that cabinet!" Bogart said frantically.


    They sprinted and hid. Few minutes past and there was only silence.


    "Maybe it is safe now," Kiko commented.


    Suddenly, the door opened wide. They froze as they heard footsteps going inside the room. Then the women spoke to each other. It was the same voices they heard earlier....

 62 Do You Hear What I Hear?

    Tara and Cecilia had just finished addressing the needs of a patient in one of the tents. They felt exhausted since they had been tending people with flu and other sicknesses since that morning, and they felt disgusted. Yes, they were privy to the development of the outbreak but to be part of the solution and to be in the frontline in the crisis was something they did not anticipate. They thought they would just stay in the local health center where they did nothing much but look after their fellow nurses. And then their superiors deployed them to the isolation camp, an order they could not refuse.


    For Dr. Alvarado, it was a lucky situation that he could take advantage of. He was delighted when the two informed him about it. With them, he would have eyes and ears inside the isolation camp. Besides, all eyes were also aimed at the facility so whatever happened there, it would be an explosive news. A little sabotage from the two ladies and the outbreak would blow out of proportions. Overjoyed, the doctor promised them a handome bonus pay for that development.


    "That one made me sick," Tara presently said, referring to their last patient. They were headed to the clinic to get some supplies.


    "Why only him?" Cecilia asked. "You should be disgusted with everyone."


    "Well, I am but the last one was beyond forgiving. He coughed hard near my face. I could have easily inhaled all the germs coming from him."


    "Highly unlikely since you put on a face shield and a disposable mask."


    "But it is still disgusting."


    "Well, we did not expect the Dr. Alvarado''s little plans would result to something as big as this."


    "Yes, it is quite funny how people panicked to this fake outbreak."


    "Be careful, Tara. Some ears might be able to hear you."


    By then, they were near the clinic and Tara looked forward to some rest.


    "We are finally almost at the clinic," she sighed. "I want to take a nap at the doctor''s office."


    "You cannot do that," Cecilia snapped. "We must appear like hardworking and caring nurses. We just get some supplies and then we come back to the camp."


    "Yeah, I know. This is just too boring."


    "Boring or not, we have to act concerned so that nobody will suspect. Besides, there are too many nosy people around."


    "Yes, one of them is Grace, the school nurse. I can''t stand her. She is too kind and soft-spoken for my liking."


    "And she is a smart girl. People like her are dangerous. For all we know, she might be mistrusting us."


    "And there''s that Estella Bermudez, the all-knowing reporter."


    Tara pointed Estella with her pouted lips. The news duo was taking shade in the porch of a building. They appeared to be recording some news report. Estella was standing on the porch and delivering her lines while Sonny was crouching on the ground and working his camera to record Estella. They looked too intense and serious which irritated Tara even more.


    "She thinks she is a highly intellectual human being," Tara commented. "I can''t stand her arrogance."


    "Well, she has a right to be arrogant," Cecilia stated matter-of-factly. "Look at her - beautiful, charismatic, smart, and successful."


    "You don''t have to enumerate how lucky she is."


    "Are you envious of her?"


    "Why would I?"


    Tara turned her head and walked rapidly. They finally arrived at the clinic and the cold air of the building greeted them. Tara relished the feeling and right away slumped into the sofa.


    "Tara, get up!" Cecilia barked. "You can''t be too careless."


    "Just chill. I''m just taking a short break."


    "Come on, let''s take some supplies."


    Just then, Cecilia heard noises coming near the doctor''s office.


    "Who''s there?" she called. "Grace?"


    "She can''t be here," Tara answered her. "She was her usual busy self at the camp."


    "Any people there?" she called again.


    "You must be hallucinating. This place is as silent as a tomb."


    Cecilia shrugged her shoulders and went immediately to the stock room. Tara lazily followed behind her.


    Meanwhile, Kiko and Bogart stayed as low as possible behind one of the cabinets inside the room. They dared not move any muscle. If they could stop their breathing, they would have done so. The two nurses were already picking supplies from the shelves.


    "These are the same as before, right?" Tara asked.


    "Yes, they are," Cecilia said. "The doctor said there is no need to increase the lethality of our injectables."


    "But we still have to inject them to random people so they will get sick or worsen the conditions of the present patients."


    Cecilia nodded and said, " Like I said, you should be careful with your words. You might heard."


    "Well, nobody is here. And nobody will think we are part of how this outbreak was made."


    "Hush!"


    Cecilia glared at her. She was annoyed by how tactless her accomplice was.


    "Well, good luck to Subangdaku. More people will get sick, and the present patients will suffer even more."


    Tara let out a teasing laugh. The boys heard them clearly. They looked at each other and nodded, realizing that answers had indeed come their way.


    "Do you really understand why the doctor is doing this?" Tara asked.


    "He said everything was for his medical facility. The sicker the people get, the more urgent the facility should be established."


    "Do you believe that?"


    "Not really," Cecilia said after a long thought. "There is something he is not telling us. However, it is none of our business."


    "What''s important is that we are being paid beautifully for a job well done."


    "Exactly."


    The two laughed evilly. The boys were infuriated with what they heard. They had many theories about Dr. Alvarado, assuming that he was indeed the doctor the two nurses were referring to, and the Biker Brothers were hoping they were entirely wrong. But then they were right all along. It was unthinkable that a respected man could do such evil act.


    "I wonder what substances these vials contain, " Tara said curiously.


    "We don''t have to know," Cecilia answered. "Let''s simply do what we are tasked to do. So let''s just inject these things to random people."


    "And they will get cough, fever, and blah blah blah."


    "Come on. This is enough. Let''s continue making the people get sick."


    They laughed again which revolted Kiko and Bogart as they listened. The sound of their voices would forever remain a nightmare to them. When they were done, Tara and Cecilia gently opened the door and left the room. The boys quickly got out of their hiding place.


    "We have to tell Jamie and Tonton about this," Bogart said.


    "Yes, we really have to," Kiko replied. "It makes me mad. But is it really Dr. Alvarado they were talking about?"


    "Who else is making a medical facility right now?"


    Kiko nodded, understanding the logic behind his friend''s words.


    "Do you think Dr. Alvarado will be going to the isolation camp?" he asked.


    "We will never know unless we go back to the camp," Bogart answered.


    "Then we shall."


    They slowly went out of the room. To their relief, nobody was in the clinic that only dead silence could be heard. They walked slowly but their steps echoed in the silence. They were breathless as they went out through the exit door.


    Kiko pointed to the direction of the isolation camp and Bogart nodded in response. They tiptoed their way round the corner and when they turned aside, Estella was standing there, delivering her news, while Sonny was recording her. They jumped back but Sonny had already seen them....

 63 Doubt, Trouble, Doub

    Grace had been busy since Thursday. She was there when the medical tents were put up. Since Dr. Gatbunton was not around, she was the one who received the medical team from the local health office and briefed them about the school''s health services. Along with other school personnel commissioned to stay behind in the isolation camp, she assisted the medical team in all the groundworks.


    Alex also volunteered to stay but the principal rejected his request. Since he was in the teaching force, the principal saw no need for his services. Only qualified personnel were allowed to remain in the campus. It broke his heart. He really wanted to be at Grace''s side to make sure she was safe during the crisis but he had no other choice but to comply.


    For Grace, it was a heart-warming gesture from Alex. She also liked Alex but in this outbreak, she had to set aside her personal life to focus in giving her outpouring service. Nonetheless, the thought of Alex cheered her up and brought relief despite everything.


    She was really exhausted and was about to take a break when she noticed a commotion inside one of the tents. She was certain that Tara and Cecilia were inside, administering the needs of the patient. She saw them coming out of the clinic and entering the tent.


    The noise became louder. She hesitated going inside the tent in order to avoid crossing paths with the two. Not that she hated or abhorred them but as much as possible, she did not want to be working with them. They first met last Monday when they assisted in giving mandatory flu shots to the students. That first encounter was not as pleasant as Grace hoped to be. The two nurses were overprotective of their paraphernalia. They did not want her to touch their stuff that they locked themselves in the stock room when they prepared the shots. Grace''s participation was only to inject those shots to the students. All throughout, the two were either snobbish or sarcastic to her each time she attempted to strike a conversation with them. Her guts told her that something was weird and fishy about them.


    So Grace made a resolve to avoid any encounters with them if they get to work again. And then the isolation camp was finally put up in the campus and to her surprise, the two were also involved. Like before, they were authoritative to their fellow nurses, always giving orders while doing less, as if they were the leader of the medical team. Early that morning, they also brought supplies not listed in the team''s inventory. They simply said they were donations from a good doctor who wished to provide extra medicines in case of shortage. To Grace''s curiosity, there were no labels on their stocks. But in the chaos as patients arrived in the isolation camp, those supplies were never thoroughly scrutinized.


    The chaos became more obvious in the tent and so Grace finally entered the scene. The patient was yelling hysterically at Tara and Cecilia. She was an old woman, probably in her early 70s, and though she looked feeble and scrawny, there was strength in her angry protest. She resisted the medication the two insisted on giving her.


    "Are you okay?" Grace asked the woman. "Why are you so mad?"


    "They are giving me medicines not in my prescription," she said with strong conviction.


    Cecilia and Tara looked at each other. For a brief second, Grace saw panic and hesitation in their face, particularly in Tara who looked drained of any color. She turned white as a ghost.


    "Actually, these are not medicines," Cecilia said. She managed to blurt out those words calmly but Grace heard a hint of fear. "These are introvenous vitamins. This way, the old lady can easily boost her immune system and recover from her sickness."


    "But it is not written on her records, right?" Grace asked with poise and sarcasm, as if challenging them. "We can''t give anything on the patients if it is not in the doctor''s orders."


    "But this is only vitamins," Tara raised her voice. "It will not do any harm."


    "But we just don''t do what we want to," Grace insisted. "We have protocols to follow."


    "Why are you here anyway?" Tara questioned her angrily. "This is not your station and you should not be meddling with us. That''s the protocol."


    "But the chaos here can be heard outside. I just can''t stand outside while a patient cries. I just can''t do anything but listen to your arrogant action."


    "Holy crap, so you think we are arrogant?" Tara stepped closer to Grace.


    "That''s not what I mean," Grace defended herself. "If that thing you want to give her is useful, then tell us what exactly it is."


    Tara became suddenly speechless. Cecilia quickly but carelessly thought of a rebuttal.


    "This is just a vitamin," she said.


    "What exactly?" Grace insisted.


    "You do not have to know, girl!" Tara said stubbornly.


    Grace was taken aback by her answer. After an oppressive silence, she said softly, "Why not? So even this woman here does not have to know what you are giving her?"


    The two became mute, unable to answer her any longer. Just then, Dr. Alvarado entered their tent.


    Meanwhile, Estella and Sonny were recording their news report for the evening program when they noticed the disturbance in the tent. It was a busy day for them. That morning, they followed up on the recent deaths and witnessed some sort of miracle in the marketplace. They were still undecided whether to report that miracle since their news chief did not find it substantial. If there would still be time, they could use that as filler and as a human interest story. Nevertheless, Estella still made a new recording for it. Presently, they were recording updates about the isolation camp when they heard the commotion. Estella wrapped up the report and approached Sonny.


    "There''s some chaos out there," she said.


    "Yeah," Sonny replied, "let''s check it out. This is the first trouble for the camp."


    Estella grinned. "It could just be a simple misunderstanding."


    The two went to the tent exactly the same moment that Dr. Alvarado came to the rescue. They did not notice him until he spoke. For a while, the tent became crowded.


    "She is right," Dr. Alvarado was saying, referring to Grace. "You intentions may be noble but we can''t take the risk. I want to talk with the two of you in the clinic."


    Instantly, he left. Tara and Cecilia tailed behind him, angry for being embarrassed. Since they did not really know what happened, Estella talked with Grace and the patient and their statements made her further dislike the two nurses. Since the outbreak, she had several not so pleasant encounters with them.


    "I don''t understand why they keep insisting giving me the shots," the old woman reasoned.


    "You did the right thing," Grace comforted her.


    Estella and Sonny left the tent as Grace pacified the woman and put her back to bed again.


    "I really feel something bad about the two nurses," Estella confided to Sonny. "They are not acting like concerned nurses."


    Sonny chuckled. "Then how should concerned nurses act?"


    "Don''t get cocky with me. They are just not the typical caring nurses. They act as if this outbreak is nothing to them."


    "Don''t be too quick to pass judgement. Or is your instinct telling you something else?" Sonny teased her. "Speaking of instinct, didn''t you see the boys appearing behind you when we were recording earlier?"


    "What boys?"


    "There were just the two of them and I am not sure because they quickly evaded. But they looked like the boys we saw in the market."


    "The four boys with the bikes?"


    "Yes, minus two."


    "Where could the other two be?"


    Sonny shrugged. Estella sensed something else. Because where the boys are, there would always be trouble.....

 64 Run, Collapse, Run

    It was a shock beyond words for Jamie and Tonton. Being caught at that moment felt like being suddenly dipped in ice cold water that they shivered and panicked. Adding to their fear was that the man could possibly identify them. They could only hope that the dimness of the basement and their face mask made them unrecgonizable. Reflexively, they ran without looking back.


    "Hey, there are kids in here!" the man shouted.


    The men working in the front side heard their fellow worker hollered. They paused and pondered. Why would it be trouble if there are kids in the area? Kids loved playing anywhere and it would just be normal to find them there. But then, there a was strict instruction to them by their foreman. Other than the workers, no one must be allowed in the building or around it, not even children. The construction must be off-limits to everyone, especially the news reporters and nosy people. As to why, they did not know but Dr. Alvarado specifically made that instruction. So seconds after the call, realization settled in their heads, more so when they heard footsteps from inside the building. Instantly, the men ran inside to chase after the intruders.


    Meanwhile, the two boys had no other choice but to deal with the man head-on. With all their strength, they charged at him and managed to bring him down. It was a violent fall that the man shouted in pain as his butt hit the concrete floor. Immediately, Jamie and Tonton took the opportunity to run away from him. They had just ran a few meters on the upper level when the men from the front entered the chamber. The boys stopped, so did the men. There were several open doors around them, most of which were up ahead the men. The boys surreptitiously looked at their left. There was an opening.


    "You have some in your bag, right?" Jamie asked Tonton.


    "Of course," Tonton answered confidently.


    Quickly, they repositioned their bag and took out marbles from its pockets. Slowly, they stepped back while the men advanced towards them. At the moment the men ran, the boys threw the marbles on the floor. They bounced and bounced, their tiny sounds reverberated strongly inside the hollow building. The boys took out more marbles and joyfully spread them on the floor. The men danced as they stepped on them, some falling hard on the floor while others struggled to maintain their balance while going after the boys.


    "Let''s go," Jamie said and they immediately went out the opening.


    The Biker Brothers ran until they finally reached the front portion of the building. To their shock, more men were waiting for them. They encircled them and laughed as they closed in. They were not wearing face masks and so the boys saw their mocking looks. Without any hesitation, Jamie took out a bottle of powder from his bag and squeezed it hard, sprinkling white powder on the faces of two nearby men. They vigorously slapped their faces to shake out the powder covering their eyes. The other men were angered that they went up to Jamie. But before they could get near him, Tonton took out a pack of starch powder from his bag and quickly dusted them with it. The men shook their heads while the boys laughed at their white faces.


    Seeing them in trouble, Jamie and Tonton immediately ran, hoping they could finally escape them. They were just around the corner when two more men arrived. Behind them was a moving crane with the driver also shocked to see some kids running around.


    The boys evaded the two as the men they encountered earlier were finally able to catch up with them. It would have been an endgame if not for the crane driver who instantly panicked at the chaos on the ground.


    "Catch them," he yelled. "Don''t let them get away!"


    As the men scampered, the driver lost balance. The boom of the crane violently moved sideways and as the hoist rope swang, its hook attached itself to the scaffolding in the side of the building. The crane moved once more and shook the structure, including portions of the building. As the men watched in horror, the scaffolding collapsed, bringing along a part of the old building''s wall. Wood and concrete rained and with a final thud, they plummeted to the ground.


    The men gasped as they watched the collapse right before their eyes. The sound of the crash was like cookies crumbling when clenched. It was a big damage and how Dr. Alvarado would react to the disaster was something they found hard to fathom.


    For Jamie and Tonton, it was a perfect chance to get away. So while the men were absorbed in shock, they slowly sneaked and left the scene. The crash was loud enough to stir the attention of the community. Within seconds, people from the neighborhood came rushing to look at the damage. Despite their face masks, their murmuring was audible which made the men became more embarrassed. They forgot about the kids since the fiasco was more important to think about.


    "How could I face the doctor with this mess?" the foreman whispered to himself. He sighed for that was all he could.


    The boys successfully reached their bikes. Along the way, they tried to walk up straight and evaded eye contact with the people. They could not let their fears show. It was a big relief to finally touch their bikes.


    "Wow, that was exciting," Tonton said as he removed his face mask and breathed some air.


    "It was tough but they failed to capture us," Jamie commented as he also freed his nose and mouth from the mask.


    They grinned at each other and gave a high up. The sound of their slapping hands was loud, but not too perceptible amidst the people''s animated chattering.


    The sun was slowly falling as late afternoon approached, and yet, the air remained warm and humid. This made the boys sweat even more as they celebrated their little success. It was a success discovering Dr. Alvarado''s secret in the facility, and to watch the rubbles of the fallen portion of the structure made the two even prouder.


    "I think we need to go now and join Kiko and Bogart," Jamie said.


    Tonton nodded. Gently, they boarded their bikes and left the scene. They had already gone several meters from the site when they met on the road a familiar car. It was a black media car.....

 65 Little Failures, Little Success

    After the incident at the medical tent, Dr. Alvarado immediately went to the school doctor''s office at the clinic. He was fuming in anger but he did not let it show as he settled the trouble. He sat on the chair behind the desk and leaned his chin on his clenched hands. He was worried that the little misunderstand could turn big, especially that there were media people in the scene. After a few minutes, the two nurses also entered the room.


    "We are sorry for what happened earlier, Doctor," Cecilia began. "It was carelessness on our part."


    "We could easily handle the situation and inject the woman with a shot," Tara said defiantly, "if not for Grace. She ruined our plan."


    "Shhh..." Dr. Alvarado hissed angrily. "I don''t care who''s fault it is but I don''t want any failures. A little failure could destroy everything I have worked hard for."


    The two watched as the doctor''s fists trembled in anger. There was fury in his eyes as he said those words. It was the first time they saw him that way. They always encountered the doctor in his jovial, friendly mood. But at that moment, he was a terrifying man. Even Cecilia, who could control her composure, got frightened at the sight of the angry doctor.


    "Who''s that girl again?" Dr. Alvarado said calmly.


    "Her name is Grace," Tara answered with a slight tremor in her voice. "We worked with her last Monday when we administered the shots to the kids."


    "And is she a trouble?"


    "She''s a big trouble," Tara said. "She''s nosy and curious. She''s fond of meddling-"


    "And admittedly, a smart girl," Cecilia interrupted her.


    Dr. Alvarado looked at Cecilia and said, "Very brave of you to compliment. And you, Tara, do you think the same way?"


    "I don''t really see her as a threat-"


    "Answer my question!"


    Tara was taken aback by his outburst. Shakily, she said, "Yes, Doctor, she is smart."


    "And are you smart, Tara?"


    She nodded.


    "Smarter than her?"


    "I think so."


    "I am not too pleased with your answer, Tara," he said menacingly. "I don''t want to be outsmarted by anyone."


    "Sorry, Doctor, I will be wiser than her."


    "That''s good. If you will not be so smart, you might find yourself in trouble."


    Cecilia was quiet as she listened to them. She felt terror, especially upon hearing his last words. They were in this state of reprimand when they heard a loud thud from outside. They stiffened and silently waited.


    "You may go now," the doctor instructed the two and they immediately scurried out of the room.


    There was something in the sound they heard that worried Dr. Alvarado. It was ominous and eerie. Just then, his pager vibrated. He opened it and choked on the message he read. Angrily, he screamed.


    Outside the clinic, the crash was more pronounced. Sonny and Estella stopped what they were doing and looked at each other.


    "What''s that noise?" Estella asked. "It sounded like some heavy objects fell hard on the ground."


    "Yes, it sounded like that," Sonny said. "It seemed to be coming from there."


    Sonny raised his arm and pointed his fingers up high.


    "That''s where the construction is," Grace chimed in. She had already put the panicky patient to sleep and she was just exiting the tent when she heard the crash.


    "What construction?" Estella asked.


    "Dr. Alvarado''s medical clinic."


    Estella gasped. The nurse was right, the sound came from where the old abandoned building was. Now that would be an intriguing news, assuming there was indeed a tragedy in the construction site.


    "Let''s go," Sonny suggested.


    Estella nodded and after saying goodbye to Grace, they hurriedly packed their stuffs and went to their car. Sonny started the engine right away and moved out of the campus.


    They were still a good distance from them but Estella already recognized them. There were two boys riding their individual bicycle in the opposite lane, their bags lightly resting and swinging on their backs. She quickly rolled down her window and when they finally met, she had a good glimpse of their faces. One was the thinner boy with eyeglasses while the other was taller one who was supposedly healed that morning by the miraculous prophet. She kept her eyes on them until they were far apart.


    "Are they the same boys you saw earlier in the school?" Estella asked her partner.


    "Nope," Sonny answered. "I saw the fat one and the smaller guy."


    "Why have they separated? The other two looked like they were being chased on the street."


    "And it seemed they came from the construction site. Did they just cause trouble in the area?"


    Estella shrugged her shoulders. Personally, she had a strong hunch about the boys, and yet, she needed to focus more of her attention and time to more worthy news contents.


    Finally, they arrived at the site. A workers'' scaffolding had collapsed, bringing along portions of the building walls. Thankfully, no one was hurt. Immediately, Sonny prepared his camera for anothing news recording.


    Meanwhile, Jamie and Tonton managed to finally reach their rendezvous. It was a tiring escape that they panted and rested to regain some energy. Their friends'' bikes were still parked by the bushes so the two would still be inside the school. They were about to enter the hole when Bogart triumphanty squeezed himself through the opening. Immediately, Kiko followed right behind him.


    Overjoyed, the Biker Brothers formed a circle and hugged each other.


    "Why did you get out of the school?" Jamie asked his friends.


    "It is not anymore safe for us to get inside," Bogart answered.


    "Why?" Tonton inquired.


    "It''s a long storry," Kiko said. "For now, let''s get away, from here."


    The boys boarded their bikes and started their journey home. Along the way, they shared stories about their discovery. They stopped by the marketplace and continued their discussions. That night, they had a very relaxing sleep.


    On the other hand, Dr. Alvarado became more infuriated upon seeing the rubbles piled up high. It was a heart-wrenching sight for him. After reading the message, he quickly went to the construction site and indeed, a portion of the old building had collapsed.


    "One trouble after another," he said to himself.


    For Estella, the day had been filled with plenty of news. Their news chief was so excited with their updates. So on that evening, the people of Subangdaku saw the hardships encountered inside the isolation camp, as well as the tragedy of what could have been a hope for them...

 66 Mass Healing at the Marke

    Loduvico looked at the crowd before him. They were all wearing face mask but he could clearly see the hopefulness and faith in their faces. He knew they were hungry for love, hope, joy, and freedom from misery. His heart reached out to them. If only he could provide everything they needed and wanted, he would have done so. But he could only do what his gifts allowed him to - that was to heal their spirits and body.


    The voices kept speaking to him all the time. They continually reminded him of his mission to the people of Subangdaku. Among the voices, it was the woman''s that he kept wanting to hear. She was the angel who descended from the heavens to tell him about the gifts to be bestowed upon him. Her whispers urged him to submission.


    His gifts were frightening at the beginning. But as the days rolled by and more people listened to him, he became bolder and more confident. Other than the voices, the people''s faith and dependence in him made him want to further serve and save Subangdaku. Yes save, for in his visions, things beyond terror could happen to the district. He must act quickly or Subangdaku would be gone forever. But the mission of saving the district was not really his. Though the voices did not directly tell him so, he sensed that somebody or some people had greater responsibility than his. He saw flashes of it in his dreams.


    The news about his miracle healing had been reported last night in the evening program. He had performed several miracles before but yesterday, when he healed the boy, he was not ridiculed or spited by the people. It was his first time that people believed him. It must be the quiet innocence of the boy or their anxiety with the outbreak that made them believe in him. After that people with various illnesses went up to him. He relieved them of their fever, body rashes, difficulty in breathing, and muscle pains. That afternoon, he healed at least twenty people.


    Radio and television networks were quick to to report the news. It was not the main headline but as a filler only. Yet, the short news segment ignited encouragement and hope in the people''s heart. For a simple rural community like Subangdaku, superstitious and traditional medicines were accepted with open arms.


    So that Saturday morning, Loduvico was overwhelmed with the sea of people in front of him. It was something he did not anticipate. Loduvico usually arrived at the marketplace to preach at around nine in the morning and only when he started talking that people began to gather around him and listen. But now, it was entirely different. People waited for him and when he saw them from a distance, he was filled with love and pity. As he walked towards them, they were breathless and gaping, as if they looked forward to his presence. And once he was already right before them, the people clapped and cheered. After several minutes of incessant clapping, Loduvico raised up his hands and signalled for them to stop.


    "People of Subangdaku," he began addressing the crowd, "the dawn is coming to everyone. Fear not for salvation is here. All your miseries, pains, agonies, and sadness will be taken away."


    He looked at the people. His heart melted. There was so much eagerness and frustration in them.


    "You may be suffering right now but relief will be coming for you. Greater dangers are ahead but just believe and you will be saved."


    "Save us, dear!" a woman pleaded. "Heal us from this sickness. You are our only hope."


    "Come here, woman."


    The woman immediately came towards him. The effort was too strenuous for her that she coughed violently as she reached him. She was shaking from too much pain in her throat and chest. Loduvico reached down and lifted her up by her shoulders. When they were eye level, he looked at her intensely.


    "Do you believe?"


    The woman could not say any word; she simply nodded. And then Loduvico''s hands shone, momentarily blinding the people. After few minutes, the bright light disappeared and Loduvico released her. She dropped to the ground and once she regained compsure, she stood up and embraced him in gratefulness. It was a similar routine for all the healing he did. Loduvico touched them, light shone from his hands, and then the person got healed. Once again, the people were mystified for his miracle so they cheered and praised him.


    "Long live, Loduvico!" a man shouted. "An angel had lived among us."


    "I am not an angel," Loduvico corrected him, "but heaven had told me to be among the people of Subangdaku so I can help them."


    "No matter who or what you are," the man insisted, "you are an angel to us!"


    "Or you can be a saint."


    "Yes, you are a saint!"


    "Or an embodiment of God!"


    The people gasped. It might seem a wild idea but they inclined to accept it.


    "Long live, Saint Loduvico, God''s reincarnation!" a man shouted.


    The people chorused their adoration. They were elated with joy and thanksgiving.


    "Oh please, heal me, Saint Loduvico," another woman pleaded in front of him.


    Loduvico smiled and knelt before her. Slowly, the people relaxed and made several queues. One line was for the sickest and another for the mildly sick. The spectators surrounded them, curious and eager for miracles. Ludivoco did not disapppoint them as he healed one person after another.


    Meanwhile, Mang Tomas was observing from a distance, still in his usual spot. There were few people around him, the same ones who supported him from the beginning.


    "Can you also perform a miracle?" a supporter asked him.


    "I can''t," Mang Tomas answered. "Healing is not my gift. I can only see the future and tell you about it."


    "But you never actually told us specific things about the future."


    "Because I cannot do so. I can only say little things but not the entire picture. Or else, the future changes and we will be done."


    "You are scaring us. What do you mean by that?"


    "You just wait. The future is near. In fact, it is already here and it has started."


    "Please speak plainly. You are confusing us."


    "Bear and endure."


    "You are getting mad, Mang Tomas. If you could only heal like Loduvico...."


    "Then what? Would you have believe me?"


    "Maybe. At least he has done great things."


    "You have love him so far. In the end, you would also spite him."


    "You are mad!"


    One by one, the people left him. Yet, Mang Tomas was unaffected. He did not desire for people to adore him. He only needed to speak about the things he had seen.


    Meanwhile, a mother and a girl also passed by the marketplace. They saw the congregation but instead of going close by, they avoided them.


    "Why can''t we go near?" the child asked.


    "Because it can be dangerous. They can harm you and I can''t let that happen."


    The mother dragged the child as they went away from the people. However, the child kept looking back at the crowd. There was something in the gathering that pulled her close. Yet, she could not do anything about it. She simply stared as they went farther away.

 67 The Doctors Wrath

    Dr. Alvarado''s car was passing by the marketplace when he noticed the crowd. He clinched his right fist and hit his leg with it.


    "Is that the man, Morgan?" he asked his driver and personal assistant.


    "I am not sure, Sir," Morgan answered. "From our distance, I can''t tell if it is him. According to my investigtaion, there are two persons who frequents the marketplace, preaching some random things and predicting the future."


    "Who are these two?"


    Morgan slowed down the car. They had entered a busy street and various vehicles were in front and behind them. Before the meteor crashed in Subangdaku, only tricycles, cars, and pick-up trucks were mostly found on the street. But now, various kinds of vehicles came passing through, including ten-wheeler trucks and roadwork equipment. Truly, the incident opened up Subangdaku so that development finally came to the district.


    "The first one is Mang Tomas," Morgan said mechanically. Dr. Alvarado always thought that Morgan was a heartless man as he had oftentimes showed no emotions whenever he talked. "He is in his late fifty. Wife is dead and all children have already left Subangdaku. He lives alone in his small hut. He began preaching right after the first meteor."


    "So he was already active right at the start?" the doctor asked curiously.


    "Yes, however, people don''t seem to pay any attention to his words. Yet, he is always in the streets preaching."


    "What does he preach?"


    "Just random things on how to get ready for the end of the world. They say he had been predicting that apocalypse is coming."


    The doctor laughed loudly. He could not believe that there were still people like Mang Tomas who delivered predictions, especially about the end of humanity.


    "Sorry, " Dr. Alvarado said upon calming himself. "I just can''t believe that guy. Never mind him, I don''t think I should be bothered with his predictions.... Well, who is the second one? Loduvico?"


    "Yes, Sir. Mid-thirty and left alone by his wife. He used to work in the market as freighter until the second meteor. After which, he began to give predictions like Mang Tomas. However, he also started performing miracles so that more people believe in him."


    "Does he really perform miracles?"


    "Yes, based on the people I interviewed. His miracles were mostly about healing the sick."


    "Is he really successful?"


    "They say he is."


    "What sicknesses can he heal?"


    "Everything. So far, no one had cried that Loduvico is a fraud. Instead, they adored him, claiming him as an angel, saint, or even God himself."


    Dr. Alvarado suddenly slapped the dashboard of the car. Still, Morgan did not flinch. He was already used to the doctor''s tantrums. He could even be worse than that in many occasions.


    "I can''t let that man ruin my plans," Dr. Alvarado said. "He may only be a small speck but he could still place me in danger."


    Morgan nodded. His boss was a very difficult man. His mood swings were terrible. He could be very jolly, but in the blink of the eye, he could turn nasty and ruthless.


    Morgan had just gotten back to Subangdaku yesterday. Since the meteor crash, he had busy running errands for the doctor. He had been to the main office of the National Science Center and planted a man there so that Dr. Alvarado could have an eye inside. The government easily confiscated his find from the crash away from him, and although there were promises and assurances, the doctor was doubtful about them. Besides, he could not wait to know more about the alien life form.


    "We must do something about Loduvico," Dr. Alvarado said with conviction. "If he continues to make more people believe him, sooner or later he would be the most influential person in Subangdaku."


    "Eventually, people will worship him."


    "I can''t let that happen!" Dr. Alvarado shouted at his ear.


    Morgan remained unmoved. He was focused on his driving. On the windshield of the car, it was very clear that Loduvico was becoming popular. People were crowding to experience his miracles. He had offered them a cure for their sicknesses, unlike his boss who had only caused the outbreak to happen.


    "I have the cure," Dr. Alvarado mumbled, as if answering the question in Morgan''s head. "I promised them that. I need to keep them hoping until the facility is constructed and operational."


    Morgan was there when the doctor lost control due to what happened yesterday. The collapse in one section of the building was not really big, in fact it could easily be repaired. Yet, it was big enough for Dr. Alvarado to explode. They came into the scene a little late so that the rubbles and the pathetic men were already waiting for them. The doctor was about to yell at them in frustration but Morgan was too quick to stop him. There were too many eyes around them. He led the doctor inside the safe portion of the building, along with the project''s foreman. Once they were out of the people''s curiousity, Dr. Alvarado let out his anger violently.


    Morgan understood him. Earlier, the nurses made a mishap back in the isolation camp. Dr. Alvarado was still able to keep his cool back there that he simply reprimanded the two. Yet, knowing his boss, Morgan believed that he was cooking up something for them or for one of them. They need to learn some lessons, simply because just as his plans were starting to realize, little tragedies also began to occur. The doctor could not afford that. Dr. Alvarado needed to stay in his tracks.


    "Think Morgan! What would you do in my position? You have everything under your control until someone acts carelessly. Your building collapses. And then some guy takes the spotlight away from you?"


    "Well, Doctor," Morgan answered. "You can''t beat them all at once. You can deal each one separately, and one by one."


    "I don''t have time."


    "You can, Doctor. Like in the game of chess, you move each piece one by one, and before you know it, you have everything under order. You lost some pieces but ultimately, you won."


    Dr. Alvarado considered his analogy. Quickly, he took out his pager and typed.


    "You are a smart man, Morgan. I just sent a message to the mayor. The facility is the priority. It must be finished and operational this week. After that, all other things will come into place."


    "Are you arranging a meeting with him?"


    "No, but I am calling him later to arrange things. Meanwhile, you get through the details of construction and make sure they are followed down to every minor details."


    "Yes, Doctor. Consider it done already."


    By then, they were approaching the exit of the market area. The people became fewer and the traffic had thinned, just as the doctor''s emotions had already mellowed.


    "Where to now, Doctor?"


    "Back to my office. I will have to settle plenty of things."


    Their car picked up speed as the doctor began cooking up changes to all his plans.

 68 Peace Be With You

    Sunday came and the healing at the marketplace continued. Loduvico was exhausted but he was not giving up. This was his mission and he would persevere despite the fatigue, hunger, stress, and mockery. Yes, even through everything he had done, there were still many unbelievers who doubted and ridiculed his miracles. Yet, the number of his followers and believers was increasing, and that was more important to him.


    Yesterday, he had touched and healed close to a hundred people. There were children and old people, male and female, faithful and curious, rich and poor, and all kinds of individuals. Now, the crowd was more than he could count. It was still early in the morning but Loduvico could hardly went to his usual spot because the people were pulling and pushing him from all directions. Their eagerness for his healing touch overwhelmed him and even themselves.


    When he was finally in the midst of the crowd, he looked up to the heaven and raised his arms wide. The people gasped, wondering what he was doing.


    "Before we start the day," Loduvico spoke up in a loud but soft voice, "let us offer first a prayer of thanksgiving."


    One by one, the people kneeled down and bowed their heads. Even the curious spectators followed them, as if some unexplainable force was urging them to do so. In an instant, the marketplace was covered with hair-tingling silence.


    "O Heavens, we open our hearts and present our sincerest gratitude for the miracle of life...."


    As if on cue, a bright light suddenly appeared from the sky and shone on the market area. While most were in fervent prayers, others saw it happened and were mystified. Firm believers became more convinced that indeed, salvation had come to Subangdaku. A hope against the outbreak was finally here.


    While he was praying, Loduvico was filled with fire. The people counted on him and he would not fail them. As long as he had the gift, he would serve them. No matter what trials come ahead of him, he would not falter in his mission. Subangdaku needed saving. Once he was done saying graces, he began healing again.


    "Let us give way to the very sick," he instructed the crowd. "They needed immediate help."


    The people obliged. Those with severe cases of sicknesses were given priority. In fact, the sicknesses became more varied. Unlike the day before when only those who had cough, colds, and fever sought healing, people suffering from athritis, tubercolosis, cancer, and various ailments of the body came to the congregation.


    Meanwhile, the number of churchgoers decreased as people attended the mass healing at the marketplace. It was obvious as there were several empty pews at every church, unlike the previous Sundays when it would always be full. The mass healing became the town''s talk and the churchgoers were also inclined to believe in it.


    "Several of my neighbors had already been healed yesterday," one confessed to the woman seated next to her as they waited for the service to start.


    "It is the same case in our street," her seatmate answered. "My neighbor had severe pneumonia but she was instantly healed after the prophet touched her."


    "What exactly happened to Loduvico?" asked a man to his fellow churchgoer. "He was just an ordinary guy before."


    "You know him?"


    "Of course, we were friends back when we were just kids."


    And so went all the conversations in the churches of Subangdaku. Some claimed to be friends or relatives of Loduvico and they were too proud about it as they shared fond memories and touching stories. Others were quite hesitant, only listening or nodding during conversations so as not to offend the other party.


    For the Biker Brothers, they chose to remain silent since they knew the truth. Their tongue might slip if they also engage in the conversations. Yet, they could not help but talk about it among themselves.


    "Hey guys, over here!" Jamie called out his friends upon seeing them in the church.


    Tonton and Kiko were all smiles as they saw him. Bogart was more thrilled as he waved his arms excitedly, his body wobbling as he ran up to them.


    "Take it easy, man," Kiko teased him. "You might wreck your Sunday clothes."


    They laughed as they gathered under a tree, just few meters away from their families. People were busy chitchatting around them so they were confident to talk about the incident.


    "What''s the plan now?" Tonton asked.


    As agreed, they had not seen each other on Saturday. It was a group decision not to meet up. What happened back at the construction site and the isolation camp was something they had not planned. The collapse of one side of the building was all over the news, and what they had found out about the doctor''s plans enraged them. They shared their discoveries that Friday night and in order to calm themselves, and to prevent any suspicion from their families, they agreed to just stay at home on Saturday. Besides, Jamie had not informed his parents about his experience at the marketplace.


    "I don''t really have anything in mind," Jamie answered.


    "Me as well," Kiko said. "What we found out is beyond what I can imagine."


    "But we need to do something to stop Dr. Alvarado''s evil deeds," Bogart asserted which made his friends instantly hushed him.


    "You just can''t mention his name so easily," Tonton reminded him.


    "Try not to be careless," Kiko added. "It can get us into trouble."


    "Sorry," Bogart apologized. "I just can''t contain my anger against him. Planning this outbreak and then the secret facility."


    "All the more reason that we should be careful," Tonton said.


    Just then, people moved from their idle talks and slowly went inside the church as the service was about to start. The boys'' families waved at them, calling them to join them.


    "Let''s meet after the service," Jamie suggested.


    The other three boys nodded and immediately, they separated and joined their families. The service was quite tense and this was evident when the priest delivered his sermon. He talked about false prophets, judgment day, and human''s weakness to believe in miracles and promises. The people knew he was referring to Loduvico and probably including Mang Tomas but they refrained from talking about it during the service. The priest''s sermon took longer than usual, and when he finally delivered his last words, everyone sighed in relief. They were like holding their breath as they listened to him. The air lightened up as worship songs were sang.


    "Peace be with you," the priest said.


    The people echoed his words as they looked around them and nodded to every people they had eye contact with. The Biker Brothers did the same but the three boys suddenly froze upon looking at Jamie.


    Jamie wondered at their reactions. It seemed fear, surprise, anger and all sorts of mixed emotions were written all over their faces. But they were not exactly looking at him but to the person behind him. Slowly, Jamie turned his head around and stared blankly at the first person he saw. Like his friends, he froze.


    "Peace be with you," Dr. Alvarado said with a smile.....

 69 Patient Zero

    Dr. Alvarado was seeing fear in the boy''s eyes. He was delighted knowing he had found the right boy. He did not stop smiling even when Jamie turned away from him. He was right and Morgan was as efficient as usual.


    Friday and Saturday were terrible days for him. Yes, his plans to cause panic in the district were materialized but for a price. A section of his building was damaged and some of his people, particularly the nurse named Tara, almost got them into trouble. He was honestly devastated and frustrated but Morgan made him calm again. He trusted Morgan and he was right in trusting him. Morgan had been working for him for at least ten years. He had taken charge of his business ventures while Dr. Alvarado worked humbly as scientist in the local office. In fact, not too many people knew the doctor owned those businesses. Morgan was the face and the man behind them. He was his right hand and many times, his brains as well.


    Seeing the huge crowd gathered at the marketplace yesterday filled him with envy and anger. How could such a lowly man like Loduvico make people believe that he was the savior in this outbreak? The doctor created the outbreak anyway so he should be the only one to have the cure? What could Loduvico do? Perform some petty miracle healing? He scoffed the idea but it was already winning against him.


    "I can''t let him do that," Dr. Alvarado could not help but express his exasperation to Morgan while they were leaving the market area.


    "Then don''t let him," Morgan replied calmly as he maneuvered their car smoothly through the traffic.


    "What do you mean?"


    Morgan did not reply but simply grinned at him.


    That night, he called Morgan to his office and discussed the situation to him again and all possible solutions. Morgan listened critically and before the night ended, they were able to come up with some concrete plans. The doctor smiled to all that they had planned. Truly, Morgan was a genius.


    "So who is this boy?" the doctor asked.


    "He is James Michael de Jesus," Morgan answered quickly. "Fifth grade. He had chickenpox until Loduvico supposedly healed him."


    Dr. Alvarado chuckled. He could not help but poke fun at the idea of miracle healing. Morgan was emotionless as he watched the doctor had some fun. After delivering Dr. Alvarado to his private office, Morgan spent the entire afternoon investigating the mass healing secretly. This led him to understand that Jamie was Loduvico''s first miracle out of the outbreak. The people he had talked to claimed that Loduvico had already healed a few people before but it was with the boy that the prophet became popular. It was that moment that made people finally believed him. It was also the moment that triggered Dr. Alvarado to make drastic changes to his plans.


    "Is it safe to take the boy?" Dr. Alvarado asked Morgan.


    "No, it is not. The boy has a good family. He is popular in school and he has plenty of close friends. Taking him will be too obvious and his disappearance will be felt. It might even reach the papers. We cannot afford that."


    "I see. But we need him, right Morgan?"


    "Of course, Sir. He is patient zero."


    "It is only him who has answers. He is the only one who can quench our curiosity. We need him."


    "I agree, Sir. He was the first to be healed and whatever he says from that point on will convince people."


    "We need him to speak for us and not for Loduvico."


    Morgan nodded.


    "I want to see that boy."


    So early that Sunday morning, Morgan began stalking the de Jesus family. Coincidentally, they were heading to the local church where Dr. Alvarado regularly attended. The doctor was elated about it and he made sure he would be sitting near the boy.


    "Peace be with you," he said softly to the boy when he turned around.


    Of course, he did not mean those words. He was not bringing peace but something vile and unforgiving. He was also surprised to see Jamie''s reaction. It was as if the boy already knew him. Clearly, he must have known something else that made him afraid of him. Yet, Dr. Alvarado was not a bit concerned. On the contrary, he wanted the boy to fear him. He could easily persaude him if he would be afraid.


    The boy immediately ran up to his friends right after the church service. Dr. Alvarado wanted to run after him but he restrained himself. He had his wife beside him and she did not know a thing about his plans. Plus, there were too many people around and the boy was with his friends. He just wanted to talk to him but he cancelled the idea. He should not be too hasty. Otherwise, his plans would not succeed.


    Meanwhile, after bidding goodbye to their families, the Biker Brothers ran as fast as they could and as far away from the church as possible. They were breathless as they ran, as if there was a monster chasing after them but there was none.


    "Let''s stop here," Bogart said and panted, his bold shoulders heaving heavily on his bolder body.


    "Yes," Kiko agreed. "I think it is safe here."


    They stopped and sat on a bench under a big acacia tree. It was a small bench but they managed to squeeze themselves in, with Jamie and Tonton sitting at the middle.


    "He was really scary," Tonton began. "I did not notice him until that part."


    Kiko: "He looked like he was going to eat you up."


    Jamie: "And that really frightened me. I was not prepared for that."


    Tonton: "Dr. Alvarado seemed to know you. It appeared as if he is after you."


    Jamie: "I felt the same way. He stared at me straight in the eye. His eyes were menacing."


    Bogart: "Did he say anything?"


    Jamie: "Nothing but the usual peace be with you."


    Kiko: " It looked like he was talking to you from where I was seated."


    Jamie: "Yes, his eyes were talking to me, telling me I should be careful."


    Tonton: "What could that possibly mean?"


    Jamie shrugged. While they were talking, a white car passed by them. The car''s windows were open. When it was directly in front of them, the driver turned to look at them. He was smiling. They stopped talking as they stared at the smiling Dr. Alvarado.....

 70 A Mysterious Call

    The boys'' spirit jumped upon seeing Dr. Alvarado who appeared to be jovially smiling at them or to Jamie in particular. What puzzled them was his intention which they had no clue.


    "Why does he seem friendly to me?" Jamie asked himself.


    "There is something he wants from you," Tonton replied matter-of-factly.


    "What could it be?" Kiko asked.


    "Did anyone dream about this?" Bogart also asked.


    Nobody answered.


    Tonton: "I did not have any dreams or visions about us or Subangdaku in the last few nights."


    Kiko: "It''s the dead end, right?"


    Jamie: "It feels like it."


    Bogart: "Come on, guys. We can''t give up now."


    Silence again.


    Tonton: "Can we really move forward from here?"


    Bogart: "Of course, we can!"


    Tonton: "But for what cause?"


    Kiko: "We might not only put ourselves in danger but our family and loved ones, too."


    Tonton: "Does Dr. Alvarado know about us?"


    Jamie: "It is possible. Two encounters with him and by now, he could be investigating us."


    Bogart: "Guys, what are you talking about? You are just assuming things."


    Kiko: "But what if they are true? Then we are done."


    Jamie: "Kiko is right. We now know that Dr. Alvarado is an evil man. He is dangerous and fighting against him may be a battle we cannot win."


    Bogart: "But guys, we made it this far. We cannot go back now."


    Kiko: "Bogart, you need to understand that this is not only about us."


    Bogart: "I know! This is also about Subangdaku."


    The three boys stopped arguing with Bogart. There came a ring in their hearts when their friend mentioned the district''s name.


    "Can we really be Subangdaku''s heroes?" Tonton whispered.


    Silence. The day was hot and so was their argument. They had bantering before but nothing was as serious as this. Did they just hurt each other''s feelings by being openly honest?


    "If you do not want to go on," Bogart said angrily, "then fine. I will do this myself. I must do something."


    Quickly, Bogart turned around and left his friends. Instinctively, Tonton reached out and held Bogart''s arm but the latter was so emotional that he forcefully flung his friend''s hands. Tonton did not expect that so Bogart''s action caught him off balance and he fell on the ground.


    "What are you doing?" Kiko yelled. "You are hurting him."


    "Sorry," Bogart said crying, his tears streaming down his face. "I did not mean to do that."


    Once again, Bogart turned around and ran away from his friends. He felt bad that they had come to a point that they would be quarreling about Dr. Alvarado. He felt worse for unintentionally hurting Tonton.


    "Shouldn''t we follow him?" Tonton asked.


    "Let him be," Jamie answered. "Let''s cool down for a while. We can''t think straight in this situation."


    The two nodded.


    "Let''s get home for now," Jamie continued, "and think of the best thing to do."


    Slowly, the three separated and went their separate ways. Meanwhile, Estella and Sonny saw everything what happened through their car''s windows. They had just passed by the church when they saw the fat boy pushed aside his friend. The other two boys quickly moved forward but stopped uncertainly. After brief talks, the fat boy moved away and in few minutes, the other three boys also left separately.


    "What happened to our boys?" Estella asked.


    "It seems they got into some misunderstanding," Sonny answered.


    "Just like any boys, right?"


    The two chuckled. They had been too busy eversince they featured Loduvico''s miracle on Friday''s evening news. Besides on doing follow-ups on the escalating number of deaths in Subangdaku, they were also making an exclusive about the miracle healing. They witnessed firsthand the incident at the marketplace and it was believable. If it was just some magic trick, then it was done flawlessly.


    All throughout Saturday, they swept Subangdaku to interview Loduvico''s family and friends. They went back to the schools he attended and places he worked in, and talked with the people who knew him. It was an arduous task as there were not too many records about him. Featuring him was Estella''s idea which was instantly approved by the television management.


    They went back to the market area that Sunday morning and the atmosphere was more hair-tingling than ever. They saw how the large crowd gathered and bowed before Loduvico. They saw how the sky seemed to open up and lit upon the man. It was a moment that should be written in history. Sonny recorded everything and he could clearly imagine how the feature would run.


    They also dropped by the local churches and randomly interviewed people. Indeed, the mass healing at the market stirred such controversy that pastors and clergymen sounded bitter about it. Loduvico was slowly snatching people away from them.


    "I regret not recording Loduvico''s first miracle healing," Sonny confessed. "We were there but did not mind it."


    "It''s fine," Estella said. "The management is not even interested about it until it blew up."


    "Did you expect it will grow this big?"


    "No. It was nothing special since too many so-called prophets and God''s servants do faith healing. Loduvico''s timing is just so perfect. It happened during an outbreak when people are so desperate for a cure."


    "And while there is none, they will continue to cling into their faith in the unexplainable."


    "Exactly. All eyes are in Loduvico right now."


    "Loduvico is the man of the hour."


    "And we should be careful about our feature. We should tell his story without being doubted or hated by our viewers."


    Sonny nodded. They hurried to their office and immediately worked on their news feature all through afternoon. As expected, it was viewed by many people when aired that night. Once again, Estella dominated the ratings during the timeslot. Her superiors were quick to give her a call and congratulated her along with Sonny.


    It must have been nine in the evening when she was finally able to rest. She massaged her temple as she slumped on a seat. She yawned, longing for her bed. It was a tough week and it would continue as long as the outbreak did not stop. Estella was about to stand up when the telephone beside her rang. She looked at it, uncertain who it was. The last of her bosses called ten minutes ago and she was not expecting any more calls. She was not really fond of answering unsolicited calls.


    She looked at the door of their office. Sonny must have been waiting for her downstairs. He volunteered to fetch her home that night. She looked back at the telephone which was still ringing. She did not want to answer it but her guts told her to take it. Reluctantly, she answered it.


    "Hello," Estella said. "Who is this please?"


    "Is this Miss Estella Bermudez?" a shaky small voice from the other line said. "I have something to tell about the outbreak but you must not tell anyone about this."


    "Is this some joke?"


    "No, it is not. Just listen-"


    "Tell me now or I will hang up."


    "It is Dr. Alvarado. He caused the outbreak."


    Immediately, the line went dead. Estella listened to the statics but indeed, the caller was gone. She put down the telephone and stared into space, shock and confused of what she had just heard.....

 71 Evil Strike Back: Level Two Outbreak

    Dr. Alvarado was all smiles as he left his home that Monday morning. He believed that things would turn again for his advantage that week. He and Morgan carefully laid out their plans the night before. They meticulously discussed each detail and nothing could possibly go wrong if they were implemented as planned. He could not help but admire Morgan''s keen intellect. He was quick to find loopholes and remedy to each one. Morgan was his ''queen'' in this chess game.


    Dr. Alvarado called many people that morning, including the mayor and some local officials. He needed them to pull some strings. Morgan also called a few men, mostly thugs doing pretty crimes. While the doctor would take charge of manipulation, Morgan would have to do the dirty works. After all, Dr. Alvarado''s hands must remain clean through all the scheming.


    "Morgan is always right," he said to himself. "The damage is not big. It had been easily repaired."


    Dr. Alvarado was looking at his medical facility, grinning in delight. It looked as if nothing happened to it. In fact, it was almost done. The entire structure was already finished inside out. The doors and windows were fixed already, and the floors were tiled. The men were only working on finishing touches. By tomorrow, fixtures would be installed, as well as the furnishings and medical equipment. Wednesday would be the earliest it would open.


    As Morgan advised him, Dr. Alvarado called the mayor by Saturday and sought for some help in speeding up the construction and issuance of necessary permits. The mayor obliged with the condition that the "cure" would be available soonest. The doctor was also happy to return the favor. He knew the mayor all too well because the man was also not as the people knew him. They were just players but Dr. Alvarado was wiser and meaner.


    Additional men were also put in the construction site who worked overtime on Sunday. Seeing the facility right now, Dr. Alvarado felt it was all worth it. He could not take the smile off his face.


    He started the car engine and slowly moved again. He had to drive because Morgan was busy with some things. His next stop was the isolation camp in the school.


    "Time for level two," he whispered along the way.


    Traffic became heavy as he neared the school. Vehicles were parked haphazardly everywhere around the campus. He sounded the horn upon arriving at the gate. Instantly, it was opened.


    "Good morning, Dr. Alvarado!" the guard greeted.


    "Good morning, too!" he greeted back with a large smile on his face.


    He parked at this usual spot. Doctors and medical staff with vehicles had designated parking areas inside the campus. Though Dr. Alvarado was not really a medical doctor, everyone still looked at him that way. Well, he discovered the meteor remains in the grasslands and was one of the mayor''s advisers to things related to the meteor crash, including the outbreak. While he was still revered that way, he would continue to make the most of the opportunity.


    He got out of his white car and went to the isolation tents. The doctors in-charge were in the camp but Dr. Alvarado needed to make the necessary pretentions - that he still had control over things and that he cared about where the outbreak was taking the district. After talking to a few of them and some of the patients, he went to the school clinic. Already, Tara and Cecilia were waiting for him at the school physician''s office. There were only three of them.


    "Good morning to the two of you," he greeted them as he entered the office.


    "Good morning, Doctor," they replied in unison.


    "How was the weekend? Sorry I was not able to visit since Saturday. There were plenty of things that I needed to settle."


    "It was a busy weekend," Cecilia answered. "More patients keep coming in. The head doctor instructed us to release those with mild symptoms. We just gave them over-the-counter medicines."


    "So who were left here are the terribly sick patients," Tara said in disgust. "I don''t feel good taking care of them."


    "Oh, why Tara?"


    "I just don''t feel comfortable. I am worried that I would get infected by them."


    "Careful Tara, you don''t want that to happen."


    "Of course, Doctor, it is unimaginable."


    "Yes, it is. You getting infected? It would be a big mess."


    "I bet Tara here is extra careful," Cecilia joined the conversation again. "I am keeping my eyes on her."


    "That''s good, Cecilia. You really should watch her cautiously."


    There was a momentary silence. Tara was confused whether the doctor was just being overly concerned or some meaning lay hidden behind those words. For Cecilia, there was menace and malice behind Dr. Alvarado''s smiles.


    "I want you two to go to my car and take out the small boxes at the backseat," Dr. Alvarado ordered them. "There are only two of them so each of you take one out and bring it here to me. Be careful in carrying the boxes. More importantly, do not let others see you."


    The two women nodded and immediately went out of the clinic. While waiting for them to come back, Dr. Alvarado made mental calculations of his plans. He played them over and over in his head while analyzing possible loopholes. He could think of nothing. He and Morgan planned everything perfectly. He was in a state of reverie when he heard footsteps coming inside the building. In few minutes, the two nurses were back inside the room, carrying two packages. Gently, they placed them on top of the desk.


    "What are these, Doctor?" Tara asked boldly.


    "What else but new sets of shots?"


    "What do you mean by new sets, Doctor?" It was Cecilia''s turn to ask.


    "What else could the word new mean?"


    "Yeah, Cecilia, what else could it mean?" Tara said boastfully. "It means these are fresh materials!"


    "Oh no no, Tara," Dr. Alvarado corrected her. "Fresh is different from new."


    Tara looked at him in confusion while Cecilia suddenly felt a scary coldness in her.


    "When you say fresh," the doctor continued, "it is the same kind of material but another batch. Then new is entirely another kind of material."


    Tara gasped and said, "You mean these things will cause other kinds of sicknesses?"


    Dr. Alvarado did not answer but looked at her angrily.


    "Tara, how many times do I have to remind you to be careful? You should not be talking so loud."


    "Sorry, Doctor. I was just surprised."


    "Your carelessness might put you in danger."


    "So these will cause other diseases?" Cecilia persisted.


    "Not all will be new diseases. Some will only worsen the present sicknesses. I really do not know. They were placed there at random so we do not know until they entered the patient''s system."


    "Are we killing people?" Cecilia asked worriedly.


    "No, we are not. That''s not part of the plan. We''ll just make them sicker. This is a new wave of sickness and it should be worse than the first."


    While Tara was unmoved, Cecilia was kind of hesitant. She did not expect they would come this far.


    "Don''t worry, Cecilia," Dr. Alvarado assured her. "Everything is under control and just do what I tell you."


    "So what do we do now?" Tara asked.


    "Give our patients those shots and let''s wait what happens after."


    The two nurses nodded.


    "Alright, get out of this room now and start your mission. Don''t worry, in this new wave of outbreak, I will pay you more handsomely than before.


    With a smile, Tara went out of the room carrying her box. Cecilia followed but she still had hesitations.


    "Trust me, Cecilia," Dr. Alvarado suddenly spoke. "Just do what I asked."


    Cecilia nodded and went out. All through that morning, the two nurses took random shots from their stocks and injected them to the patients. Before noon came, the patients'' conditions became worse. Their colds, cough, fever, and muscle pains were two or three times as bad. And all the while, Dr. Alvarado could not help but smile. After all, it was the second wave.....

 72 Evil Strike Back: Threats for the Ladies

    Like before, Grace had been working round the clock. She was jumping from one patient to another. While doing so, she noticed Tara and Cecilia entering tents eventhough they were not supposed to do so. There were schedules and it seemed they were not following them. They were also bringing vials and syringes, as if injecting people with something. Again, they should not do so unless it was part of the procedures. It did not feel right for her but due to what happened few days ago, she decided not to interfere with them.


    Grace also observed their patients were getting more sickly each day. The camp was supposedly to accommodate patients with mild illnesses but the growing concerns in Subangdaku urged the authorities to make drastic decisions; hence, they accepted severe cases. To her wonder, the severity was getting grave. Just that noon, two patients vomited blood and pus. An hour later, two more suffered extreme allergies that rashes appeared on almost every corner of their skin. They had not rested yet when several others suddenly had convulsions and suffocations. It came to a point that they had to send them immediately to the emergency room in nearby hospitals. By afternoon, Grace was worn out.


    She still had one hour before her shift for the day ends when one of the doctors in-charge called her to the office. The doctor went straight to the point and told her that she would be relieved from duty. The skirmish she was involved in last Friday had reached the higher ups and the mayor was particularly disappointed with how the camp was handled. Based on the story, Dr. Alvarado was severely reprimanded and one recommendation was to relieve her.


    Grace was dumbfounded. She did not expect that the little confrontation would end that way. She was sad and hurt but she could do nothing but obey. She wanted to implore but the doctor was only following orders. After saying her thanks to some new friends she met in the camp, she immediately packed up and left.


    Alex was already waiting for her outside the campus. His presence soothed her grieving heart. Since the camp started, Alex fetched her at night so she no longer have to ride her bike in going home. Though she rejected his offer at first, Alex persisted so she agreed in the end. Seeing him at that moment brought tears to her eyes. Alex saw her sadness that he hurriedly went up to her and embraced her.


    "What''s the problem?" he asked after kissing her head.


    "I''m not allowed to go back to work in the camp again," she answered which made her cry.


    Once her emotions subsided, she explained everything that happened. Alex was partly sad and partly happy. Sad because he knew Grace really loved the work and giving her service in such time meant a lot to her. Happy because she would not be anymore exposed to different threats from the outbreak patients. He comforted her and fortunately, Grace relaxed and smiled again. Alex was stroking her hair when he noticed a piece of paper sticking out of her bag.


    "You should place that carefully inside your bag," he commented.


    "What do you mean?"


    Alex pointed at the piece of paper and Grace was perplexed upon seeing it. It was something taken out of a doctor''s notepad where prescriptions were written. She was certain she did not put anything like it during the day. Immediately, she took out the piece of paper.


    "Be careful, Grace. You should know your place, or else....." the note said.


    Grace gasped. She read the heading and only then she noticed it was a paper from the school physician''s notepad. It could not come from her superior Dr. Gatbunton. She knew his handwriting so someone else must have written those words. Besides, the doctor had not reported since the isolation camp became operational. Seeing her shock, Alex took the paper and read.


    "Who could have written this?" Alex whispered angrily. "This is a serious threat."


    "I don''t know. I don''t understand why I got this."


    It was already dark by then and the couple felt that the note was more chilly than the night breeze. They were still in a state of worry and puzzlement when Grace saw Cecilia and Tara exiting the school gate. Instinctively, she ran up to them.


    "Guys, I would just like to apologize to the two of you," Grace said to them. "I could not believe it would reach this point."


    "What are you talking about?" Cecilia asked coldly.


    "Our dismissal from work."


    "What dismissal?" Tara snapped.


    "I was relieved from work beginning tomorrow. It was an official order. Didn''t you receive the same notice?"


    "Nope," Cecilia answered.


    "And why are you dismissed?"


    "It was about what happened to us last Friday. So I thought the three of us were relieved."


    "Why include us?" Tara exclaimed. "It was not our fault. You caused the trouble."


    "We were just doing our job," Cecilia added, "while you were being nosy about other people''s business."


    Grace could not answer them. She felt humiliated.


    "Too bad for you," Cecilia said.


    "Yeah, really too bad," Tara mocked. "You must learn to mind your own business."


    Without waiting for her rebuttal, the two turned around and left. Grace was shocked. Alex saw it and hurriedly put his arm around her and led her away. After consoling her, they entered his car and left. Meanwhile, the two nurses could not also help but wonder about Grace''s case.


    "That''s odd," Cecilia said when they were some good distance from Grace. "The doctor must have worked on her dismissal."


    "You mean Dr. Alvarado?" Tara asked tactlessly.


    "Who else? Tara, you should be careful in mentioning names."


    " Whatever," Tara said and rolled her eyes. "Good riddance, anyway."


    Silence.


    "Are you riding with me?" Cecilia asked when they were already closed to her car.


    "I''ll pass, Cecilia," Tara answered. "I think I''ll have some sip of coffee first."


    Tara waved goodbye and continued walking. There was a popular coffee shop three blocks away. Young professionals enjoyed hanging out in the place.


    Soon, Tara entered a lonely street. The darkness caused by busted lights in some posts made the walk even lonelier for her. But more than the loneliness, Tara felt something scary in the ambience. She had just turned around a corner when some strong arms grabbed her from behind. She fought and wrestled but the man overpowered her. He pressed her against a concrete fence and she suddenly felt a prick on her neck. It was as if something sharp was pinned quickly on her. But everything happened so quickly that she was uncertain of what really took place. In fear, she screamed hard that the man immediately threw her. He ran fast, living her lying confused and dazed on the ground.


    Things became a blur for Tara. Fortunately, people heard her that they went out of their establishments to find out about what happened. By then she was unconscious that an ambulance took her to the nearest hospital....

 73 Evil Strike Back: Abducting Patient Zero

    Their misunderstanding on Sunday weighed heavily on Jamie. He believed Bogart must have been hurt and felt like they were conspiring against him. Three against one was not fair. So he felt tired and lazy as he went on his usual morning routine.


    By noon, he was totally uncomfortable that he decided to finally see his friend. He ate his lunch fast and immediately prepared his bike. It was a sunshiny day but he was fine with the blazing sun. He just needed to see Bogart.


    He passed by Tonton''s house and stopped. He was debating whether to invite him but finally decided not to. He could do this simple task and whatever transpired between him and Bogart, he would just relay it to them. Besides, Bogart might feel he was being attacked if they visit altogether. Once again, he pedaled his bike and went on with his plan.


    He was sweating profusely when he arrived at Bogart''s house. Mrs. Pescador was all smiles when she received him. She felt something bad had happened to the friends because his son was not responding to Jamie''s call.


    "I''ll talk to him first," she told Jamie, "and then maybe he would let you in."


    Jamie nodded and Mrs. Pescador disappeared. He felt worried while waiting. He could not help but wonder if Bogart really felt so hurt. Torturous minutes passed by before she came back. She was grinning when she appeared.


    "You can come in now," she whispered.


    Happily, Jamie entered Bogart''s room. He was seated on the edge of his bed, his back towards Jamie. He was staring at the windows, too shy to face him.


    "Hello Bogs!" Jamie said and stopped by the door.


    "Hi!" Bogart said without looking back.


    "Still mad?"


    Bogart shook his head which made Jamie instantly leapt and hugged his friend.


    "Don''t be touchy," Bogart said while trying to push away his friend. "Boys don''t do that."


    "Really?"


    Jamie quickly ran over his friend that they were both thrown on the bed. They wrestled and grappled until they were both exhausted.


    "That''s how boys make peace!" Bogart hollered.


    The two friends laughed and then rested lying on the bed until they caught their breaths.


    "Sorry about yesterday," Jamie finally opened up. "Did you feel like we were coming against you?"


    "Honestly, yes," Bogart answered. "I thought we would always agree on things, especially about Dr. Alvarado. I just felt bad that you, guys, did not support me."


    "Not that we don''t support you. I just feel like things are getting more risky for us now."


    Silence.


    "Sorry, too," Bogart also opened up. "I was not thinking straight yesterday. I was too emotional."


    "We were too emotional, I think. This adventure we have is making us go crazy."


    "Yeah, that we do crazy things as well."


    Jamie laughed. But when Bogart remained silent, he became curious.


    "Jamie?"


    "Yes?"


    "I have something else to confess."


    "Uhmm. What is it?"


    "I told them about Dr. Alvarado."


    "What do you mean?" Jamie said and immediately sat up.


    Bogart also sat up and looked at his friend.


    "Remember Estella Bermudez, the news reporter we met on the market? I told her that Dr. Alvarado caused the outbreak."


    "How?"


    "I called her last night." When Jamie''s face went blank, he went on and explained. "She gave us her calling card that day. You must have forgotten that moment because you were too sick that time."


    "Okay. So what exactly did you tell her?"


    "Just like I said that Dr. Alvarado caused the outbreak."


    "Only that?"


    "Yes, nothing more. I was too scared that I immediately put down the phone when I said that."


    "Do you think she believed you?"


    "I can''t say. She did not instantly received my call. When she finally did, she sounded irritated and asked if I was just kidding her."


    "And then you told her and hang up?"


    "Yes."


    Jamie thought for a moment.


    "I don''t think she believed you. With her job, she must be receiving plenty of prank calls."


    Bogart beamed upon hearing it.


    "Do you believe so?"


    "Yes," Jamie declared confidently. "Besides, Dr. Alvarado is a very respected man and she will not easily believe such words."


    "I think you are right!"


    Bogart jumped out of the bed and cheered. He felt liberated from a guilt.


    "You are such a smart friend, Jamie."


    "And you are one witty and brave friend."


    The two chuckled.


    "Why are Tonton and Kiko not with you?"


    "I decided to do this mission by myself. You might be overwhelmed if we go together."


    "Yeah, you''re right. I was really embarrassed."


    "Don''t worry, I will tell them that we have talked after this. For sure, they must have also felt bad."


    "Thanks, my friend."


    For a while, Jamie stayed and played with his friend. By five, he left and decided to pass by Kiko before going home. He turned a lonely street. There were not actually too many people in Kiko''s neighborhood. It was still too early for the night so people had not yet gone home.


    He was passing by a vacant lot when a car parked on the area suddenly started its engine. Jamie was startled, more so when its headlights flashed in high beam. He was blinded and lost balance that he fell on the ground. Several men then appeared and took him. A burly man picked up and grabbed his entire body. By then, Jamie understood what was happening that he resisted his abduction. He yelled, flung his arms and kicked his legs, hoping to free himself. However, more hands held his limbs. A fragrant cloth was then placed on his mouth and nose. In a matter of few seconds, Jamie felt his body weakening. He was nauseated and no sooner, he lost consciousness.


    When he woke up, Jamie saw nothing. There was only darkness because he was blindfolded. He tried to move his arms and legs but a strong tie held them. He was strapped. He tried to speak but his mouth was also covered. Yet, the smell of disinfectant and fresh paint hang heavily on the air. Things became clear to him. His dream was coming true....

 74 Evil Strike Back: Abducting the Healer

    Loduvico was depleted. It was the fourth day of the mass healing and he could not see the end yet. People kept coming in, hopeful and eager of his miracle healing. In fairness, he did not disappoint them. After being touched, everyone claimed that indeed, their sickness left them so that they felt not only healed but also renewed in spirit. There was always madness in the crowd while waiting for him, but once Loduvico arrived and took his usual spot at the marketplace, people would instantly behave and the commotion would die down. They remained disciplined throughout the day.


    A legion of devoted followers was also formed that Monday. They took charge in securing Loduvico''s area so that he could concentrate while healing the sick, making the people form a queue, controlling the crowd, and even offering free food for everyone. There were even rumors that they would urge Loduvico to form a new religious sect and that a petition had been sent to the mayor''s office already. Others said that necessary papers were already prepared. It was only a matter of days before concrete plans for the new religion would be made known to the public.


    Loduvico knew all that were happening. The voices inside his head kept telling him about them. Though the messages were not always clear, Loduvico could make sense of them to come up with some interpretations. So he knew people would continue seeking his healing touch. He knew that his avid believers were cooking up plans to create a new religions based entirely on him. He knew a chaos would soon happen due to some doubts. Yes, people would doubt him soon after his disappearance. He saw it - his usual spot at the market would be empty despite the crowd gathered around it. They waited until night but he did not arrive. As to why, Loduvico did not know. As to when, he also had no idea. The voices did not told him, but he knew he would vanish.


    Presently, the crowd had thinned as night slowly took over Subangdaku. Darkness was eating the market area while people continued to buy and sell merchandises. After the last sick person was sent away, his followers also bade farewell and went home, leaving Loduvico alone. In the chaos of things, Loduvico felt at peace. He was helping people and he was healing them. At whatever cost, he must continue his mission. Despite his exhaustion, Loduvico began his walk home.


    Home was just few blocks from the market area. He was used to walking and to walking alone. It pacified his mind, giving him opportunity to reflect and to listen to the voices. But that night, he heard no voices inside his head. There was only silence which mystified him. Silence was not peace; it was listening to the voices that cleared his mind. So while walking home, he was not at peace. His heart was beating wildly while his mind was worriedly weighing possibilities.


    No sooner, Loduvico saw the shadow of his lonely hut. It was dark against the illumination of the nearby houses. Not a single light was lit around his humble abode. He hurried his paces, eager for the comfort and safety of his own home.


    He was about to enter the gate when he heard gentle footsteps from behind him. His hairs stood on his skin as he felt panic and fear. Before he could turn around, strong arms knotted around his body. It was a tight embrace, possibly coming from a tall burly man. He squeezed hard but the knotted arms held even tighter. Ludovico was strong due to years of hard labor in the market but that night, his strength failed him. He could not loosen the grip and the man who held him did not even move an inch. He was about to shout for help when a large fist jammed his cheek. It was swift and easy that he was out of breath after the punch left his face. Before he could move a muscle, Loduvico was attacked by a barrage of more punches all over his body. It was relentless that he felt like a beaten pulp. In few minutes, his body relaxed and he slumped on the body that held him.


    When he regained consciousness, there was pain throughout his body. Even a single movement of his muscle could trigger too much pain that he could cry. Yet, he could not cry because his eyes were blindfolded. He was hanging with each arm tied to opposite posts that he felt like being stretched. On his feet, there were separate knots that connected them to something strong like some concrete posts or huge boulder. He felt like a marionette being controlled by his evil master.


    "Where am I?" he asked inaudibly.


    Suddenly, a forceful slap hit his face. Loduvico groaned in searing pain.


    "You are not allowed to talk unless we tell you so," a voice said from beside him.


    A bottle was then put in Loduvico''s month. Water poured profusely that it seemed to drown him. He opened his mouth wide as he felt thirst and hunger. He could not waste any more minute so he opened his mouth even wider.


    "That''s enough!" ordered another man.


    Loduvico was gasping for him as the bottle was rapidly removed from his mouth. Fresh blood dripped from his upper lip. He could not believe what was happening to him. He tried to listen to his heart and mind but the voices did not come.


    "Loduvico, you will staying in this place for as long as there is an outbreak."


    Loduvico stretched his neck and head. The voice was something familiar to him.


    "For the meantime, be a good man and do not cross the line. Or else, you will be severely punished."


    The man laughed his heart out. His laugh slowly vanished as he walked farthur away. For Loduvico, the voice was familiar. It would only a matter of time before he knew the man behind the voice.....

 75 Second Wave of Outbreak 1

    Tara woke up late and worried on Tuesday morning. Her shocking experience the other night still sent her shivers. She lost consciousness because of the assault but luckily for her, there were good Samaritans in the area who called an ambulance and sent her to the hospital. Except for bruises on her arms, Tara did not suffer any more damages so that the doctor sent her away that night.


    Yet, it was a restless night for Tara. The memories kept coming back to her even when she slept. She was harassed and the emotional trauma was immense. She might be a happy-go-lucky and outgoing woman but she did not deserve that. She was worth anyone''s respect. So everytime she remembered how the aggressor attacked and touched her, she felt mad and scared.


    All the time she was working in the isolation camp, Tara was absent-minded. She could not easily move on from the experience. Cecilia was quick to sense it when she saw her.


    "Is everything okay?" Cecilia asked her the moment she found time to be alone with her. Her voice was a little softer. Tara might not be her friend but only a collaborator in the doctor''s scheme, but Cecilia knew something was bothering her.


    "Actually, I''m not okay," Tara said honestly and almost instantly, tears welled up in her eyes. Cecilia went up to her and hugged her.


    "What happened?"


    "I was almost raped."


    Cecilia was shocked so that she gave Tara another warm embrace. They were inside the stock room of the clinic and not too many people went in there. They were alone so that Tara had an ample opportunity to share her heartache. She told Cecilia everything - from the moment they separated that night until she woke up in the hospital bed. When she was done, Tara was weeping.


    "Poor girl, why should it happen to you?" Cecilia remarked while holding Tara''s hands. "Anyway, didn''t you call the police?"


    "The people who rescued me also called the police," Tara answered. "I was already awake in the hospital when they interviewed me. Sadly, I really did not see anything. The street was too dark and I was not able to see him upfront."


    "Anybody saw the incident?"


    "So far, nobody reported to have seen the incident. The authorities had already talked with the surrounding neighbors hoping that at least one of them saw it."


    Cecilia nodded.


    "Do I deserve this?"


    "Of course, no. Not a single woman deserved to be treated that way. So don''t feel bad or guilty, you did not do this to yourself."


    "But after last night, I started to feel ashamed of what we are doing here. Am I paying for the wrong things that Dr. Alvarado made us do? Is this the price for everything?"


    "Tara, you need to calm down and stop mentioning the doctor''s name," Cecilia said firmly while slowly releasing Tara''s hands. "Do not feel bad. We are not killing people."


    "Aren''t we? We are making them too sick that they can easily die."


    "Keep yourself together, Tara. We can''t retreat now. We are already too deep in the mud."


    Silence. When Cecilia had nothing else to say, Tara quickly wiped her tears with some tissue papers she took from a shelf.


    "Thank you anyway, Cecilia. I feel lighter now that I got to unload this burden in my chest."


    "Your welcome. You can always reach out to me."


    Tara smiled. "We have stayed too long here in the stockroom. We better get back to the camp now."


    "I agree. But you got to help me first carry these boxes. The doctors requested for them."


    "What are these?" Tara asked while she gently lifted a box. "Are these new stocks from Dr. Alvarado?"


    "Oh no, these are true medicines. The doctor did not deliver any new stocks today."


    "That''s good. Hopefully that was the last time."


    Cecilia nodded. Carefully, they left the clinic with the boxes and proceeded to the camp. To their horror, the camp was in total chaos, as if the people were not managed well. Nurses were running from one tent to another. Some patients were already outside their tents, vomiting blood and trembling on the concrete ground. Patient''s companions were shouting and crying as medical staff were frantically attending to everyone''s needs. The camp was understaffed. Like Grace, several nurses and even doctors were either relieved from duty or reasigned to other facilities. They were already breathlessly working on Monday and today was even worse. Cecilia and Tara was horrified at the scene before them. What have they done?


    Immediately, they jumped into the chaos and helped in any way they could. They forgot their evil schemes as the grave consequences were right before them. How could they let Dr. Alvarado use them?


    By noon, all medical personnel were exhausted but Tara was hit worst. Her legs felt weak while her arms were numb. She had chills all over her body despite the blazing sun. Her fever was high while she sweated terribly. It was ten minutes before her lunch break but she still had plenty to do. She was about to go inside the clinic to get some supplies when she could not take it anymore. As her world whirled around her, she fell on the ground and lost consciousness.


    It was already late in the afternoon when she woke up. She was in the school clinic''s ward and Cecilia was on the nearby table folding some sheets and towels.


    "How are you?" Cecilia asked. "Feeling better now?"


    "I think so," Tara answered. "How long have I slept?"


    "All through afternoon?"


    "That long?"


    "Yes. The doctors were quite disappointed as they needed as much help as they can."


    "Sorry about that. They should have not let the others go."


    "It was an order from the higher authorities."


    "I think I need some break. I gonna take a leave tomorrow."


    "I don''t think that''s possible."


    "But why?"


    Cecilia was not able to answer right away. She could see the fatigue in the younger nurse''s face. And underneath that, she could sense some worry and sadness in her voice.


    "Like I said, the camp need as much manpower now. Dr. Alvarado came by here this afternoon and saw you. He checked for your vitals and said your conditions are just fine. You must only be tired so he let you sleep the entire time. However, you must still continue to work by tomorrow. "


    "I am not fine. I am more than just tired, I am really sick. I can feel my body burning and my head is dizzy."


    "He already instructed the camp head not to grant you a leave by tomorrow. The new medical personnel will start working by Thursday so no one must be absent or take a leave by tomorrow."


    "How could he do that to me? He could be a little considerate."


    Tara then broke down and cried. Cecilia hurried to her side and comforted her. She was not only worried about her but of the fate of the district as well. In her heart, she finally felt some regret. This second wave of outbreak was already terrifying. The sad part was that it had just started.....

 76 Second Wave of Outbreak 2

    Estella and Sonny had just finished their interview of some medical personnel of a private hospital. Health protocols became tighter as the diseases became more severe and the spread became faster. Other than face mask, they also had to wear face shield and medical gloves. It felt like the district was in serious medical calamity.


    According to the doctors, the Falling Star plague was not only about the outbreak of an unknown sickness caused by meteor dust called Subangdakudium but also about the sudden spread of known diseases like dengue fever, malaria, cholera, leptospirosis, and many others. They were common diseases but the sudden spike in the number of cases confused the doctors. It happened too quickly since the number at least doubled in just one day. They could not imagine the horror if the trend continued. The victims came from different places but they all had visited the district health center or the isolation camp or had come into contact with persons from the said places. It was as if the diseases came from them.


    Estella was not aware of that particular detail until they interviewed the doctors. There were rumors on Monday that the outbreak had worsened but the mayor''s office had not issued any statement. So it remained a rumor but she intended to make an exclusive report about it on the evening news program. The people deserved to know what was happening.


    "Where to now?" Sonny asked as he gobbled the last piece of his burger. That was his lunch already, and like him, Estella was also finishing her pasta.


    "The isolation camp at Subangdaku Elementary School," she answered. "If it was already that bad in the hospitals, it could be worse at the camp."


    To Sonny''s horror, Estella was so right. The moment they entered the camp, there was chaos all over the place. While the nurses and medical personnel were running to and fro, the patients and their companions were panicking from the worsening sicknesses. It was a scene both heart-breaking and scary.


    The duo tried to interview as much people as they could. The patients were saying that their sicknesses only worsening instead of being alleviated while inside the camp. This infuriated them, including their loved ones. For the nurses'' part, they claimed they were understaffed. Estella understood that for she saw how the medical team exerted plenty of effort in order to attend to everyone''s needs. She also learned about what happened to Tara. She was about to go inside the clinic to interview her when Dr. Alvarado suddenly appeared.


    "You should not be doing that, Ms. Estella," Dr. Alvarado was talking behind her. "She just needed some rest."


    "Why do you think, Doctor?" Estella asked when whe turned around and faced him. "Is the camp really understaffed?"


    "Sadly, you are right. Many of our nurses and even doctors, finally succumbed to the outbreak and got the diseases. We sent them away in order to recover. So the situation really placed the camp in a dangerous condition. However, additional help will be coming, most probably by Thursday."


    "Oh, that''s two days from now."


    "Yes, correct. Tomorrow will be another challenging day for the team. But I believe they could endure for another day."


    Estella nodded and went on their interview.


    Meanwhile, Grace woke up sad that Tuesday morning. She already missed working in the camp. For the next few days, she would have nothing to do but stay in her apartment. She would have no work until the school opens again. As to when, she did not know. As long as the outbreak continued and the isolation camp inside the campus was still present, classes would not resume. So Grace just took her time and did the chores she had been putting them aside for days already. She did her laundry and cleaned her bedroom.


    By noon, Estella decided to visit Alex. He had been so considerate and caring about her so she wanted to cook lunch for him. His apartment was only in the next ten zones and she could reach him with her bike in under ten minutes. Quickly, she prepared her bike and rode.


    Grace rang the doorbell of the apartment but it did not open. She was certain he was inside because his car was still parked outside the building. By the third try, Grace became worried. She was thinking of alternatives in reaching him when the door finally opened.


    "Hello," Alex said weakly. "This is a surprise."


    "Yeah, I''m cooking lunch for you to show you my appreciation."


    They both smiled at each other. Alex swung the door wide when he lost balance and tripped. Grace caught her and because he was too heavy for her, they both fell on the floor. Grace laughed loudly at the little incident but Alex could only smile back. He was in pain. Grace immediately sat up and held him.


    "Are you okay?" she asked. "You look sick."


    "I think I am," Alex answered. "I was fine yesterday but when I woke up this morning, my head felt crashing in pain. I also had high fever."


    "Did you take some medicines?"


    "Yes, but I don''t think they helped. Hours already passed but I still feel don''t feel good. I think I got infected by that thing that caused this outbreak."


    "Well, you better be wrong. For now, you better take some rest and a full meal."


    Grace helped him up and transferred him to his bed. While Alex took a nap, she hurriedly went to rummage his small kitchen and cooked some noodles. Once done, she went back to the bedroom and served Alex his food. She went back to the kitchen and also brought her food in the room. They shared their meals in bed together.


    They rested and slept that afternoon. By four, Grace awakened and opened the television. She was scanning for channels when Estella suddenly appeared on TV and delivered a breaking news story. Estella reported the rapidly increasing number of outbreak patients in all hopsitals and clinics in Subangdaka, including the district health center. Alex stirred and also watched the news.


    "What I fear is coming true already," Grace commented.


    "The government must do something about this," Alex sympathized.


    Grace nodded and hoped appropriate actions were already undertaken by the local officials, or else, it would be catastrophic.

 77 Disappearances 1

    As always, people were early at the marketplace. It was a fine day and receiving Ludovico''s miraculous healing would make their day extra special. The devotees directed the people in arranging themselves. The gravely sick were in front of the queues while those with mild symptoms were at the back. The outbreak had indeed worsened as the number of severe cases increased roughly four times from yesterday. Worse, the severity was twice as bad.


    The clock struck nine and the crowd became more excited. It was usually at this hour that Loduvico arrived at his usual spot. Minutes passed and they got even more restless. After an hour, their idol had not yet appeared and they became troubled and worried. By noon, countless speculations had passed from mouth to mouth, and the chitchats became louder.


    "Where could our savior be?" an old woman asked.


    "Why hasn''t he appeared yet?" another inquired.


    "Loduvico must be in trouble."


    "Do you think the authorities took him?"


    "He must have been captured by the police. Mass gathering is highly discouraged at this time and what he is doing is against it."


    "The people are not physically distancing as they tried pushing one another just to get ahead."


    "Some are not even wearing face mask. How disgusting."


    "Do you think Loduvico also got sick?"


    "He must have been infected by one of the people he healed."


    "Oh no, our savior is sick."


    From simple inquiries and theories, it was generally surmised that Loduvico was terribly sick and that he might not be able to heal as he was taking a rest. The crowd was disappointed with the news and after offering short prayers for Lovudico, led by one of his devotees, they dispersed and went their separate ways.


    Mang Tomas saw everything from a distance. He still occupied his usual spot in the market area and from his angle, he could see everything that was happening in Loduvico''s crowd since the first day. Like his followers, he also could not help but wonder what happened to his mate.


    "Do you know what could have happened to Loduvico?" asked one follower who happened to pass by him. "I know you are also a prophet and had been making prophecies earlier than Loduvico. Could you possibly know if he is okay?


    "Sadly I do not know," Mang Tomas answered. "I did not see him in my dreams."


    In fact, dreams were becoming less frequent for Mang Tomas. The sad thing was that his dreams spoke of the same thing - that the end of Subangdaku, and possibly even of the whole world, would come. Yet, a savior would appear and fight the evil. He sensed Loduvico was not the promised savior for he believed that he was also like him. They were meant to preach what could happen very soon and to prepare the way for the savior. Unlike him, Loduvico had healing power and that what made people look up to him or even worship him. Yet, Mang Tomas must continue preaching his visions or everyone would be doomed.


    "Can you communicate with him in your dreams?" she persisted.


    He looked at her long and hard. He had never thought of that possibility before. If they had been dreaming the same thing, there could be a chance that they would bump into each other there. If he got luckier, he could even find the savior.


    "Why would I do that, woman?"


    "Because Loduvico could not be found anywhere."


    Mang Tomas maintained his poker face. He knew the younger man was in trouble. He did not dream about it but he already sensed it the moment he woke up that morning. His dreams heightened his senses and subconsciousness that he could feel if something amiss was happening around him.


    "How do you know he is gone?"


    "Some of us went to his house to see if the prophet is fine. But when they arrived, his house was still locked. To their wonder, there were plenty of footsteps found on the ground. It couldn''t be Loduvico''s. He is living alone and the tracks were all over the place."


    "I thought he is just sick and resting. That''s what I hear people say."


    "Oh no, that''s not true-" the woman said but suddenly paused, uncertain whether to continue or to stop right there. She was being tactless and the legion agreed to keep quiet about the matter. "Could I trust you not to tell the people about it?"


    Mang Tomas smiled and nodded.


    "You see, that''s the story we want the people to believe. We did it in good faith so that the crowd would not panic and got scared."


    "Still, you lied to the people."


    "We could not think of better excuse to tell the believers. Loduvico was missing and it seemed some people took him. Right now, we are uncertain if he is safe or in trouble. Until we find him, we must make the people believe that he is just sick."


    "I understand. There are things we must keep secret for the greater good. Yet, the truth will come out sooner or later."


    "And we hope that Loduvico is finally here when that time comes."


    Mang Tomas simply nodded. He was already tired. The heat and humidity must have caused his early exhaustion. However, he had not been feeling well since Sunday. His body was aching but the pain was random. He felt it on his back most of the time but sometimes on his legs and neck. He had slight fever and just this morning, he was sneezing badly. So while he was talking with the woman, the ailments came back so that he felt tired and dizzy. Out of a sudden, Mang Tomas coughed hard. The people around him panicked and backed away from him, even the woman he was talking to. He coughed and coughed until he spat blood. The people became even more frightened at him. Just then, three local volunteer peace officers came and approached him.


    "Mang Tomas," one of them spoke, "we are here to take you and temporarily detain you in the local station. You have violated some local orders related to the recent outbreak."


    Mang Tomas looked at them, confused and pained. The tightness in his chest worsened that he could hardly breath.


    "These violations include not wearing face mask in public and encouraging mass gatherings. For these reasons, you submit yourself to the authorities and explain."


    Without further words, the men took Mang Tomas forcefully. The people watching were appalled, feeling both scared and pity for the man. Mang Tomas knew that was bound to happen as the coming of the savior got nearer. It was frightening nonetheless that he collapsed as the men took him in their patrol vehicle....

 78 Disappearances 2

    Nothing could be scarier for parents than the sudden disappearance of their child. So when their son did not come home that Monday night, Jamie''s parents were scared as hell. The first thing they did was call Bogart for they knew he was going to his friend''s house. To their dismay, he was not there. They also called Tonton, Kiko and even some of his classmates but they also did not know his whereabouts. Lastly, they reported it to the police but they could not declare him missing until twenty-four hours. All through the night, the couple were restless. They did not went to work that day, waiting for their son to come. So when Jamie still did not appear after late that afternoon, he was finally declared a missing person.


    For the Biker Brothers, it was a horrifying news. Bogart called his friends that Monday night and asked them to come over the following day. So early Tuesday morning, they were gathered in Bogart''s room. It was an awkward moment as they had not yet talked about their issue from last Sunday.


    "Well, before we talk about Jamie," Tonton began, "can we make peace first?"


    Without any words, Bogart jumped into him and hugged him tight while crying. Kiko saw it and he also joined his friends. They wept as they embraced each other.


    "I think we are overdoing it," Kiko said. "This is not really a boy thing."


    They laughed as they loosened up and took their positions. Tonton and Bogart remained seated on the bed while Kiko took a chair and sat facing his friends.


    "Jamie went here yesterday," Bogart confessed. "We talked about our disagreement last Sunday. He felt bad about it and me as well."


    "Me too," Tonton said. "It was our very first big argument ever."


    "Sorry, Bogart," Kiko apologized. "I think we are all sorry for what we did. You must have felt left out while the three of us agreed to back out from our investigations."


    "Sorry, too guys, that I was so stubborn about it."


    Bogart went on and told them about what they had talked and done yesterday.


    Kiko: "So it was afternoon when he left. Where could he have possibly gone to?"


    Bogart: "I don''t know, too. He just said that he would be telling you, guys, that we made peace. But he did not really say if he was going home straight or pass by anyone of you."


    Kiko: "Are people looking for him?"


    Tonton: "Not yet. I dropped by his house today and Mrs. de Jesus said that the police would not declare him as a missing person until this afternoon."


    Kiko: "Yeah, the twenty-four protocol."


    Bogart: "What could have possibly happened to Jamie? Was he involved in an accident?"


    Tonton: "I don''t think so. If there had been an accident, it would be on the news by now. Besides, the hospital would instantly notify his parents but until now, they still got no call."


    Bogart: "Could something bad happened to him?"


    Kiko: "I think so. He won''t just run away. If he had any plans or whatever, he could have told anyone of us. But no, he just disappeared."


    Tonton: "I really have a bad feeling about this."


    Bogart: "I hope he was not kidnapped."


    Kiko: "Why would anyone do that to him?"


    Tonton: "And who would do that?"


    The boys stopped talking as eerie realizations got into their minds.


    Kiko: "Are you thinking what I am thinking?"


    Tonton: "It''s Dr. Alvarado, right?"


    Kiko nodded while Bogart covered his face with his hands in shame.


    Bogart: "Oh no, it is my fault. I should have listened to you, guys."


    Kiko: "Bogs, it is not your fault if Dr. Alvarado is an evil person."


    Tonton: "Yeah, Kiko''s right. Besides, we are not even sure yet if Dr. Alvarado is really involved in his disappearance."


    Bogart: "Well, I am definitely sure about it. He was following Jamie last Sunday in church. And then passed by us and looked at Jamie with his evil smile. He was planning something bad and he is succeeding."


    The two boys considered Bogart''s words and thought he made sense.


    Tonton: "So why would he kidnap Jamie? Does he know that we know about his evil works?"


    Kiko: "I hope not. That is very scary."


    Tonton: "So then, what is his reason for taking Jamie?"


    Bogart: "Whatever it is, let''s report him to the police. He could be hurting our friend."


    Kiko: "We can''t do that. We have no evidence. It''s just our theory."


    Tonton: "Besides, all our secrets will be revealed if we report it to the police."


    Bogart: "Exactly, we will expose Dr. Alvarado and his evil acts. We will no longer put these things in our hands. We will not anymore worry about keeping secrets."


    Kiko: "Yes, that''s true but by doing so, we can put our families in danger."


    Tonton: "What really worries me now is that Dr. Alvarado might also come after us. If he knows that we know his secrets, he may be taking us as well. He started with Jamie and who''s next will be anyone of us."


    Kiko: "Ton, that''s creepy."


    Bogart: "Then we should do something..... Except reporting Dr. Alvarado to the police."


    Silence.


    Kiko: "We are all messed up now."


    Bogart: "Because we get mixed up with grown-up things. I understand now what you were telling me last Sunday."


    Tonton: "But you are also right. We should do something."


    Kiko: "We should find and rescue Jamie at all costs."


    Bogart: "Then we should do it by ourselves!"


    The two boys looked at Bogart. That was not exactly what they meant but Bogart''s idea was tempting.


    Tonton: "I think I like that."


    Kiko: "Me as well. But we can''t hurry things. Let''s wait for the official statement from the police."


    Bogart: "Then let''s meet again tomorrow here. We should plan this very carefully."


    Tonton: "Correct. If Dr. Alvarado is really the mastermind behind Jamie''s disapperance, we can''t let him take another one of us."


    Bogart: "We are fighting back."


    Kiko: "And we will fight hard."


    That night, the Brothers twisted and turned in their beds as several rescue plans took shape in their heads.

 79 Worries and Suspicions

    It was already night when Grace decided to go home. She made sure that Alex was sound asleep when she left. Alex lost his appetite but after much prodding, she was able to convince him to take a few spoonfuls of rice and several sips of soup, as well as to take his medicines. Alex was such a baby when sick but she enjoyed taking care of him. It gave her distraction from the things that bothered her, especially the note that was slipped in her bag.


    "Be careful, Grace. You should know your place, or else....."


    The words kept repeating in Grace''s head. It was clearly a threat but what Grace could not understand was why would anyone give her that note. It bothered her that she could hardly sleep the night before. She could not think of anyone she aggrieved that the person would be hurt enough to send her a threat. It was only with Tara and Cecilia that she had recent confrontation but she could not imagine they would take a revenge on her. They could not be offended enough to resort to such act. Besides, she reached out to the two about her dismissal from work but they were as cold and arrogant as before. She saw no hint of resentment from them.


    So all that day, while tending to Alex''s needs, Grace''s mind switched back and forth between the threatening note and her termination from the camp. They happened together that they resulted to double sadness and disappointment. By noon, she was more restless until she thought of Alex. Thank God for Alex that she could have happy thoughts despite everything.


    Once home, Grace was still restless. She missed being busy and unable to sleep, she switched on the TV and watched the late evening news. Once again, Estella''s exclusive report about the second wave of outbreak was ran with additional details and clips. She could not help but wonder how things were in the camp.


    "The medical team will be so busy right," Grace whispered to herself. "I hope Tara and Cecilia would be of much help. They are really not very helpful but I hope they changed, especially that the outbreak has gone worse."


    Grace tried sleeping soundly that night but she could not help but asked herself: ''Could the two, particularly Tara, send the threat to her?''


    Meanwhile, Estella also had her doubts and suspicions. Since the mysterious call last Sunday night, she was trying to convince herself that the esteemed Dr. Alvarado could not have done it. Yes, she and Sonny believed that the doctor had a vested interest in the outbreak, and even in the meteor crash earlier, which was to speed up the construction of his medical facility. But to cause the outbreak is something Estella had not thought about. It was a despicable act and an unacceptable one.


    Sonny was also blown away when she told him about it. It was unthinkable. When they visited the isolation camp the other day, Estella was almost inclined to believe the mysterious call. The outbreak had worsened and seeing Dr. Alvarado in the camp seemed to confirm everything.


    "It is Dr. Alvarado. He caused the outbreak."


    Estella played the words in her head again. What exactly does it mean? Did the doctor infected some people and allowed it to spread? But the meteor crash was supposed to caused the outbreak? How were they connected? Or did the doctor ill-advise the mayor so that the isolation camp was improperly managed? They saw the chaos in the camp and based on their interviews, the second wave of outbreak must have originated from their. Besides, the camp was inadequately manned and Dr. Alvarado did not deny it. Was it only his involvement? Or much more?


    "You''re unusually silent," Sonny commented. "What''s troubling you?"


    "The mysterious call last Sunday night. Plus this second wave. I just felt they are connected."


    The duo was driving to the police station. It was already night but when they decided to go home, their news division chief sent them a message telling them to drop by the police station and do a follow-up on a certain murder case three weeks ago. There was an update and their boss wanted to get the information first.


    There was a commotion when they arrived at the police station. A woman was crying while a man who appeared to her husband patted her back to comfort her. Three police officers surround them and desperately gave them pieces of advice.


    "Please find my son," the woman implored. "He is a good boy."


    "Don''t worry Ma''am," one of the policemen said. "We already assigned an officer who would look for him."


    Estella and Sonny heard the conversation but kept their distance until the couple would leave, if not pacify. In their line of work, the two had encountered countless cases of missing person and they understood too well the grief it could cause.


    "Our son had just recovered from his sickness," the father said, "so he could be in harm''s way now."


    "I can''t comment on that while our investigation is still on-going. Please be assured that you will be notified if anything comes up."


    The woman sobbed which made Estella sad. She approached her and hand her some napkins.


    "O, thank you," Mrs. de Jesus said. "Sorry if we keep these men to ourselves. They should be accommodating you."


    "It''s okay," Estella answered. "We can wait. Right, Sonny?"


    Sonny smiled and flashed a happy smile.


    "If I am not mistaken," the father said, "you are Estella Bermudez - the reporter."


    "O yes, you are really Estella," the mother agreed. "Please help us find our boy. He has been gone for more than a day"


    "What''s your son''s name?"


    "Jamie."


    "Do you have picture of him?"


    "Yes," the mother said and instantly rummaged her bag. "Here it is."


    Estella accepted the picture and to her surprise, Jamie stared at her from the image....


    "

 80 Where is Patient Zero?

    Wednesday came and Estella went up early. It would be another busy day ahead. They would be interviewing the same doctors from yesterday who promised to give them updates regarding the outbreak as they monitored incoming new patients. Since the officer in-charge was not around last night, they would be going back to the police station for a follow-up on a certain murder case. Assuming they would still have time, they also planned to visit the isolation camp again and to pass by Dr. Alvarado''s medical facility which was near completion already.


    Estella donned some denim outfits and after drying and tying up her hair, she went out of her apartment. Sonny was already waiting by the driver''s seat of their black car with a big chunk of sandwich in his hands. Estella got in and sat comfortably.


    "Sonny''s Negra looks clean and fresh today," Estella commented.


    "Who''s Sonny''s Negra?"


    "This car! You have been driving this thing since I started in the company. I bet she is your baby."


    "You got it right!" Sonny said and chuckled. "She has been my darling since the company purchased. And why Negra?"


    "She is a black beauty," Estella answered. "A headstrong princess, tough and dependable."


    "I kinda like that. I never thought of giving her a name all these years."


    They both laughed. After gobbling his sandwich, Sonny started the engine and drove.


    "Any interestng news for today?" Estella asked.


    "I was not able to see the papers today," Sonny answered. "I was hurrying up when I dropped by the station. But I brought some copies. Help yourself."


    Sonny pointed at the newspapers atop the dashboard. Estella grabbed some and scanned the pages. Nothing grabbed her attention; they were the usual news item. She took another batch and began reading the headlines. She stopped upon stumbling an intriguing title which read "Where is Patient Zero?"


    Hastily, Estella read the contents of the article. She was breathless as she did so. Once she was finished, she looked at the heading of the newspaper. It was the same tabloid that published the malicious article about the meteor crash. It had claimed that an unfamiliar substance from the meteor debris arbitrarily called Subangdakudium could cause possible dangerous health reactions to humans. The current outbreak, which it called as Falling Star Plague, was attributed to the new chemical compound. The article stirred the people of Subangdaku so that local officials decided to place the district under strict quarantine. And now, the tabloid published another malevolent article which could create ripplings impacts to the outbreak and to the townspeopple.


    Estella was distrissed and angry at what she had read. Sonny noticed it so that he slowed down his driving.


    "You look shaken," he remarked. "A bad news?"


    "Not just bad, but really spiteful."


    "Uh-huh?"


    "Remember the tabloid that named this outbreak as Falling Star Plague? It has published another incredulous article."


    "Tell me about it."


    "It said that in order to find the cure for this outbreak, authorities should search for patient zero."


    "Patient zero is the origin of the outbreak. He is the first known carrier."


    "Yes, and it claimed that patient zero is a student."


    Sonny stepped on the brake and the car stopped. He was intrigued at what he had just been told.


    "Is the article serious?"


    "It seems so. To continue, the article said that the outbreak started at the school two Mondays ago. It was during that time that flu shots were given to the students. However, one student is too sick that the shot did not work. Hence, his sickness spread to his classmates and eventually to the whole district."


    "There were no official records about it," Sonny said in exasperation. "There was even no official declaration of the outbreak. There were no clear description of the diseases. We visited the health centers and all these sicknesses are known, only this time, the number of cases were beyond the charts."


    "Exactly, that''s the doubtful part about this outbreak. It seems all kinds of diseases suddenly attacked the people. That takes me back to the mysterious call I had last Sunday night."


    "That Dr. Alvarado caused the outbreak?"


    "Yes. The doctor has been involved since beginning, way back when the meteor debris were discovered. The connection is clear but the guilt is not since there are no incriminating evidences."


    "You got to slow down, Estella. These are grave allegations against Dr. Alvarado."


    "I know. All I have are assumptions and theories. This makes me even madder. I just feel helpless."


    "Take it easy. The truth will come out one way or another."


    Estella nodded and sighed. Indeed, the truth would prevail. But exactly when? She did not know. She could only hope it was sooner, before things would lead to more serious consequences.


    "What more did the paper said?"


    "Oh, it said that patient zero could have the cure against the outbreak. It had survived this long and its body could have developed antibodies to fight against the unfamiliar disease."


    "That could be true. So who is patient zero?"


    "The paper said it was an eleven-year-old boy. They did not reveal the name but claimed that the boy is missing right now."


    "What do they mean by missing? He could not be dead."


    "No, he is missing, possibly taken by people who are desperate to find the cure."


    "What? Patient zero is kidnapped? That''s unbelievable!"


    "Though there were no names given, but the paper said that the boy''s disappearance had been filed in the local police station. Furthermore, it urges it readers that if they are interested in finding patient zero, they simply have to go to the station and inquired."


    "That''s crazy!"


    "And so far, there is only one missing boy in Subangdaku. We know it when we visited the police station last night."


    "You mean one of the four kids we encountered before?"


    "Yes, we bumped into them several times already. The first was at the grasslands where the meteor debris was supposedly found. Then we saw them again at the marketplace."


    "And one of them was very sick that time?"


    "Yes. Just only few days after, we saw him being healed by Loduvico."


    "And then he suddenly vanished!"


    "Vanished like the wind. There are too many coincidences here that I don''t feel things just happened in random."


    "What do you mean?"


    "I feel that eveything has been planned."


    "By who?"


    "You know who. Right now, I could only pray for the boy''s safety."


    Sonny nodded and started the car again. Patient zero was gone but with the information published on paper, it was only a matter of time before he surfaced again. But what was more frightening was the idea that more evils would be hunting the boy.....

 81 Brothers Fury

    Tonton ate his lunch hastily on Wednesday. As agreed, they would be gathering again that afternoon. After what happened to Jamie, his parents were hesitant in letting him go out of the house. Worse, the outbreak was getting more serious that he might be infected easily. But he needed to get out and meet with his friends. So after much haggling, he was permitted only for few hours and only in the afternoon. He should be back before sundown or else, he would be grounded.


    Having no choice, Tonton agreed and had to follow the rules. Last night, he called Jamie''s parents and his friend was officially declared as missing person. The news broke his heart. He was hoping that Jamie would be found or that he would be coming home, but neither happened. It was uncertain where he was but they had to do something. The Biker Brothers knew some truths and what they knew could help them find their friend.


    After lunch, he dropped by de Jesus'' residence. Jamie''s parents looked devastated and seeing them that way was unbearable so that he also wept with them. They said they already had posted and distributed posters. They could only hope that some people would call them to give them some good news. So far, there was none. According to the police, nobody saw Jamie when he left Bogart''s place. There were also no video recordings of him from the nearby establishments. It felt like a dead-end already.


    Tonton was gloomy when he left them. His sadness made him more resolved to search for their friend. He biked hurriedly, eager to see his Brothers again. True enough, there were "missing person" posters pasted in many poles and concrete walls. Yet, the posters were not similar to one another. He knew that what Jamie''s parents prepared where posters in beige color with Jamie''s face in the middle and some words below it. Other posters were light green in color with a different face. He could not read the words because he was too far and his eyeglasses were not so helpful after all. He stopped and took one of the green poster.


    "Missing: Jamie de Jesus," Tonton read the inscriptions on the poster, "Patient Zero. Look for him. He is the cure to the outbreak."


    Tonton was dumbfounded. There was no way his parents could put those things in the poster. Besides, Tonton could not understand why would Jamie was the cure. His friend only had chickenpox last week and it was Loduvico who healed him. There was somethimg fishy about the posters, as if they were meant to malign Jamie. As he kept thinking about it, anger slowly built inside his heart. What if it was all Dr. Alvarado''s doings?


    Furiously, he started pedalling his bike and within few minutes, he arrived at Kiko''s place. He was still clutching the poster and anger was still written all over his face when he called out his friend. Hurriedly, Kiko went out and approached him with a newspaper in one hand.


    "What''s that you''re bringing?" Tonton asked.


    "It''s tabloid," Kiko answered. "Haven''t you read the news this morning? I think there is an article here about Jamie. What about you? What is that you''re holding?"


    "A missing person poster," Tonton said. "But I don''t think Jamie''s parents made this. There are some bad stuff here about Jamie."


    "Same with this news article. What is written here can put Jamie in danger."


    "We better hurry up and tell Bogart."


    Kiko nodded and immediately hopped on his bike. They moved fast and reached Bogart quickly. Bogart was finishing his afternoon sandwiches when they arrived.


    "There are still several sandwiches, guys," Bogart offered. "Help yourself. Then drown it with some freshly squeezed orange juice."


    The two devoured their food and afterwards, they gathered in Bogart''s room. Bogart sensed some urgency in his friends so they quickly got down to business.


    "Both of you seem tense," Bogart opened the meeting. "Is there something wrong?"


    "Plenty, I think, "Tonton answered. "I saw these posters on the way here. Something is wrong about what is written here."


    "And this news article is also saying harmful things about Jamie," Kiko said as he opened the page where the article was. "Read this."


    The boys read the article and studied the poster. When they were done, they were all infuriated.


    "The things they wrote about Jamie are sick," Tonton commented. "They are all lies. And they could not even put the name of the writer."


    "Come on," Kiko said. "It''s tabloid. They just put anything in there and say it comes from anynomous person."


    "And this poster here," Bogart added, "it sounds similar to the article. They claim that Jamie is patient zero and he has the cure."


    Tonton: "Yeah, I think this two are connected."


    Kiko: "Both sound like asking people to find Jamie, not because they care for him but because he has the cure."


    Tonton: "That''s the sick part. It urges the people to hunt Jamie like an animal."


    Bogart: "It is really fishy that both of these come out at the same time. The article is published the moment Jamie goes missing."


    Kiko: "I agree. I looks as if they were planned."


    Tonton: "I believe they are meant to cover up something."


    Kiko: "What do you mean?"


    Tonton: "I think somebody really did kidnap Jamie and to avoid being tracked, he made it appear like people are hunting for Jamie."


    Bogart: "I get it. The more suspects, the less likely the true culprit will get caught. He could even get away with it."


    Kiko: "We won''t let him."


    Tonton: "Of course, we won''t..... We won''t let Dr. Alvarado get away with this crime."


    The two looked at him. It was clear in Tonton''s eyes that he believed that Dr. Alvarado took Jamie. They also believed the same thing and their friend''s resolve made them braver.


    Kiko: "Let''s rescue Jamie."


    Bogart: "And let''s kick Dr. Alvarado''s ass."


    Tonton: "Payback time."


    And the room was filled with fury and strong will.

 82 Sufferings of Patient Zero

    Jamie had not eaten anything yet since Monday night. However, he did not feel hungry. From time to time, his tank of dextrose was replaced with a new one so that he was still nourished. Still, he felt weak and tired from lying the entire time. He also missed the light for he was blindfolded all along. If he needed to pee or something else, he simply called out and people would assist him. Having seen nothing but darkness only, Jamie had no sense of time. He had no idea what day it was. He did not even know exactly where he was. He had somes ideas, thanks to his dreams, but he wished he was wrong.


    As time went on, the things he had been fearing was gradually becoming true. In his dreams, he saw himself in a hospital bed while people were experimenting on him. He felt it was happening. Blindfolded and strapped to a bed, people just come and go to take samples of his hair, blood, and even saliva. He felt violated but he could not do anything but scream in silence. He wanted to cry but he had to stop himself. Those people might take samples of his tears. He could not let them do as they pleased.


    One time, a man spoke to him. He wanted to know what his ailment was and how he was healed. He told the truth - that he had chickenpox and that he was healed when Loduvico touched him.


    "Did you take any medicines?" the man had asked him.


    "Yes, the school clinic gave me prescriptions which my dad bought."


    "So could it be that the medicines heal you and not Loduvico?"


    It was at that moment that Jamie became hesitant. But what if he was really cured by the medicines and not by Loduvico? And yet, he felt powers coming from Loduvico''s touch. Loduvico even had dreams like his and his friends which he wanted to preach but could not. He wanted to believe Loduvico one hundred percent but he was beginning to doubt.


    Jamie was torn in separate directions. The man was torturing his mind and trying to destroy his faith. Though that interview with the man was brutal, it enabled him to confirm what he had been suspecting. The man was Dr. Alvarado. He had heard his voice before and the sound of the old man talking to him and Dr. Alvarado''s were similar, if not the same. They had the same accent, intonation, and even pauses. He was certain it was Dr. Alvarado. Their encounter last Sunday was not coincidence. It was planned all along. The doctor''s smiles were nothing but warning to him. Thinking of Dr. Alvarado filled him with anger. How could he be so evil?


    Whenever he dozed to sleep, Jamie prayed that he would dream again. Maybe in his dreams he would find the way to get out of this prison. Yet, he had no dreams so far. In fact, his sleep was always sound and relaxing. He suspected they had placed something in his water or medicines so that he would easily fall to sleep. And thinking about his sufferings also made him sleep more. It was as if sleep was his only relief....


    From the tinted glass window, Dr. Alvarado and Morgan watched as the child slept. They pitied him but he needed to endure everything. They had to break him so he must be strong enough.


    "Did you find out anything more?" Dr. Alvarado asked.


    "Sadly, there is none," Morgan answered in his usual emotionless monotone. "I think he is honest."


    "We drugged him so whatever comes out of his mouth would always be truth."


    "Yes Sir, that''s true."


    "Well, I had fun talking to him last night. It was just a simple chickenpox that got him. And yet, he firmly believes it was Loduvico who healed him."


    "He is second guessing, Sir. I think he is slowly breaking apart."


    "Is that right, Morgan?" Dr. Alvarado asked and then chuckled. "I like that. Good news would always cheer me up. How about his disappearance? Are things happening according to plan?"


    "Yes, Sir. The tabloid published the article already. You still have the editors by the neck so that they easily obliged when I made the request. They even made it sound more urgent."


    "I like that. People will look after patient zero, believing he has the cure. With many people on his tail, nobody would suspect it was me all along."


    "Exactly, Sir. To make it more intriguing, I spread some malicious posters all over town so that those who missed the newspaper article would still be informed."


    "Good job, Morgan. That was not part of the plan but I loved it."


    Silence. The two men watched as Jamie was crying while asleep. Quickly, the men inside the room took a vial and catched his tears.


    "Well, we have to be sure," Dr. Alvarado said. "We need to do some tests on him to be certain that he is really just an ordinary kid."


    "Yes, Sir. The results of the latest tests are in but there was nothing remarkable."


    "So there is nothing special about this child?"


    "I think so. But we still need to break him until he is convinced that Loduvico did not heal him."


    "Make sure you do that, Morgan."


    "Aye aye, Sir."


    They turned around and walked to the next room. Before they entered, Dr. Alvarado stopped and grinned.


    "Morgan, we need some drama for this outbreak."


    "Uh-huh. You want something more dramatic?"


    "Yes, Morgan. I want to see more people cry. Maybe, it will also be more interesting if they cry while celebrating."


    "Cry and celebrate?"


    "Yes, Morgan. What could happen that will make people cry and celebrate at the same time?"


    "Death?" Morgan answered after thinking hard.


    "Oh, really? We have plenty of deaths already."


    "But a hero''s death will be different."


    "I see."


    "Someone has to die then."


    "Or at least one must die."


    "We have plenty to choose from, Sir."


    Dr. Alvarado laughed loudly, his voice echoing in the soundproof facility. Morgan remained expressionless, but deep inside, he enjoyed watching his boss enjoying himself....

 83 Sufferings of the Healer

    His senses felt numb, almost to the point that he could feel nothing at all. He was tortured, much like how Jesus was treated and made to suffer before being crucified. So how he wished he would be crucified sooner than later so that the pains and torments would be ended.


    The thought played constantly in Loduvico''s mind and heart. He wanted to end his suffering but he believed he should not be giving up now. He persevered long enough and relief would come soon. Through death? It was possible. He wanted that, but deep inside him, he wished to live.


    Loduvico did not know where he was taken to. He lost consciousness after the men beat him up. When he woke up, he was already blindfolded so he saw nothing but darkness. He was strapped to some metal frames. Though he was chained, his legs and arms felt numb from standing up. He would have collapsed if not for the metal shackles that held him. Where the metal and skin touched, it was painful, as if the metal had buried deep into his flesh.


    Loduvico had no idea how long he had been suffering. Hours? Days? No clue because he had not seen the light since he was abducted. He also felt cold because his clothes had been torn. He felt that only small fragments of his clothes were clinging to his body. Or were those his clothes? Nonetheless, there was some fabric touching his skin, thankfully not on the wounds caused by the men.


    Yes, his body were covered in wounds. When he gained consciousness, he was beaten again while chained on the frame. He had no idea why but the men inflicted pain on him repeatedly, a pain so horrible that he lost his senses again.


    When he woke up, an old man''s voice spoke to him. It was the first time that he heard someone said some words to him. It would have brought him happiness if the words were only kind and nice. But no, they were evil and malicious. The voice brought chills to his aching heart.


    "Are you Loduvico?"


    Loduvico was startled when he first heard the voice. There was ice-cold tingleness to it.


    "Yes," he answered with his hoarse broken voice. The torment he had suffered made his voice weak and coarse.


    "Are you the one they say is the healer?"


    He nodded.


    "Is it true that you have healing powers?"


    Loduvico nodded again.


    "How did you have such power?"


    "It''s a long story," he struggled to say.


    "I have plenty of time. I can listen to you for hours."


    "It is hard to speak."


    "But you have to speak."


    Loduvico shook his head in fear. Tears formed on his eyes but he stopped them from falling.


    "I said speak!" the voice roared.


    Loduvico narrated his story in agony. Every word he uttered sent pain to his lips, arm, legs, and wounds. Speaking was a torture. After what seemed like hours, Loduvico had finally finished telling his story.


    "So an angel descended from heaven and gave you powers to heal?"


    Loduvico nodded.


    "And the angel and the voices came to you on the night that the meteor crashed in Subangdaku?"


    He nodded again.


    "Could it be that what you saw was not an angle but actually the meteor?"


    "But there were voices. I believe it was an angel."


    Pak! Loduvico was slapped in the face. He was stunned, unable to believe that what seemed to be an old man could slap him hard in the face. His cheek must have been cut for he felt warm blood dripped.


    "Were you certain of what you saw?"


    "I am."


    Slap.


    "Tell me about the healing miracles you have done," the man said with a hint of anger in his voice. "Right from the beginning."


    "It''s..... another long.... story."


    Slap.


    "Like I said, I have so much time."


    Again, Loduvico shared his story in agony, more painful this time as exhaustion and pain took its toll.


    "So you just touched the sick and they get healed?"


    "Yes."


    "How come you can do that?"


    "It''s a gift.... From the angels and the voices."


    Slap.


    "You are a mad man, Loduvico. Take some rest now. I hope you will have some senses when you wake up."


    Suddenly, Loduvico was beaten again until he fell asleep. From time to time, some people took blood from his veins, measured his heartbeat, placed some wires on his head, checked his mouth and hands, and other things he could barely understand and remember. He felt like an animal being experimented in a laboratory. His entire body already felt sore whenever he woke up.....


    After seeing Jamie slept, Dr. Alvarado and Morgan entered the room that imprisoned Loduvico. The healer was sound asleep as they watched him through a tinted glass partition.


    "Is he still alive?" Dr. Alvarado asked.


    "Yes, Sir," Morgan answered coldly. "We made sure that whatever was done to him, he would remain alive and breathing."


    "Maybe not for long," Dr. Alvarado said and laughed out loud. Only the two of them were inside the room so he was confident. "What have you found out about him so far?"


    "Nothing extraordinary. He is like any ordinary person. There was nothing in his blood and his entire system that makes him special."


    "So do you believe his healing miracles?"


    "I don''t believe in miracles, Sir. But the people do. I watched him heal people in the crowd and it was believable."


    "But no science could explain how he does it."


    "Yes."


    "So his story could be true? That an angel gave him some powers?"


    "I don''t know, Sir. But based on his confession, he received the gift the night the second alien came to Subangdaku."


    "Yes, the alien. Are you saying that it was the alien who gifted him the power to heal?"


    "It is a possibility."


    "But it is not only him who came to preach on the streets. There is the other one."


    "Yes, it''s Mang Tomas."


    "So there are two people who the alien or aliens blessed with some extraordinary skills. Superpowers, perhaps."


    "Not only them. There could be more like them."


    Dr. Alvarado stopped and thought hard. It was a big possibility. Morgan must be right, as always.


    "We need to find the first alien. He holds the key, not Loduvico."


    "How about the second one?"


    "The government has it. It is beyond our reach now. But the first alien may still be here in Subangdaku. We must be the first ones to lay hands on it."


    "What do we do about Loduvico?"


    "This outbreak needs some sacrifice."


    "Oh yes, a hero''s death will be dramatic in this crisis."


    "Yes, someone has to die."


    Dr. Alvarado and Morgan watched Loduvico one last time before they turned and left. At the same time, Loduvico stirred and roused. He had not heard the voices recently. But now, it spoke to him again. And it was terrifying.


    It said: "Someone has to die."

 84 Sufferings of the Frontliner

    Tara felt more sick when she woke up on Wednesday. There was terrible pain inside her head. It was as if a hand drill was boring her skull. To ease the pain, she took an ibuprofen right after she ate a meager breakfast.


    Besides her headaches, Tara felt also numbness and weakness all over her body. She was too tired to move, that taking a single step would summon a lot of her strength. She also felt slightly feverish and the tightness in her chest made her sufferings even more unbearable.


    Yet, Tara must still report for duty. She called Dr. Alvarado in his office the other night to consider giving her a leave because of her ailments. It was Morgan who answered the call and he was coldly merciless with his words - she must work even if she is sick because the isolation camp needs more people. She pleaded but he was stubborn. If she would not obey, the doctor might request for revocation of her employment and even of her license due to non-compliance and defiance of orders. Hearing Morgan''s heartless reply broke her spirit. But she must persevere or everything she had worked hard would be put to waste. She could not give up now.


    Tara successfully commuted to work despite her ailments. As usual, the isolation camp was busy when she arrived. Cecilia quicky ran up to her with a caring smile.


    "How are you?" Cecilia asked.


    "I am not really fine. I still feel very sick."


    "I can see that. You looked very tired."


    "Yes, I am. I hope I can get through the day."


    "Of course, you can. You are a strong girl, Tara."


    Cecilia gave her a big hug which warmed Tara. She never thought that the older woman would be concerned about her. But she liked it very much. Plus her embrace was very sincere. She would miss that about her.


    "Does what happened to you still give you nightmares?"


    "What do you mean?"


    "The assault done to you last Monday night."


    "Oh, I totally forgot about it. I am really too sick that I could not think straight."


    "Well, if you need some caring and help, I am just around here. Don''t be shy to ask."


    Tara smiled in response. She wanted to cry but she held herself.


    "Okay, girl. Go now," Cecilia said. "Get dressed and prep up. The camp is a circus."


    Sluggishly, Tara donned her nurse''s garb. All through the day, she worked absentmindedly. She missed giving the correct medicines and dosages to the patients. Nobody caught her so she just went on. By afternoon, her body could not take it any longer that she collapsed on the ground. Immediately, the other nurses to her to the school clinic and let her rest. Cecilia watched over her but quickly left when Dr. Alvarado arrived. It was also the same moment that Tara woke up.


    "Hello, Tara," Dr. Alvarado greeted her with a mocking smile, his face mask sticking below his jaw. "How are you?"


    "I really don''t feel good, Doctor."


    "I see. Sorry about that but the camp really needs hardworking and brilliant people like you. Sorry if you have to go through this but Subangdaku need you."


    "I understand, Doctor. I am just really sick."


    "Don''t worry, you will be fine. You are a strong woman."


    "I can take a leave tomorrow, right? The new staffs will be here by then."


    "Sure, but only in the afternoon, Tara. They will still not be here in the morning."


    "What? I will still report for work in the morning?"


    "Yes. Just a little sacrifice, Tara. Afterwards, you can take a long break."


    "You really mean it, Doctor?"


    "Of course, Tara. You can have a long rest after. And as long as you want to."


    Tara smiled weakly. She was not sure if she should be happy or not.


    "Take these supplements, Tara. It will help you have some energy."


    Dr. Alvarado gave her small pills and Tara gulped them down with a glass of water. She was relieved that the doctor still cared for her.


    "You can still rest for a while, Tara. You can go back to the camp once you feel a little better. And be well quickly. We miss the old vibrant Tara."


    Dr. Alvarado then left her and went straight to his white car. He saw Cecilia and the rest of the medical team along the way but he did not stop to greet them. He simply nodded and walked on. Morgan was already waiting for him in the driver''s seat when he got inside the car.


    "Is she really sick, Sir?" Morgan inquired when the doctor was seated.


    "Very sick, Morgan."


    "Shall we go, Sir?"


    "Not yet."


    Dr. Alvarado waited until Tara came out of the clinic and joined the other nurses. She was walking tiredly like a zombie.


    "She looks dead already."


    "Wait for a while."


    Seconds passed and Tara became slightly energetic. She walked straighter and seemed to move a little faster.


    "It is working already," Dr. Alvarado commented.


    "What do you mean, Sir?"


    "Your suggestion. I gave her the drugs."


    "Oh, she should be fine for a little while."


    "What exactly will happen again, Morgan?"


    "She will feel better. But once the true effects of the drugs kick in, she will feel the complications."


    "Poor, Tara, victim of dengue fever."


    Dr. Alvarado laughed so hard that the entire car shook as well.


    "Do you think she will survive it, Morgan?"


    "She can if her body is strong enough."


    "Someone must die. Right now, we do not yet know who is the one. Or perhaps, who they are."


    "It''s a gamble, Sir. A game of life and death for them."


    Dr. Alvarado laughed again as Morgan listened in silence.....

 85 Inauguration Plans

    Morgan started the car and they moved out of the isolation camp. It was already afternoon and though the traffic was still light, he drove slowly. The doctor hated the humps and bumps on the roads in the district. Besides, his boss was able to think more clearly if their ride was smooth.


    "Is everything ready tomorrow, Morgan?" Dr. Alvarado asked after a while.


    "Yes, Sir," Morgan answered. "I called the program coordinator early this morning and she said everything is all set already."


    "Are you certain?"


    "Yes, Sir. I looked into all the details and they are all good to go already. I also verified them with the decorators and suppliers."


    "It is a white theme, Morgan?"


    "Of course, Sir. I know you hated colors."


    "And white means purity and cleanliness. I like what it represents. How about the food?"


    "The coordinator already know the foods you like from your previous events. She made sure they would all be served."


    "How about for the guests? The food must suit them, not only me."


    "Our people made contact with them and food was one of the main things they inquired."


    "That''s good. I want their favorites to be served. If they enjoyed the food, then it will be easy for them to patronize me."


    "That''s right. They will remember you for your fondness and generosity."


    "Are all the important guests coming?"


    "Not everyone. The mayor and his councilors will be coming, except for Mr. Salvador, committee head on waste management and demolitions."


    "Well, he is not that important anyway."


    "Representatives of the Health Office will also be present. They could not miss the opening of your cutting-edge medical facility."


    "How about the Science Center?"


    "Yes, they will be present as well."


    "Good. I want everyone to know that the Silverio Alvarado Medical Suites have everything people need for their health, especially that there is an on-going outbreak."


    "Some guests also requested to see the research laboratories."


    "No problem, they can see all the rooms. Except for the basement area, of course."


    "I think they are more interested with the research facility. That part is what really convinced the mayor and the officials of the urgency of finishing the place."


    "I know. So is our people ready?"


    "Yes, Sir. Since Monday, they already started working and sort of studying the outbreak. They already have some data and analysis of existing cases."


    "That''s nice to hear. Just let them study this make-believe outbreak."


    "I am also watching them closely. They might stumble upon something that could endanger our plans."


    "Yes, you should do that. How about the clinics? Will they be occupied by tomorrow. Not one doctor was present there."


    "A few of them will be opened tomorrow. I talked with the doctors and some started occupying their respective spaces today."


    "How about the basement? Is it still safe?"


    "Of course, Sir. Only our most trusted people has access to the area, and to what is happening there. But for tomorrow, only a few of them will remain in the basement. It would be too risky and suspicious if everyone would be there."


    "Glad to know that. I could really count on you, Morgan."


    By then, they were about to enter Alvarado''s residence. Like their usual routine, Morgan opened the gate and drove the car to the back of the house and near the doctor''s office at home.


    "Are the media people informed about this?" Dr. Alvarado asked when they had parked.


    "Yes, Sir. Every news outlet in TV, radio, and print were invited to the event."


    "That''s great, I want the inauguration to make a huge buzz."


    "Yes, Sir, I made sure tomorrow''s opening will stir the district."


    "See to it, Morgan, that the opening will be a big news in the afternoon. Well, the morning will be quite boring as preparations will be done. Any suggestion to make the morning more interesting?"


    "Well, another big news will intriguing."


    "Like what, Morgan?"


    "Like some death because of the outbreak?"


    "You are one mean man, Morgan. But I think I like that idea. It will make the inauguration more urgent and meaningful. So who is it gonna be?"


    "Some patient in the isolation camp?"


    "Don''t be silly, Morgan. I know what you mean!"


    Dr. Alvarado laughed hard until he cried. He was enjoying himself. In fact, everything that was happening made him happy as they happened according to plan. He was still laughing when he got out of the car.


    Meanwhile, news about the inauguration also reached Estella and Sonny. They were going to the market area when they received a paged message from their news chief.


    "The opening of the Silverio Alvarado Medical Suites will be tomorrow," she told Sonny. "Chief says we should cover the event."


    "What time?" Sonny asked.


    "At five in the afternoon. There will be a short program before cutting the ribbon. Then dinner will be served afterwards."


    "Is the opening of the facility really that important?"


    "Maybe not during ordinary times. But there is currently an outbreak so the facility is essentially a game-changer."


    "And if we think about it, establishing the facility was done so fast."


    "Yes, that''s really amazing. Dr. Alvarado must have pulled the right strings."


    "And many, as well. Putting up that kind of establishment is a rigorous process but it took only a week''s time for Dr. Alvarado to do so."


    "The power of connections."


    Sonny parked their car in an empty street.


    "Shall we get dressed for the event?" Sonny asked. "There might be a party afterwards."


    Estella laughed and slapped him lightly on the shoulder.


    "The market looks lonely," Sonny commented.


    "Then it must be true," Estella said. "That Loduvico did not heal anyone since yesterday."


    "They say he is sick."


    "Is he really sick?"


    "What do you mean?"


    "I don''t know, Sonny. I just feel something''s not right about it."


    "Your journalist''s guts are at work again."


    "I hope I am wrong."


    "You are seldom wrong, Estella. What do you feel is happening?"


    "The boy is gone and people might be searching after him. Then Loduvico is not also seen here. I just feel these two things are connected."


    "Two missing persons.... Could their absence be connected to the outbreak?"


    "Or to someone."


    Estella dared not mention any names but she believed Sonny knew who she was referring to.


    "Come on, let''s go inside," she changed the topic. "We have to talk to some people."


    Carefully, they went inside the market area and did some interviews....

 86 Brothers Plans

    The three Brothers made a resolve to save Jamie at all costs. It was almost two days that he had disappearead, and three days since Tonton and Kiko had last seen him. They were worried for his safety, and at the same time mad at Dr. Alvarado who they suspected masterminded the abduction of their friend. Though there were still no updates from the police, the Brothers believe that Jamie was deliberately kidnapped.


    "So how do we save Jamie from Dr. Alvarado?" Kiko asked.


    "And where is he?" Tonton added. "We have no idea where he is."


    "This is much harder than we thought," Bogart commented.


    The afternoon was already getting late and Kiko and Tonton were supposed to be home before dark. Yet, the boys still had no clear plans how to rescue their friend.


    "I think we need some food," Bogart suggested. "We can''t think with an empty stomach."


    "I agree to that," Kiko answered. "I am quite hungry already."


    "I want some pizza," Tonton voiced out.


    "No problem," Bogart said. "We have some in the ref so it''s cold."


    "Let''s heat it up," Kiko beamed.


    Immediately, the boys stood up and went out of Bogart''s room. There were only the three of them in the house since Bogart''s parents went out earlier for some errands. They helped themselves with the pizza and some extra cold iced tea. Bogart then opened the TV as they enjoyed their afternoon snacks. It was still a commercial break but then a news anchor suddenly cut the advertisement.


    "For our breaking news," the anchor said, "the Silverio Alvarado Medical Suites will be inaugurated tomorrow. The ceremony will be graced by many local officials and government dignitaries, particularly the town mayor..."


    The boys listened carefully to the news until the end. Once the ads resumed, they sighed in wonderment.


    "So the facility was still finished despite what happened," Tonton commented, referring to the damage they caused when they raided the place last Friday.


    "It''s not impossible," Kiko said. "Too many people know Dr. Alvarado who surely helped him in the construction."


    "Even the mayor is his friend," Bogart added. "So it will not be surprising if he succeeds in opening the facility."


    "I just hope that the doctor will only succeed in that matter," Tonton said. "If he has evil plans for Jamie, I wish he will fail."


    "So are we," Kiko chimed in.


    The air was momentarily filled with gloom. Mentioning their friend''s name could make them sad already.


    "What do we do now?" Tonton asked helplessly. "Where do we find him?"


    "Let us think where Dr. Alvarado could have taken him," Kiko suggested.


    Tonton: "Dr. Alvarado must have a hideout where he could have taken Jamie."


    Kiko: "Surely not in his house. His family would know."


    Tonton: "Does he have other houses?"


    Kiko: "Nothing that I know of. I asked my brother Jackson about what he know of Dr. Alvarado and he said that he is a respectable person. He is a known scientist in his office and a regular churchgoer."


    Tonton: "He could not have hidden Jamie in his office or at the church. Any businesses?"


    Kiko: "Jackson never mentioned anything. Besides, he would know if Dr. Alvarado has some businesses in the district."


    Tonton: "It seems we reach the dead end already."


    The two became silent, thinking of other possibilities.


    "You seem so quiet, Bogart," Tonton said. "Are you with us?"


    Bogart: "Of course. I just believe it''s not the dead end yet. I think I know where Jamie is now."


    Kiko: "Where?"


    Bogart pointed the TV with his pouted lips.


    Kiko: "What? In the TV?"


    Bogart: "Are you nuts? How would Jamie get inside the TV?"


    Kiko: "Then where? You are confusing me with your gesture!"


    Bogart: "You two were talking about places related to Dr. Alvarado. Well, we just heard one from the news."


    Tonton: "You mean his new facility - the Silverio Alvarado Medical Suites?"


    Bogart: "What else?"


    Bogart was beaming with his excited I-know-right and I-know-what-to-do smirk. The boys had seen that smile before, usually when he was being witty and cheeky.


    Kiko: "Are you serious that Jamie could be hidden there?"


    Bogart: "I think so. If Dr. Alvarado wants to do something to Jamie, it''s the best place where he can do so."


    Tonton: "Bogart could be right. Remember Jamie''s dream?"


    The two nodded and thought hard.


    Kiko: "He told us that in his dream, he was being experimented in what looked like a hospital."


    Tonton: "Yes, and it is now becoming a frightening reality for him. When we visited the place last Friday, I had a vision and I could see how the facility would look like once it is done. I saw a research laboratory where anything can be done to the test subjetc, including humans. I agree with Bogart, he could have been taken there."


    Kiko: "Exactly where in the facility is the research laboratory?"


    Tonton: "It is in the upper level. It is also supposed to be a secret area in the facility."


    Kiko: "Then that''s it. A secret chamber where Dr. Alvarado could do his evil plans. I am now convinced of what you two were saying."


    Bogart: "You also had a similar dream, Ton. Will you also be kidnapped and tortured in the secret chamber?"


    Kiko: "Oh woah, that is too insensitive of you, Bogart. I can''t imagine Jamie being tortured."


    Bogart: "Oh sorry, but it could be possible. Jamie saw it in his dream."


    Tonton: "Yes, it is. But I pray he is not being tortured or experimented right now. As for me, I do not know yet if it will also happen to me. It could happen to the two of you, too."


    Kiko: "Yes, an evil man like Dr. Alvarado could do anything he wishes. I am so mad now."


    Bogart: "Me as well. I want to punch Dr. Alvarado."


    Tonton: "I am very furious, too."


    Tonton clinched his fist and unable to contain himself, tears began streaming from his eyes. Jamie had been his best friend since they were babies and it made his heart ache to think that his friend was being inflicted with sorrow and sufferings. Bogart and Kiko saw Tonton''s tears and they could not also help but weep.


    Soon, their emotions subsided and they went back to Bogart''s room to make some plans.


    Bogart: "So how do we rescue Jamie from the facility? There will be an event there tomorrow afternoon."


    Kiko: "I think we can use that to our advantage."


    Bogart: "What do you mean?"


    Kiko: "There will be many people in the place. While everybody is busy, we will sneak inside and get Jamie."


    Bogart: "Will we not get caught?"


    Kiko: "Not if we will be very careful."


    Bogart: "Can we really do this? We are just kids."


    Tonton: "No, we will not be coming alone. We will call for backups."


    The two looked at Tonton who smiled mischievously back at them. They spent the remainder of the afternoon finalizing their plans. When they were done, they separated with satisfaction. Tonton and Kiko went home after dropping by quickly at someone''s house while Bogart contemplated with what to do with his assignment that night....

 87 Mysterious Calls

    Estella had just finished her late dinner at the news station. She was famished and her large bowl of rice with toppings was almost not enough, if not for the large glass of ice cold Coke that she chased it down with. Estella burped her contentment and her colleagues in the office who heard it saluted her.


    "That''s explosive, Estella," one said.


    "As explosive as your exclusive news," another added.


    "Did somebody record that?"


    And everyone in the room laughed, including Estella herself. She was enjoying their company, bringing her a much needed relief after a very long day. What they said were true. Estella delivered another awe-inspiring report during the evening news program. Through Sonny''s help, she was able to gave her audience a detailed coverage about what were being done inside the isolation camp, including the hardships the medical team had to face each day, as well as the pathetic conditions of the patient.


    To add more interest, she made comparison about how people were healed through Loduvico''s miracles. The footage they showed in the program was astonishing as the large crowd of Loduvico''s followers queued while waiting to be touched by their idol. Before her report ended, Estella revealed that Loduvico had not been healing the sick for two days already. It was not because he was sick but because he was gone. His absence was confirmed by the interviews they did that afternoon.


    Estella sighed and slumped on her chair. She rested her eyes and did a power nap. When she had woken up, everyone in her office had already left, leaving her alone. Immediately, she packed up her things. She was about to leave when her telephone suddenly rang. She felt something fishy about the call so we she let it ring and ring. Yet, the caller was not giving up so after a few whiles, she answered the call.


    "Who is this?" she asked.


    "I know where the boy is."


    "What do you mean?"


    "He may not be safe right how but I know where he is."


    "Tell me."


    "He is inside the Silverio Alvarado Medical Suites."


    Before Estella could make another inquiry, the call was suddenly ended. Confused, Estella stared at the phone for quite a long time.....


    *****


    Meanwhile, Tara was feeling sick again. The doctor had given her some supplements when be dropped by the isolation camp in the afternoom. At first, she was feeling good - her energy came back, her visions were clear, and her muscle pains were gone. But when she came home, her body felt hot and exhausted. She was about to go inside her room when the telephone rang.


    "Be careful," the voice said and quickly hang up.


    Tara was startled. The voice kept playing inside her mind so that she had a restless sleep that night....


    *****


    Loduvio forced himself to sleep soundly that night. Sleeping became a struggle for him as his wounds and sores were too painful. Just a small movement could trigger unbearable pain.


    After for what seem like hours0, Loduvico finally slept. Almost immediately, his dreams came again. Loduvico was delighted. He searched around his dreams, and finally, he saw someone in a distance. He ran up to the figure.


    *****


    After spending the previous night at the local police station, Mang Tomas was tired and terrified. He went home right away after being released. He laid on his bed until he fell asleep and dreamed.


    "Mang Tomas, please help me," Loduvico yelled from a distance.


    The man was running towards him. As he got closer, Mang Tomas saw the wounds covering his arms, legs, and neck. He was horrified to see him that way.


    "Please find me."


    *****


    Dr. Alvarado watched his wife sleeping in their bed. He loved her so much, but not enough to make him tell her about any of his plans.


    "You must stay innocent, my love," he whispered.


    He walked towards a mirror and stared at himself.


    "You will be the greatest man in Subangdaku," he whispered again and laugher silently. .


    ****


    In another house, a young girl was having difficulty sleeping. She shared the bed with her mother. After a while, her mother stirred and asked her.


    "It''s already late. Can''t you sleep?"


    The girl shook her head and embraced her mother.


    "Someone is gonna die," she told her mother.


    "What are you talking about?"


    She did not answer, she just cried.....

 88 Her Undying Services

    Tara was in a lot of pain when she woke up on Thursday morning. She thought that she would get better the following day, but clearly, she did not. When she took the supplements that Dr. Alvarado gave her yesterday, the pain subsided so she believed that she was cured already. But that night, the sickness came back again and tormented her. If not for the sleeping pills she took, she would not have slept all night.


    Though aching, Tara smiled through her suffering and got up with a renewed spirit. She could not let sickness defeat her. For the last few days, she made a resolve to be stronger and smarter. Immediately, she went to the mirror and looked at herself. Her eyes had shrunken and darkness had formed below the sockets. Her face was pale and stress was written all over.


    "Girl, you did not apply your night cream last night," she said to herself, "so you are not as beautiful as before."


    The truth was Tara felt ugly. She looked deathly sick but then again, she could not let her condition took away her vibrant disposition. She was a happy human, full of life and energy. This outbreak, which they caused, would not betray her. Besides, Dr. Alvarado assured her and Cecilia that they would be properly taken care of during this crisis. She would simply have to ask Dr. Alvarado for more of that supplements so her recovery would continue. With that hopeful idea in mind, Tara summoned all her strength and started her day. After a long warm shower, she passed by her favorite fastfood chain and ate a hearty breakfast.


    "Wow, this is the most delicious breakfast ever!" she said to herself. After realizing she had eaten a lot, she sighed and whispered, "Girl, are you starving?"


    She laughed and finished her food. She was still early when she arrived at the isolation camp and she was all smiles as she greeted everyone. Her smile became wider when she saw Cecilia who had already become a dear friend to her. Despite her cold exterior, the older woman actually had a good soul.


    "I''m glad to see you," Cecilia said to her. "I really thought you could not make it today."


    "This is just a sickness," she answered. "I am Tara and this would not bring me down. I will remain beautiful and bubbly."


    Cecilia laughed.


    "I miss that about you. Don''t worry, you will always be beautiful in my eyes."


    "Is Dr. Alvarado around?"


    "I have not seen him yet. Why?"


    "I was hoping I could ask him for more of those supplements he gave me yesterday. I felt a lot better when I took them."


    "And you don''t felt any better now?"


    "Honestly, my ailments came back last night. Until now, I still don''t feel well."


    "I can see that. But you act brave and strong, so I did not mind telling you how sick you look."


    "Do I really look bad?"


    Cecilia nodded.


    "Well, Dr. Alvarado could give me some of those things and I will be alright again."


    "Are you sure of that?"


    "Of course, Cecilia," Tara said defensively. "Dr. Alvarado promised to take care of us."


    "I hope so."


    Cecilia reached out and lightly brushed Tara''s hair. She was startled when she felt her head. Tara was burning hot. She wanted to tell her about it but she stopped herself. It could destroy her spirits.


    "Thanks, Cecilia. You felt like a mother, if not an older sister, to me."


    Cecilia smiled back.


    "I will be reporting for only a half day today. My replacement will arrive this afternoon."


    "That''s good to know. You should take some rest. You need it so much."


    "Oh, before I forgot, I brought you a burger. I got it from Jennie''s. It''s chicken."


    Tara reached into her bag and gave Cecilia the packed chicken burger. She was touched as she did not expect such a sweet gesture from Tara.


    "Thank you, Tara. You don''t have to do this."


    "It''s a gift. You are a friend to me."


    They embraced and shared a few laughs. Then they went separately to their respective stations. After changing into a nurse''s outfit, Tara immediately reported to the doctor in-charge. She visited several patients and attended to her needs. As always, there was plenty of work that needed to be done in the isolation camp. Despite her aches, Tara did them all with a strong heart and will. Rest would be coming in the afternoon, plus some remedies from Dr. Alvarado. From time to time, she looked for him until one nurse told him that the doctor might not be visiting the camp that day.


    "Why do you think so?" Tara asked her colleague.


    "Dr. Alvarado would be busy for the opening of his medical facility today," he answered.


    Tara''s face went blank.


    "Haven''t you heard?" When Tara still looked clueless, he added, "It''s in the news."


    Tara''s spirit was momentarily crashed. She really wanted to see Dr. Alvarado but the possibility seemed nil upon hearing the news. As she continued her work in the camp, she tried lifting her spirit up but no amount of will could remove her discouragement.


    Noon finally came and the new nurses arrived. The sight of them partly elated Tara. Hurriedly, she took her things and asked permission to leave. Along the way to the school gate, she saw Cecilia and ran up to her. To her surprise, Tara hugged her tight for a long while. Cecilia could feel that Tara was still burning hot.


    "I''m finally having my leave," Tara said excitedly. "I won''t be seeing you for a while."


    "I will miss you," Cecilia answered with a slight tremor in her voice. "Rest a lot. And stay beautiful."


    "As always, Cecilia."


    They gave each other a quick embrace and separated. The sun was blazing and the extreme heat made Tara feel terribly uncomfortable. Since it was noon, she found no buses passing by the school for nearly twenty minutes. She decided to walk to the nearest bus stop, hoping to find a faster ride there.


    Tara felt dizzy as she walked under the angry sun. By and by, she struggled to breath as her chest tightened. Her visions began to blur as she walked unsteadily. She walked and walked until she unconsciously crossed a lonely street. But then, her senses were jarred by the horn of a speeding truck which shattered the noontime silence. The truck tried to avoid hitting her. Unfortunately for Tara, it was already too late.....

 89 A Heros Death

    The driver managed to step on the brakes but the truck continued to move forward. When it stopped, it already hit Tara strongly. The sudden brake and the collision created a loud creepy sound. The impact threw Tara in the air and once she hit the concrete ground, she rolled and rolled until she bumped into a post.


    A number of people saw what happened and immediately rushed to the scene. Tara was lying unconsciously on the ground. Her body was covered with fresh blood. Her face was hardly recognizable because of the sticking blood and hair. While most apprehended the truck driver, somone called an ambulance which quickly responded and went to the scene. Nobody touched Tara''s body for fear of inflicting more harm than good. Since it was an excruciatingly hot noon, her blood almost dried out when help came. For everyone who saw her, she was as good as dead already. Immediately, the response team expertly lifted Tara and delivered her to the nearest hospital.


    Tara was still unconscious when she was rushed to the emergency room. A number of doctors automatically attended to her barely breathing body. Though pained, Tara was aware of what was happening around her. She could not move any muscle but that did not mean she was ignorant of anything. She knew she was hit by a truck. She knew she was in a hospital and that several hands were touching her aching body, desperate to revive their patient.


    "I will live and love, guys," Tara''s mind spoke.


    She wanted to shout those words but she could not do so. She even wanted to smile but movement was too impossible. She wanted to cry also but she could only do it in her mind. Yes, her mind was still functioning and she believed that being able to think in this situation could mean she would survive.


    "I must not be defeated," she convinced herself.


    Tara still wanted to live. She still wanted to smell flowers and enjoy the fresh air of Subangdaku. Though she wanted to get out of the district and explore life beyond the rural community, Tara knew she would eventually come back to Subangdaku. She was born and raised here and the familiarity of life in the district would always bring here safety and serenity.


    Besides Subangdaku, she must live for her family. Her old father was ailing and despite being burdened, she always saw to it that his medical needs were provided. So when Dr. Alvarado approached her and gave her the offer, she quickly accepted it. It was an offer she could hardly refuse. She needed plenty of cash and the payment from the doctor was more than enough to pay for the medicines and other bills.


    "I love you, Pa," Tara''s mind shouted.


    Tara had always been closer to her dad than to her mom. She was a daddy''s girl and yet, her mother adored her always. Tara had no siblings so she was used to being spoiled while growing up. They were not rich but her parents always managed to give her everything she demanded.


    "Thank you, Pa and Ma."


    Memories then flooded, particularly those she most cherished. There were random moments with her parents - her graduations, debut, auditions, and many more. Such nostalgic memories overwhelmed her that sadness overtook all her emotions. Her heart suddenly beat hard while she felt a knot closed around her throat, suffocating her. She gasped for air.


    Minutes passed and the tightness in her chest worsened as her blood thickened and her lungs struggled to take in air. Though only in her head, Tara felt the pain that she screamed hard.


    "I want to live. Please let me live."


    Tara begged and wept. She wanted to see the world and experience life more. She wanted to see beaches and dive with the dolphins. She wanted to take a bite of the best burger in town, courtesy of Jennie''s. She wanted to enjoy kisses from her Prince Charming. She wanted to have kids of her own, preferably two lovely daughters. She wanted to see the sun again.


    Yet, her body was losing the will to live. Her breathing slowed down. Her arms and legs stiffened, panicking the responding medical personnel. They did things again to her body in order to revive her.


    Light began to dim in Tara''s vision. At the last minute, she saw a thread, a golden thread. It glowed as light slowly vanished. It sparkled through the dimness. It was beautiful. She reached out but it was too far from her.


    "Take me," her mind spoke one last time.


    Instantly, the golden thread snapped and everything around her turned dark. Tara''s muscles relaxed as heat slowly dissipated from her body. The doctors did few more actions but Tara was frigid. She was not anymore responding. By one in the afternoon, Tara was declared dead.


    News about Tara''s death spread to the people in the hospital. Everyone believed that she had been a great nurse. She was hardworking, diligent, and selfless, that despite being sick, she continued to gave her services at the isolation camp.


    "I look up to her," a girl nurse commented. "Imagine the sacrifices she took just to help at the camp."


    "This outbreak is very alarming now," added another nurse. "She is the first medical professional to die in this crisis."


    "She is a hero for me."


    "Indeed, she is."


    The news was passed on until it reached the isolation camp. Many grieved upon hearing it. A frontliner had died and everyone admired her for her unselfish dedication to her job. She had became a hero to everyone''s eyes. Cecilia was most devastated when she heard about it. She ran to the restroom, locked the room, and cried. Pity and sadness filled her. When her crying was done, fear crept in as she realized something. If such tragedy happened to Tara, then it could also happen to her.....

 90 The Inauguration

    Dr. Alvarado was bouyant when he woke up on Thursday morning. His medical facility would be officially opened to the public. The clinics were just a front though because he had more vicious ideas in mind for the facility. The opening would also be the culmination of his carefully laid plans. Despite the mishaps in the beginning, he was able to push through sucessfully. Partly thanks to his accomplices, particularly Morgan who helped him a lot in finding the right solutions. For today, he had no plans of visiting the isolation camp. He needed to look great and impressive that afternoon. Plus, he needed to prepare a heartwarming and inspiring message. He was always good with words but for the event, his lines would have to be more stirring and affective.


    On the other hand, Morgan began his day early. He needed to make sure that every detail of the inauguration would be perfect. His boss deserved nothing less. Besides, it was his pride at stake if there would be something amiss during the event. He called the coordinator relentlessly, asking for updates. He visited the facility before noon and checked the preparations meticulously.


    The event would be done at the lobby area. It was wide enough to accommodate as much as a hundred guests but only fifty if they were to be seated comfortably and a wide space for socialization would be provided. The excess people, the less important ones, would have to stay by the front lawn. Hence, only the elite guests would be invited inside. But once the tour started, everyone could go in and look around the facility.


    It was not yet the flowering season and so the flowers used as decorations did not have uniform whiteness. Morgan saw this with his keen eyes and so ordered the florists to make the necessary rearrangment of the flowers. The cream curtains with ruffles, as well as of the table and chair covers, were not also that pleasing for him and so they were removed and replaced with something that matched more beautifully with the flowers. It was stressful for the decorators as they realized that Morgan mostly disagreed with everything they did. Yet, Morgan was precise with his actions and his relaxed demeanour enabled everyone to work harmoniously so that by three in the afternoon, all details were ready.


    However, Morgan was not really concerned with the physical preparations. It was only an act because truthfully, what had been done was near perfection already. Morgan was particularly worried about the activities done in the facility. He checked first the upper level which housed the research laboratories. Everyone was busy examining samples through different lenses and monitors. Others were analyzing data manually or through software programs. There were also few volunteer patients who stayed in some of the living quarters in that area.


    Morgan moved down and visited the different clinics. Indeed, most of them had already started accepting customers. He talked briefly with the doctors and their staffs and they had nothing to say but kind words about Dr. Alvarado and his initiatives in addressing the outbreak. Morgan smiled as he listened. It was not a smile of delight, knowing fully well what the doctor''s drama was really all about. It was entertaining for Morgan to hear them say those praises.


    After such sweet time spending with the first-level occupants, he went stealthily to the secret area in the basement. Only a few trusted individuals knew about the place because the things done there would be regarded as the doctor''s private records. Next to Dr. Alvarado''s private office located at the furthermost corner in the first floor, there was an elevator leading to the basement. There was a specific access code before anyone could operate the elevator. It was a big elevator so that equipment could easily be transported to the secret basement. In case of emergencies, there was also an access door located inside the off-limit room which was also beside Dr. Alvarado''s office. The room was always locked to prevent anyone from wandering to the basement. Besides Morgan and his boss, only the control room had the spare keys and only specific persons knew about them. Everything about the basement was confidential and only a few had knowledge about it.


    For today, he ordered everyone involved in the secret basement not to report for work, except for the keeper of the keys. Moreover, the control room was behind the main building as a separate structure so the guests would mostly likely not venture in the area. Morgan initially planned to let two or three people stay in the basement and guard the rooms but he later changed his mind. He could not risk raising any suspicion or even curiosity from the guests and so everyone who could mention the basement as a slip-on-the-tongue would have to be absent for that day.


    Quickly, Morgan walked through the basement. There were several rooms and walking through the empty corridor was creepy. His footsteps, and even his breathing, could be heard in the silence. He retraced his steps but before going up, he glanced at a certain room. It was still quiet and so he sighed a releif.


    Dr. Alvarado had already arrived when he got back to the lobby. The doctor flashed a wide smile, as if he had just received a good news.


    "Is everything all set, Morgan?"


    "Yes, Sir. Everything had been prepared carefully."


    They walked until they reached a safe spot, away from any ears that could hear them.


    "Is the area taken care of, Morgan?"


    "Yes, Sir. The area is silent since this morning. I let nobody enter it for today."


    "Our specimens are okay, right?"


    "Of course, Sir. They won''t cause any trouble."


    "Good. I don''t want anything to ruin the event."


    Dr. Alvarado thought for a while.


    "Is there a possibility that the trouble would come from outside, Morgan?"


    "It is possible, Sir. Outside factors are beyond our control."


    "But they can be minimized. Right, Morgan?"


    "Of course, Sir. I looked into each of them and it is highly unlikely that they will get in the way later."


    "Certain of that?"


    "Yes, Sir. But only for the outside factors in consideration."


    "What do you mean?"


    "Based on the facts I gathered, I already surmised what can be troublesome and so I have taken care of them. Yet, there are still things we do not yet know and such things may just get through our safety measures and pass right before our eyes easily."


    "I do hope you are wrong, Morgan. You are a genius man, and I believe you have looked into all considerarions."


    "Yes, I did that solely based on the little knowledge I have."


    "Well, let''s hope the odds will be in our favor. For now, I''d rather not worry about it. I need to look good during the event."


    Morgan nodded and then Dr. Alvarado went back to the crowd. Time was drawing near. Twenty minutes more and the show would begin.

 91 The Convergence 1

    Estella could hardly get over what the anonymous call told her last night. She was not sure if the recent caller was the same person with the first one. But both calls were intriguing, accusing Dr. Alvarado of two grave crimes. The first one claimed that the doctor caused the outbreak in Subangdaku which Estella nearly believed already since Dr. Alvarado was always absent in other circumstances related to the outbreak. And now, the esteemed man was accused of being involved in the disappearance of Jamie de Jesus who had been missing for days already. The call did not directly say that Dr. Alvarado kidnapped the boy. Yet, Jamie was supposedly kept in the doctor''s facility which implied that Dr. Alvarado was involved in one way or another.


    Estella could hardly slept that night, bothered at the malicious things she had been told. Sonny had already gone home when she received the call and so when they met the following morning, she immediately told him about it.


    "And you believe it?" Sonny asked when she had finished sharing the incident. They were moving through the morning traffic on the way to the isolation camp, their first destination for the day.


    "Honestly, yes. I don''t think the allegations were circumstantial. There must be some truth to them."


    "I just find it hard to believe that Dr. Alvarado could do such evil."


    "Yes, I also find it impossible at the beginning. But signs point at him. I also feel that the outbreak and the boy''s disappearance are connected and now, the doctor''s name comes up."


    "Remember when you told me you have a gut feeling that Loduvico''s absence and Jamie''s disappearance are also connected? If that would be true, then Dr. Alvarado is the mind behind all the happenings in Subangdaku."


    "The outbreak that got many people sick.... Loduvico''s sudden disapperance in the midst of his popularity.... Then a boy vanished after being supposedly healed by Loduvico...."


    "And Dr. Alvarado was behind them all? Why?"


    "At first, I thought it was because he is looking for the cure. With the opening of his facility, his first step to obtain cure is to take samples from the person everyone is now calling as patient zero."


    "And Loduvico?"


    "He healed patient zero. How he did that is a good research work."


    "But if Dr. Alvarado. caused the outbreak, why would he go through a lot of efforts in finding the cure?"


    Silence.


    "I can''t answer that, Sonny. That part got me always thinking but I still could not find the answer."


    "Well, let''s keep our eyes always open. We really don''t have any concrete proof of any of these wild theories and accusations."


    "I know, Sonny. It''s scary if they would all be true."


    By then, they had reached the isolation camp in the school. Immediately, they disembarked and did their follow-up reports. They also visited a few clinics that morning before heading back to their office and ate their lunch. After doing some office works, they changed into more formal clothes. They would be attending the inauguration and they should also look decent along with the guests. By three, they headed to Silverio Alvarado Medical Suites.


    *****


    Mang Tomas could not sleep the other night after his terrifying dream. It was too real that fear and pity overwhelmed him so that his mind became restless. He found it hard to find peace in his heart. What if his dream was really true? What if Loduvico was indeed suffering and needed some help?


    In fact, his life became less peaceful for the past few days. The sudden outbreak burdened him, especially when he was arrested and detained for allegedly violating the local ordinance. Thankfully, a concerned citizen came to the rescue and testified that Mang Tomas was not gathering people during the crisis. He was simply preaching in the streets without inviting people to come near him and form a large crowd. It took a while to convince the police about Mang Tomas'' innocence and yet, he was released very soon. He thought he could finally relax but then the dream came which totally bothered the old man.


    By seven, Mang Tomas woke up from an intermittent sleep. He felt groggy but he could not afford to be weak and be infected with the outbreak diseases. He left lonely. When he ate his breakfast of egg, hotdog, rice, and coffee, Mang Tomas could not avoid to remember nostalgic memories of his wife and kids. Then his eyes went wide and his body froze when he remembered something else. He had some visitors last night before darkness covered the entire district.


    Two kids had appeared before him yesterday when he opened the door of his house. Mang Tomas had actually no interest to open the door when he first heard the knocks. But then the pounding on the door became louder so that in the end, he succumbed to the demand of the knocks.


    "What are you two doing here?" one of them answered.


    "We need your help, Mang Tomas."


    Mang Tomas loooked at them long and hard. He knew about them. He knew there were four of them and seeing only two of made him curious.


    "What happened to your two friends?"


    "We will fetch one friend after this. However, the other one has been missing for days already. I think he was kidnapped and kept somewhere"


    "Where is that?"


    "In the new medical facility by Dr. Alvarado."


    Silence.


    "So why are you here? What do you need me for?"


    "We can''t do it by ourselves. We need some grown person."


    "Uh-uh. What are you planning to do?"


    "We will rescue him."


    Mang Tomas was dumbfounded.....

 92 The Convergence 2

    Tonton ate a heavy lunch and a heavy afternoon snack. They had a mission to accomplish and he needed to have as much energy as he could. As agreed, he prepared a light backpack containing an extra face mask, clothes, emergency light, and toy weapons just in case they would get into a manfight. As planned, he would pass by Kiko, then they would fetch Bogart together, and the three of them would stealthily go to the inauguration of the Silverio Alvarado Medical Suites. It was a risky adventure but it was worth it. They were not certain if Jamie was indeed kept in the facility but they must try. They could only pray that the odds would favor them.


    Excitedly, Tonton boarded his bike and went to Kiko. As eager as him, Kiko was already waiting by the doorstep. His brows were crossed when Tonton arrived.


    "You are late," Kiko announced. "What took you so long?"


    "Uh-huh?" Tonton answered quizzically and looked at his watch. "It''s only ten minutes past three."


    "Yes, and it is late already. You are supposed to be here by three."


    "That''s not it. I am supposed to leave our house by three."


    "Uh? Really?"


    Kiko laughed and seeing his friend relaxed, Tonton also laughed.


    "Did you bring the firecrackers?" Tonton asked.


    "Of course," Kiko replied. "I bring enough to start a party."


    The two chuckled. It seemed they were both ready for the adventure ahead. Quickly, Kiko rode his bike and they went on with their trip. As they passed by Mang Tomas'' who was living a few blocks from Bogart, they were reminded of their meeting the other night.


    The boys were quite hesitant when they knocked on the door of Mang Tomas'' house last night. They had encountered Mang Tomas only a few times on the street but each time, they felt that the old man already knew them or something about them. It was a creepy feeling but at the same time, mystifying and stirring. Their fright intensified when Mang Tomas appeared on the door with a big frown on his piercing eyes. The man beckoned them to go inside.


    Immediately, they got down to business and told him about their crazy mission. It was obvious that Mang Tomas was both shocked and stunned by what they told him.


    "You boys must be out of your mind," Mang Tomas had commented. "What you will be doing is not a children''s game. It is a dangerous thing. And then you want to involve me?"


    "We might have greater chances of succeeding if we have you," Kiko had answered.


    "Crazy. How even sure are you that he is kept in Dr. Alvarado''s new facility."


    "Not a hundred percent," Tonton had said. "But we are almost certain. We saw it in our dreams."


    "And you believe that?"


    "Yes, Mang Tomas. Our dreams have some meanings, much like yours. And you believe them, right?"


    "Our dreams are different."


    With those last words, Mang Tomas ushered them out of his house. The boys recalled each detail as they passed by the old man''s house. The door was locked and the man was probably hiding inside.


    "I really thought we could convince him to help us," Kiko said dejectedly.


    "Me, too," Tonton sighed. "I hope he changes his mind and join us later."


    "Is that possible?"


    "Maybe. Some visions may have persuaded him so that he would come to the event as well."


    "You''re right. I hope we will see him later."


    Kiko smiled weakly and then they went on with their bike ride. Like them, Bogart was also exicted and overly prepared when they arrived at his house. He was seating by the porch with a huge backpack at his side. The two boys gaped upon seeing his bag.


    "Why will you be carrying a big bag?" Kiko scowled.


    "Yeah," Tonton chimed in. "We should be carrying light packs so we can run faster."


    "Easy, guys," Bogart answered. "I just brought a lot of marshmallows and a blanket."


    "Huh?" Kiko wondered.


    "Jamie might be cold and hungry right now. So a blanket will keep him warm as we escape and some marshmallows to ease his hungry stomach."


    "Oh," Tonton remarked. "I guess that''a s smart move. We did not think of that yesterday."


    The boys chuckled.


    "So have you convinced Mang Tomas to help us?"


    Kiko and Tonton shook their heads.


    Bogart: "So it is just the three of us."


    Tonton: "Except if Miss Estella, the news reporter, will help us."


    Kiko: "You have called her, right?"


    Bogart: "Yes, but I did not talk to her for a long time. I just said that Jamie is inside the new medical facility."


    Tonton: "That''s kind of vague, Bogart"


    Kiko: "Yeah. We agreed that you would call her and tell her that Jamie was kidnapped and put inside the facility. Is that what you told her?"


    Bogart: "Not really. I was scared and confused, guys. I did not tell her Jamie was kidnapped. I just said he could be found in the facility."


    Tonton: "That''s really vague."


    Kiko: "Truly vague. Do you think she believed you?"


    Bogart: "I''m not sure. I just hope so. I was really scared so I hang up immediately."


    Tonton: "So it is uncertain if she can help us."


    Kiko: "But I think she will still be in the inauguration. It is an important event so it is a big news."


    Bogart: "Yeah, I think you are right. She should be there."


    Tonton: "I hope so.... Come on, we better get going now."


    Bogart boarded his bike and the three hurriedly went to the medical facility. When they had arrived, uneasiness and fright overwhelmed them. The large crowd before them was beyond their expectation. For a long while, they stared at the guests who kept coming in. They were jovial and chatty, clueless of the evils surrounding them.


    "I''m now really scared, guys," Bogart voiced out.


    "Me as well," Kiko said.


    "Can we really do this?" Tonton asked.


    Then Jamie''s face flashed in their heads. Their friend had always been confident with anything he did. If he were in their shoes, he would have not hesitated. And right now, he badly needed their help.


    "Gear up," Tonton declared. "We are not backing out."


    Kiko and Bogart smiled. The mission had began....

 93 The Convergence 3

    Sonny and Estella were awed by the congregation before them. They initially intended to arrive at the event by three but work caught up with them so that they were more than an hour late. Everything was all set when they arrived at the facility. Vehicles, mostly red plated and large enough to accommodate one family plus friends, occupied the parking space near the large front yard of the building. Bodyguards in civilian clothes could be seen roaming around the perimeter. It was expected as some high-ranking officials were invited to the event.


    Tables and chairs were meticulously arranged in the front yard. They would be sitted in one of those by dinner. Tables for the very important guests were set up on the lobby of the building which could be seen through the glass doors and walls. They were especially reserved for the distinguished class. The building''s main door was still closed and it would be opened only when the white ribbon tied on it was cut by the most revered guest and that would be no one but the mayor.


    Thirty minutes before the program began, almost all invited individuals had already arrived. Many of them were key players in running the district. Officials and representatives from many government offices could be seen all around the venue. They were mostly gathered in separate groups as they conversed about top-level subject matters which only the minds of politicians, businessmen, and intellectuals would be interested in. Smaller groups which were more inclined to sharing gossips and rumors were also assembled, away from other enthusiastics ears. On the bright side, everyone was wearing face masks and face shields, and except for the couples, they were conscious in maintaining a good distance from other people.


    "Here comes Mr. Salvador," Estella commented as she nibbled on a tiny sandwich on a stick. "With his coming, I think all local officials are here at the event."


    "Yes, correct, except for the mayor," Sonny answered. "My mental calculations say that all VIPs are already here."


    "He will surely come. He is the guests of honor and he will come when everyone else had already arrived. He is not the man who waits."


    Sonny chuckled.


    "Well, he is the town''s mayor. He holds the time."


    "You could not be more right, Sonny."


    "And speaking of the devil, here he comes."


    The mayor''s SUV entered the parking area. Everyone looked as the vehicle''s silver skin shimmered in the afternoon light. Two bodyguard stepped out and expertly but quickly scanned the surroundings before the mayor emerged. Despite his face mask, one could sense that he was smiling to everyone he met. His eyes narrowed each time, crow''s feet appearing at the corner of each deep-sitted tiny eyes. He waved at some people and shook hands with others. When he spotted his kind of crowd, he stayed there and conversed with them.


    "I think the event will start in few minutes," Estella said matter-of-factly.


    "I agree," Sonny replied. "We''d better take our spots."


    They went to the nearby table and while Sonny checked his camera and gear one last time, Estella took her seat and began scribbling notes.


    Meanwhile, the Biker Brothers also saw the arrival of the mayor from their hiding spot. They parked their bikes earlier under a large acacia tree, away from the common parking space. They could not risk being caught while boarding their bikes so to avoid that, they need to run for a good distance through the maze of vehicles before embarking their rickety bikes. While the ceremony was still going on, they decided to stay in the shadows. Once the tour begins, then it would be their time to strike. They could easily blend in with the crowd, then sneak into the basement. They were pretty sure Jamie was kept there so they had no other destination but the basement.


    They were watching the mayor get together with the other guests when Bogart suddenly scratched his head. Something was bothering him.


    Tonton: "Are you alright, Bogart? You look confused."


    Bogart: "Well, I can''t help but wonder which room in the basement was Jamie hidden. For sure, there would be plenty of rooms there."


    Kiko: "We will just try our luck and open each room."


    Bogart: "And how do we open the door?"


    Kiko: "Well, we simply have to turn the knob, then push. That''s the way how to open the door."


    Bogart: "Silly, of course I know how to open a door. What I mean is which door shall we open?"


    Tonton: "We will try to open all doors."


    Bogart: "But what if they were locked? For sure, Dr. Alvarado would not simply leave the doors unsecured if they were hiding a kidnapped person."


    Quickly, the two boys hushed him.


    Kiko: "Bogart, you cannot be too tactless. Be extra careful, please."


    Bogart: "Sorry, guys. I was just too excited."


    Tonton: "But you are right, Bogart. The doors would surely be locked."


    Kiko: "So where do we find the keys?"


    Bogart: "I don''t know."


    Tonton: "Me, too."


    Kiko: "Then that''s the big problem."


    Tonton: "We need to think where the keys could have been possibly kept."


    Bogart: "Do you think Dr. Alvarado has them?"


    Tonton: "He could have duplicate keys but he would surely not be bringing them now. He is busy entertaining people."


    Bogart: "Maybe he put them in his car."


    Tonton: "But we could not simply ransack his car. Besides, we are not one hundred sure if he has them in his car."


    Bogart: "So we need to think of a place where we believe one hundred percent sure that the keys were kept."


    Tonton: "Where could that place be?"


    Kiko: "It is just in the facility. There should be a place or a room here that holds all the keys. It is like a central control room that has everything."


    Bogart: "Yeah, you are right. It is like in the movies."


    Tonton: "So we need to first find where that room is. If that is the case, then we''d better start now."


    The two boys nodded. Carefully, they stood up but before they could do anymore action, a voice spoke up from behind them.


    "There I found you!"


    The boys turned their heads and in surprise, , they all fell down on the ground upon seeing tbe man''s face. They knew him very well...


    Please go to


    to read the latest chapters for free

 94 The Convergence 4

    After eating his breakfast, Mang Tomas switched the TV on and watched the morning magazine show. Indeed, Dr. Alvarado''s new medical facility would be officially opening that day. He believed that such happening should not be making quite a stir but clearly, it was a big news.


    "If not for the outbreak," Mang Tomas whispered.


    Again, he was reminded of his conversation with the boys last night. Could it really be that their friend was in trouble? And that he was kept inside the new medical facility?


    Mang Tomas dismissed the thoughts inside his head and went on doing some chores. His days were recently turned upside down and he did not want another trouble bothering him again. Being detained in the local police station for accusation of instigating social gathering was problematic already. Just to have some peace of mind again, he would refrain from involving himself with the boys'' dangerous adventure.


    Yet, as he went on with his day, his conscience kept tagging at his sleeves. He knew that what the kids would be doing would place themselves in harm''s way but he chose not to do something about it. Each time his guilt was haunted, he shook his head in the hope of shaking the thought as well.


    "What do you want me to do?" he finally yelled at no one.


    The wall in front of him stared back at him, still silent and unmoving. It was already past one in the afternoon and his conscience was being troubled for hours. Without further thoughts, he went out of his house and turned around the back to his old garage. The small structure was old and worn, product of oppressive years of negligence and inattention. Sitting there was his old sedan car which he had never driven for weeks already. He recently had no business driving around town so the vehicle remained untouched in the garage for quite a time already.


    "Will you still run, my boy?" Mang Tomas asked the car.


    Immediately, he removed the items placed atop the vehicle and thoroughly cleaned it. He sneezed occassionally because of the thick clouds of dusts. When it was all cleaned up again, Mang Tomas smiled in satisfaction.


    0p


    "Time to get you moving."


    He inserted the key into the ignition switch and after several trials, the car whirred into life. Mang Tomas jumped and rejoiced. He could not believe his luck. Afterwards, he changed into new clothes and packed some things into his bag. With renewed enthusiasm, Mang Tomas drove the car around the neighborhood.


    Despite the faulty air-conditioning, Mang Tomas drove with contentment and confidence. It felt refreshing for him to be behind a wheel again and moving through the lonely streets of the district made him feel alive again.


    "Well, we are going into an adventure, my boy."


    Mang Tomas dropped by a convenience store and bought some supplies, particularly food and medicines just in case the boy was hungry and needed some medical attention. He really had no clue as to what could happen to their mission. There was nothing in his dreams last night that hinted anything. Unsure of things, he just bought any item in sight which he thought could be used later. He also dropped by his old-time favorite pizza joint and ordered a slice.


    By four, Mang Tomas was all geared up and so with a new found energy, he went to Silverio Alvarado Medical Suites. As he expected, a good number of people attended the event, evident by the countless vehicles parked around the perimeter of the new facility. He stopped his car and looked for a place to park. He wanted his car to be as near as possible to the facility but as far as away as possible from the other vehicles. It would give him, and even the boys, plenty of space to escape from anybody who could possibly chase them. Yet, he fervently hoped that they would not come to that point and that they would easily find the missing boy.


    To his wonder, Mang Tomas spotted three bikes parked under an acacia tree, an area he thought was an ideal parking space. He moved his car towards the tree, and as he was inching closer, a thought suddenly came to his head.


    "Do those bikes belong to the boys?" he asked himself. "But there were only two who approached me last night. Well, if indeed they were theirs, then it means they are already here. I just needed to find them fast enough."


    Mang Tomas parked behind the three bikes. Quickly, he disembarked and looked around him. To his luck, he saw three small shadows moving behind a large bush. He smiled, knowing that he had already found them. Happily, he silently moved to them.


    Mang Tomas surprised them from behind. They were initially frightened that they fell on the ground but after recognizing him, they ran up to him and embraced him. One was even about to cry.


    "You''re here!" Kiko declared with a trembling voice. "You came for us?"


    "Of course," Mang Tomas answered. "I could not refuse anyone asking for help, especially if I know that I could give it."


    "You are a kind person, Mang Tomas," Tonton said and tightened his hug around his legs.


    "Thank you," Bogart mouthed and smiled wide.


    Mang Tomas smiled at the boys and caressed their hair.


    "So what''s the plan?"


    The Biker Brothers quickly relayed their plans. They told him everything they would be doing in order to save their friend.


    Mang Tomas: "So we need to get the keys first before going inside the building."


    Tonton: "Yes, but we are not sure where we could find them."


    Kiko: "But I thought the facility would have a central room where all the keys are kept."


    Bogart: "We need to find that room first. That''s where we will be going."


    Mang Tomas, after a long thought, said: "I think I know where that room is. Back at the store, I was able to talk by chance with one of the workers who constructed the facility. He said that there is a small structure behind the main building. It''s another separate building which served as the maintenance and stock room. He really did not specify what is in the building but I believe the keys we are looking for can be found there. "


    Tonton: "Are you sure?"


    Mang Tomas: "Like you, I am not. But it is our best chance."


    Bogart: "Then let''s do it."


    Kiko: "We have to be careful. We have to go around the back first, through that crowd of people."


    Mang Tomas: "Plus there would be guards on that small building."


    "What do we do now?" The boys asked altogether.


    "Don''t worry, I got an idea."


    Mang Tomas smirked at them.....


    "


    Please go to


    to read the latest chapters for free

 95 Final Words for the Fallen Hero

    "The mayor has such a gift of making people believe him," Dr. Alvarado said under his breath as he listened.


    "True, Sir," Morgan whispered back who was seating next to him. "The mayor is indeed a man who plays his game really well."


    The two placed themselves away from the guests and near the podium. Their eyes scanned the crowd as their ears partly listened to the speech.


    "I have something important to tell you, Sir," Morgan said.


    "That important?"


    He nodded.


    "Go on."


    "The nurse is dead."


    Dr. Alvarado was surprised.


    "Are you certain of that, Morgan?"


    "Yes, Sir. Our contacts in the hospital paged me earlier. I called him back and she was confirmed dead."


    "Tell me quickly how."


    "She was hit by a truck. Alive upon arrival but she did not last long in the hospital."


    Silence.


    "Pity her. God rest her soul in peace."


    "I pray it happened quickly to her."


    "You are not a man of prayer, Morgan."


    The doctor smiled.


    "She was good until she talked carelessly."


    "True, Sir."


    There was a long round of applause after the mayor ended his speech. Everybody stood as if something victorious had happened. Dr. Alvarado was smiling as he clapped his hands. When the mayor left the podium, he was quick to leave his seat and meet him. He congratulated him and they chattered as they went back to their seats.


    The program host took the microphone and after minutes of flattery, he called for the local talent group to render another intermission number. The audience''s attention wandered off as the dance went on. After almost ten minutes of another lousy performance, the number was finally done. Dr. Alvarado rearranged his suite and gracefully went to the podium when his name was called. He delivered a brief reply speech to the mayor''s words and then went on to give the audience an overview of the different kind of services the new facility offered. Dr. Alvarado was not reading any prepared speech. His words just beautifully flowed out of his mouth. He only had mental notes of the things he wanted to convey and though his mouth was busy talking, his mind was expertly preparing the next words.


    The crowd was stirred by the sudden emotional shift of the doctor. They did not see that coming.


    "My friends, this is actually personal for me as someone I know perished while battling the outbreak," Dr. Alvarado said dejectedly which saddened the audience. "She is a dedicated nurse - young, bubbly, and overflowing with dreams and hopes. When the outbreak started, she was one of the first few people who responded to the challenge. Armed with nothing but her guts, determination, and devotion to serve the people, she selflessly offered any effort she could to help the infected. She was tireless and brave. And then today....."


    Dr. Alvarado''s voice broke so that he stopped his speech. When he mildly sniffed his nose, the people knew that he was grieving so that tears also began forming on their eyes. They were touched. They knew the doctor was a religious man and a generous philantrophist but seeing him in such vulnerable moment moved them.


    "Today, she left this world," Dr. Alvarado resumed his speech. The crowd gasped. "She was happy when she left her work. It was her leave and she could finally take a break. But then a truck crossed her path and took away her life. The hospital personnel said she was still breathing when she arrived but the pain took its toll and she expired moments later. She was a kind soul and a diligent worker. She was young but she left too early. She is a hero to me and a fallen hero in this outbreak. She could have given more to this world but sadly, she won''t. I could have save her, but sadly, I was not able to do so..... "


    Some audience wiped a tear or two. It was intense.


    "Friends, some of us may have shed some tears because of the outbreak. But the time of grieving will soon be ending. Broken hearts will see joy again...."


    Dr. Alvarado then went back to the meat of his speech and talked about the facility again.


    "Good job, Sir," Morgan whispered to himself in his seat. "You are wiser that I thought. You are too vicious as you used that girl''s misfortune to create drama and make yourseld a hero in this outbreak. Bravo!"


    Dr. Alvarado finished his speech and everyone also stood up and clapped. Estella pulled Sonny by his shirt and they went to a corner.


    "Who is the dead nurse he was talking about?" Estella whispered.


    "I don''t know. Did the main office tell you something about it?"


    "I have not received any message yet."


    "Could the nurse be one of those working in the isolation camp?"


    "It''s highly possible. The doctor had been involved in the camp and anyone from the medical team could be his friend."


    "Friend?"


    "Don''t be silly, Sonny. It seemed he was genuinely affected by her death."


    "Or she was just a random acquaintance and the doctor simply took advantage of her death story to make himself appear great."


    "Could he really be that heartless?"


    "I''m not sure. But plenty of things about the doctor are funny and fishy already."


    The two snapped out of their conversation when the host called everyone to arrange themselves for the ribbon-cutting ceremony. The VIPs smiled as they lined up along with the mayor and Dr. Alvarado. With one swift strike of the scissor, the lace was cut and the facility was declared officially open. Everyone cheered and the tour began. It was still midway through the tour when an electrical outage suddenly happened. The women screamed as the building was covered in darkness. The blackout was not happening in the entire district but only in the facility. It was dark and people were panicky. It was time to move.....

 96 The Blackou

    "I''m afraid," she said with a shaking voice.


    "Of what, honey?" the old woman asked. "Of that building?"


    She pointed at the Silverio Alvarado Medical Suites where lights burst from different angles. The child nodded tentatively. Without second thought, she fell on the ground and embraced her child. Indeed, the girl was terrified. She was trembling so strong that she also quivered as she hugged her. More than the apparent physical fear, her child''s sadness and worry also infected her that she could not help but shed a tear.


    "Thea, please calm down," Mrs. Calunsod begged. "You are also scaring me."


    "I can''t help it, Mama," the child replied. "That building is evil. It is giving me so much fright. My heart could explode just by looking at it. I can''t stop being afraid."


    "Oh no, you can''t say that. I won''t let anything bad happen to you. I will not let anything or anyone do that. I will die if I lose you again."


    "Mama, you are making me sadder."


    She hugged the child even tighter. Right now, she could not do anything but let her feel her love. A mother''s love knows no bounds and sacrifices, and her child needed to understand and feel that.


    Calathea, or Thea as Mrs. Calunsod fondly called her, was a difficult child. She was unpredictable and unreadable. One moment, she was joyous and all smiles, but suddenly, she would be immensely frightened or crying in sadness. Her tantrums were uncontrollable and once she got shaky, it would be a long while before she subsided.


    The recent nights were especially exhausting and challenging for Mrs. Calunsod as Thea would suddenly wake up weeping. She would appease her and asked what disturbed her, Thea could not give a clear answer but Mrs. Calunsod knew it had something to do with her dreams. Several times, she asked Thea to describe her dreams but the child could not easily do so. It seemed her dreams were of random things because Mrs. Calunsod could not find connections in her stories. The child told her once about alien life in an unknown planet, then at another time, she talked about some faceless lovers missing each other. Sometimes, she claimed that a shadow monster was looking after her. All her stories were recipes of frightening nightmares. Whether they were just Thea''s imaginations or not, Mrs. Calunsod could not find meanings in those dreams.


    "Honey, we need to keep going," Mrs. Calunsod said while she was still embracing Thea. "It''s cold out here and we can''t stay here for too long. We have to go home now."


    Thea loosened her grip on Mrs. Calunsod''s back and relaxed. She looked her in the eyes and tried to smile. She failed.


    "You have to be strong, Thea," she reminded her calmly.


    Thea nodded. Mrs. Calunsod stood up but when they were about to walk away, the child shuddered again. It was more violent this time and Thea held her head tightly as she groaned in pain.


    "Mama, my head hurts," Thea complained. "It is so painful, Mama."


    She touched the child''s head with both her hands. It was shaking and hot, as if some heat energy was building up in her head.


    "What''s happening to you, Thea?"


    "Mama, I can''t stop it anymore."


    "Honey, what are you talking about?"


    "Mama!"


    Thea screamed hard that Mrs. Calunsod''s head almost exploded. Her voice was piercing that some glasses and light materials broke. In split seconds, it became dark around them. Mrs. Calunsod squinted her eyes and saw that a blackout happened. However, only the electric power in the Silverio Alvarado Medical Suites went out as the lights in the surrounding area continued to glow brightly in the night. It was too dark in the building that people screamed in fright. They could hear them and knew that panic ensued in the area.


    Suddenly, Thea collapsed on the ground. Mrs. Calunsod''s heart skipped a beat as her mind raced to think of what to do. But she knew she should not also panic. She realized that a slight mistake in her actions could ruin everything that she worked hard for. She needed to think fast and quick.


    Their house was still a good distance and carrying Thea all the way home would be difficult for her. She was not young anymore and her back was not at all sturdy. But she has no other choice because that was her best option. Truthfully, she had no other choice.


    She inhaled hard and summoning all her strength, she lifted Calathea off the ground and saddled her on her back. She repositioned the child until they were both comfortable. With adrenaline rushing through her veins, Mrs. Calunsod began walking briskly. Sweats began forming on her head despite the cold breeze. She needed to be strong. She could not give up now. She needed to endure for her and for her sweet Calathea.


    Mrs. Calunsod did not turn her back as she carried her child home. She did not even give a glimpse of the evil building. She could not see the things that could make her child unhappy. Unknown to her, the darkness in the building was an unexpected gift for some people. Truly, the blackout was an opportunity to make their plans come true so the three Biker Brothers and Mang Tomas quickly moved to execute their schemes....

 97 Strike While Its Dark

    "What?" Kiko asked in disbelief. "This is your plan?"


    "Yes, of course," the old man replied. "We have to blend with the crowd. We must not move suspiciously. Let''s join them in the tour-"


    "Then we''ll break free and go at the back of the building," Bogart interrupted.


    Mang Tomas nodded.


    "And then we''ll raid the control room or whatever it is called," Tonton said.


    The three nodded in understanding. Finally, they had a solid plan. Carefully, they entered the building and joined the people. Everyone was busy talking so the boys and Mang Tomas easily slipped in.


    "Where is the door going to the back?" Kiko asked.


    "I think it is there," Tonton answered and pointed at the right direction.


    "Are you sure?" Bogart then asked.


    "Not really, but I think I am right. When I and Jamie went here last time, I saw a way leading out through this way."


    "Alright," Mang Tomas said, "let''s go that way. I think it is our best chance."


    Slowly, they walked backwards towards the end of the queue. There were several offices in that direction but Mang Tomas was quite certain there was a door there leading to the back. When they were finally a good distance from the last person in the crowd, he gently clapped his hands.


    "Hurry, boys," Mang Tomas said. "Follow me."


    They walked briskly and were about to enter an open door when a voiced spoke from behind them.


    "Where are you going?" a man''s voice reverberated in the empty hallway. "You are not supposed to be here."


    Their hearts beat wildly. They had just been caught and they needed to do something to escape the man. So far, no one had seemed to think of anything. They were about to turn their heads around when the lights suddenly went off. Ladies and children screamed in panicky surprise.


    "Come on," Tonton said sternly and quickly took Mang Tomas'' and Kiko''s hands.


    He pulled them strongly, beckoning them to follow him. Swiftly, Mang Tomas grabbed Bogart''s shoulder and the four ran as hard as they could while holding each other. Tonton led them on reflex and before they knew it, Mang Tomas grabbed hold of a door handle. It appeared to be locked but after a vehement shaking, the handle gave in and the door opened. The four instantly inhaled the night''s cold breeze and smiled, believing they succeeded. Bogart jumped in joy but he lost footing and balance that he tripped over, knocking down his buddies as well so that the four of them fell on the moist grass. They chuckled, happy for their first success for the night.


    "Get yourselves together, boys," Mang Tomas commented as he stood up. "We are still starting."


    Immediately, the three friends stood up and shook off the leaves and dirt clinging on their short pants.


    "Yeah," Bogart agreed. "There are lights everywhere except here."


    Indeed, the surroundings were brilliant with bright light while the medical facility was covered with darkness. It was truly an opportunity they could not pass.


    "Over here," Mang Tomas, who was now standing in front of a small separate structure, called them. "I think this is the control room."


    The three ran up to him. Mang Tomas touched the handle and to his surprise, the door was not locked so he instantly opened it. He smiled at the boys who immediately ran inside the building.


    "It''s pitch dark here," Kiko said matter-of-factly.


    "Let me handle our light," Bogart said who quickly produced a flashlight from his backpack. The light casted a large round glow on a wall.


    "Let''s find the keys," Tonton barked.


    The three nodded and they quickly rushed through every shelves and hooks.


    "I found some keys here!" Bogart yelled excitedly upon grabbing a handful of keys. "But this a great bunch."


    "That''s a problem," Kiko said. "We don''t know which ones we needed."


    "Worry about that later," Mang Tomas remarked. "Let''s get out of here now."


    Bogart placed the keys on his short pants'' side pockets. They gathered together and carefully went out of the building.


    "Another success for us!" Bogart declared with his face beaming with happiness.


    The three smiled with him. It seemed they were going the right way. Bogart opened the back door of the main building and instantly went in. Tonton followed behind him when a voice suddenly spoke from inside.


    "What can some kids possibly do in this part of the building?" a voice said angrily.


    Bogart and Tonton ran back outside but the man chased them. Kiko and Mang Tomas saw what happened. Reflexively, Kiko tried giving the man a kick in the butt but his foot landed on his knee. Caught surprised, the man tripped over and fell on the ground.


    "Run!" Kiko shouted.


    Immediately, Bogart and Tonton sprinted back inside the building. Kiko was about to follow but the man grabbed his right leg.


    "Let me go!" Kiko screamed.


    Mustering all his strength, Mang Tomas kicked the man on the face. He tried to evade but the kick lightly brushed his mouth and nose. The man groaned in pain. Quickly, Mang Tomas picked Kiko up and ran towards the building. He did not dare look back. He knew he was an old man already but this adventure enabled him to see clearly through the darkness and ran while carrying a kid. Plus, he was able to give a big guy a good strong kick. Mang Tomas closed the door once they were inside the building. Meanwhile, the man recovered his senses and stood up, but instead of chasing after the invaders, he went to the control room.


    Mang Tomas paused and took a deep breath. They walked a certain distance, hoping to regroup with Bogart and Tonton. Suddenly, the lights went back. The building was once again covered with blinding light. They saw the crowd in the educational tour earlier and without second thought, they joined them. To their dismay, they could not find their friends in the crowd. Unfortunately, they got separated....

 98 A Risky Tour 1

    "Oh, finally," one said, "we can now continue the tour. There is so much to see in the doctor''s new building."


    "That was creepy," another said. "Thankfully, it did not last long."


    "Goodness, that almost gave me a heart attack."


    For the two Biker Brothers, it was a moment of panic. They searched around them but Mang Tomas and Kiko were not around. They got separated and having not thought of such possibility, they had no concrete alternative plan. Plus the presence of a good number of people scared them even more. They tried to act normally in order not to be caught.


    "Hello, everyone," a man said from what seemed to be the center of the crowd, "sorry for that sudden interruption. The circuit breaker simply tripped off so that is why we lost some electrical power. Don''t worry, we have handled it really well and turned on the breaker again. For now, let us go back to business."


    The boys looked at where the voice was coming from. It was the same voice that almost caught them earlier before they went out of the back of the building and after they entered in.


    "It''s him, right?" Bogart asked nervously.


    Tonton nodded. Without a second thought, he grabbed Bogart''s arms and pulled him away from the crowd. They laid their bodies flat on the wall.


    "We can''t let him see us," Tonton explained. "We will be in big trouble. If he is busy with the crowd, then it means he did not catch Kiko and Mang Tomas."


    "Yeah, you couldn''t be wrong," Bogart agreed. "And those two won''t let themselves get captured. So what do we do now?"


    "Let''s get away from here and find the way to the basement."


    "Yeah, and then we will find Jamie."


    Tonton nodded. The two then walked farther away from the noisy crowd, through the hallway that became lonelier and more silent as they went through.


    "The last time you were here," Bogart was asking, "where was the way that leads downstairs?"


    "It was at the end of this hallway," Tonton answered. "That was before the building was fully renovated. I don''t know how much they had changed in the structure so they could have put up more rooms and sealed that area."


    "I hope not," Bogart. "I hope they had not changed it."


    "That must be the last room over there!"


    The two walked faster and soon found themselves face-to-face with an elevator.


    "What''s this elevator doing here?" Bogart commented. "Will this go down to the basement?"


    "Possibly," Tonton answered tentatively.


    "Well, we won''t know unless we try."


    Bogart pressed the open button but the elevator door did not open. He tried again and still nothing happened. Irritably, he pressed random buttons which surprised Tonton. Sadly, the door remained close.


    "It''s not working," Bogart said in dismay. "It''s new I guess."


    "Let''s find another way then."


    They moved forward and saw a closed office. They stood by the doorway, thinking of what they should do.


    "Shall we enter?" Tonton asked though it was more of a suggestion than an inquiry. "There must be a way inside that goes to the basement."


    Bogart smiled and nodded. He reached out to the doorknob but suddenly stopped upon touching it.


    "Why?" Tonton asked in wonder.


    "It is not really locked," Bogart whispered and signalled Tonton with a hush. "It''s not even closed."


    Tonton moved closer and saw that the door was slightly ajar. He looked up and saw the words "DR. SILVERIO ALVARADO" posted atop the upper jamb. He tapped his friend and pointed upwards.


    "Oh no," Bogart whispered. "Is this the doctor''s office?"


    Tonton nodded. Suddenly, they heard a voice from inside the room. They froze and looked at each other.


    "The doctor''s in," Bogart breathed.


    Without another though? , Tonton pulled Bogart away from the door and laid their backs flat on another door, just a few feet from the office.


    "That was scary," Bogart said, and then turned around upon feeling a keyhole on his head. "Why is there a door here?"


    Tonton looked behind his friend''s back. He touched the door knob and was about to turn it around when he heard a voice whispered in his ear. "Inside," it said.


    "Was it you?" he asked his friend.


    "Huh?" Bogart''s turned blank. "What do you mean?"


    "Something whispered in my head. It said ''inside''."


    "Could this be the way?"


    "I don''t know, but the voice''s word was clear. We might as well give it a try."


    Bogart produced the keys from his pocket. One by one, he tried the keys.


    "There are just too many keys," Bogart complained. "Will we be able to open it?"


    They were about to try another one when the hinge of the office''s door suddenly creaked. It was loud against the stark silence of the hallway. The door partially opened, making the boys even more nervous. Violently, Tonton took the keys from Bogart''s hands and randomly selected one and inserted it on the keyhole. Voila! To their suprise, it fitted and the door swung wide. They immediately entered and gently closed the door. Instantly, Tonton''s hair stood up. It was dark but what made him more scared was the sadness and evil he smelled hanging on the air....

 99 A Risky Tour 2

    "Yes, this is the way," Tonton answered. "But this is different from what I can remember."


    "But equally creepy, right?"


    Tonton smiled. Indeed, it was frightening despite the bright light. It was the eerie silence that got his hairs standing.


    They walked down the stairs until they reached the foot. What waited them was a seemingly endless hallway. Rooms were on each side of the hallway, and far ahead, there appeared to be a corner, possibly leading to another stairs or some doors to more rooms. The basement area was painted in immaculate white and the clear glow of the bulbs made the place even more sparkingly drab. Not a sound could be heard except for their little footsteps and tense breathing.


    "I feel something bad about this place," Bogart broke the silence.


    "This place is really bad," Tonton answered. "Jaime should be here."


    They began walking ahead but when Tonton touched a wall with his right hand, a sudden bolt of chilling energy ran through him. He jumped back and fell on the ground. In his vision, the place had turned dark. He could see nothing but pitch darkness.


    Tonton ran, hoping to see the way out. Then from a distance, he saw a small figure in white, like a bright dot on a black canvass. He slowly walked ahead and as he was nearing it, the dot began to take shape. It was human, specifically, it was a boy. To his horror, it was Jamie. He was tied to a bed, slumped and lifeless like a piece of worn rug. His heart stopped beating, broken at the miserable sight of his friend. He tried to inch closer but each step was heavier than the previous. And then, the body twitched and Jamie''s head moved upwards. His face was pale as twilight sky and his eyes were deathly hollow as he struggled to speak.


    "I''m here," Jamie spoke and smiled difficultly.


    Tonton felt a violent shake and he immediately woke up and sat up straight. The first thing he saw was Bogart''s face which was hazy against the bright background. He was dreaming and he was thankful he had his friend to rouse him.


    "What happened?" Bogart asked worriedly. "You suddenly lost consciousness and collapsed."


    "I had a vision again. And we are right, Jamie is here."


    Just then, a loud bang on a door echoed through the basement area. It was a sign....


    Meanwhile, Kiko and Mang Tomas went with the crowd in the tour. They had no better choice but blend with the people. It was bright everywhere and if they tried to slip, some people might notice them. They were particularly wary of the man who chased them. They did not get a glimpse of his face so he could be any man in the crowd.


    "Mang Tomas, what do we do now?" Kiko asked while tugging the old man on his shirt''s hem.


    "How? There''s too many people. They might catch us."


    Before Mang Tomas could speak, the people gathered around as heavy footsteps went to the center of the crowd. He was asking the people to assemble as he had some announcement to make. Mang Tomas and Kiko took this chance and slowly moved away. The two quickly slipped when the man started addressing the people.


    "It was him, right?" Kiko asked as they were studying the rooms in their way. "He was the one who almost caught us. I know it from his voice."


    "You are right," Mang Tomas answered. "He is the one so we should be more careful. We cannot let him see us."


    "We are far from him right now. He could not see us."


    "Maybe not now. What about later?"


    Kiko thought and after a sigh, he said, "It does not matter for me. What is more important is that we see Jaime again."


    Mang Tomas smiled, amazed at how close their friendship was.


    "Over here, there is an elevator," Kiko called out.


    Mang Tomas ran up to him and studied the elevator. He tried several buttons but nothing happened. He could not even hear any sound coming from inside the elevator.


    "I think this is a private elevator."


    "What do you mean?"


    "This elevator cannot just be used by anyone. One has to type the password first before it would open and take you to any floor in the buiding."


    "So we can''t use it to go down?"


    "Yes, it is impossible. For now, we need to go ahead and search another way to the basement."


    They had just moved a few inches when Mang Tomas noticed the name inscription atop the door jamp of the room. Without second thought, he scooped up Kiko and walked briskly towards another door, the only ones left they had not explored yet.


    "What happened, Mang Tomas? You scared me."


    The old man hushed Kiko.


    "Keep your voice down. The doctor could just be inside that room. It''s his office."


    Kiko looked up and saw the doctor''s name. His jaw dropped, realizing how close they were from being caught again.


    "That was dangerous," Kiko commented. "There are no rooms and doors here except for that one."


    "Last one to try."


    Mang Tomas reached for the door and to his surprise, it was not locked. He pushed it gently and a wide stairway waited for them.


    "Let''s go down," Mang Tomas said. "Thankfully, there is some light here."


    "Could Tonton and Bogart be down there."


    "I hope so. They could even be the ones who left this door open."


    Slowly, they entered the room and began walking down the concrete stairs. Unknown to them, Morgan had already finished his speech and was already going towards Dr. Alvarado''s office. But before he could knock on the door, he observed that the door nearby was slightly ajar. That was the off-limits door. He flinched, knowing that someone or some people had found the secret doorway....

 100 A Risky Tour 3

    "You are somewhere else?" Alex whispered.


    "Huh?" Grace answered and smiled. "I''m just here. With you!"


    "You were thinking hard."


    "I was just wondering why those kids are here without their parents."


    Alex looked at where Grace was staring at.


    "Are they from the school?"


    Grace nodded.


    "They must have been also invited to the event. You know, parents were busy so they had to go here with their friends."


    "I don''t know. It just feels odd for me."


    Like many healthworkers in the isolation center, Grace received an invitation courtesy of Dr. Alvarado''s office. The doctor allocated enough heads for the entire medical team. Yet, she did not want to attend alone or with the other nurses so he asked Alex to join him. Incidentally, he was able to secure an invitation from a friend who could not attend the event. Despite feeling ill, Alex was enthusiastic enough to come along with Grace.


    "Why odd?" Alex was asking.


    "I was just not expecting to see Mang Tomas with them," Grace said pensively. "I did not know that they knew each other."


    "Subangdaku is a small district, Grace. It is not really surprising."


    "Maybe, but something in my guts keeps telling me that something is amiss."


    "Well, you can talk to them now."


    "That''s a good idea. Come, let''s see the boys-"


    Before Grace could finish her words, the place suddenly turned dark. There was a blackout. Some women and children screamed because of panic or surprise. Quickly, Alex held Grace''s hand even tighter, making sure that the one girl he loved would not drift away from him....


    Sonny and Estella were also surprised with the sudden power interruption. They knew there was no scheduled blackout so they could not help but wonder. Sonny immediately secured their equipment while Estella tried to help a woman whose child was crying.


    "Everyone, let us calm down," Dr. Alvarado''s voice echoed from a distance.


    The noise subsided as everyone turned to look at the owner of the voice. Despite the darkness, they knew where it was coming from. Yet, a few could not help but got scared. Once the crowd had seemed to calm down, the doctor silently went back to his office.


    "Dr. Alvarado is really good with dealing with people," Estella commented under her breath, just loud enough for Sonny to hear her. "He could easily fool anyone."


    "It was an innocent opinion."


    "But a dangerous one. Anyone can easily put different meanings to it."


    Estella was silent. Sonny could be right - she should add more carefullness to her words.


    Suddenly, the lights went on as the electricity came back. People cheered, relieved that they could see their surroundings again and resume the tour. Estella was doing some mental check of what she would be doing when she incidentally spotted Mang Tomas and Kiko in the crowd. She did not see them before the blackout so it was a surprise to her.


    "Sonny," she called her partner. "That is one one of the kids, right?"


    Sonny looked at where her lips pointed. He nodded.


    "Definitely," he said. "Their friend is still missing. It is a good thing he could be around here tonight."


    "That''s actually weird. Why would he come to this event without his friends?"


    "He could not be with his friends all the time."


    "But why not with his parents?"


    Sonny looked at the old man beside Kiko.


    "Is that Mang Tomas?"


    "Yes, he is. The boy is with the prophet. It is quite funny that they seem to be comfortable with one another. It is as if they know each other well."


    "They could just have bumped into each other here tonight."


    "Let''s observe them to be sure."


    The two went on the side of the crowd and watched as people got ready for the tour. Morgan, the main organizer of the event and the doctor''s personal assistant, went to the center and addressed the people. He gave small talks about the blackout and how the tour would be conducted. Meanwhile, Mang Tomas and Kiko slowly inched away from the people. Morgan had just finished his speech and people were already preparing for the tour. This did not escape Estella''s gaze so he tapped Sonny on the elbow.


    "Did you see that?" Estella whispered. "They are getting away together."


    Sonny watched as the two broke away from the crowd and went the other side. They slowly disappeared in the dim light as they moved farther away.


    "I guess you are right," Sonny said. "Something is fishy with them. Let''s follow them."


    Estella nodded and smiled. They started to walk away when people also began moving and distracted them for a while. People were pressing them from all directions as they got excited. After some precious minutes, the two finally broke loose from the crowd. They immediately ran to the direction where their targets were heading.


    "Where they could have gone?" Estella tried to start a conversation.


    "We are already heading to the clinics. Where are they exactly going?"


    "And why? What''s in here?"


    Sonny shrugged his shoulders. Soon, they almost reached the end of the corridor. By then, they saw Morgan standing by a door. His back was to them but they knew it was him from the tall built and erect posture. Sonny looked at the nearby room. It was Dr. Alvarado''s office. Morgan was about to open the door when Estella suddenly called him.


    "Mister, wait a minute!"


    Morgan turned around and stared at them. The two froze, stunned at the man''s reaction. Estella felt chills as she gazed at Morgan''s piercing eyes and furrowed brows. She felt that the man was not pleased by their interruption. And it was terrifying enough for her....